Business and Management 2015 by Macmillan International Higher Education

BUSINESS & MANAGEMENT

20 15 S C H O L A R LY RESOURCES

BUSINESS &

MANAGEMENT Collections

Palgrave Connect presents libraries with a flexible approach to building an ebook Collection with over 14,000 titles offered in the Humanities, the Social Sciences and Business. Our ebooks are published simultaneously with the print edition and uploaded weekly into the current collections. publications are available on Palgrave Connect Our Business & Management Collections publish high quality, innovative and influential books, bringing together the latest cutting-edge thoughts and analyses from business experts, leading scholars, practitioners, researchers, thought-leaders and commentators. These books are rigorous yet accessible, designed to provide inspiration, solutions and tools to improve business, written for academics and professionals involved in executive development and MBA courses.

’

– Tamsine O’Riordan, Publisher, Business professional and scholarly

Over 1,290 titles available in this area Highlights from the 2015 Collection

What are the benefits? • Perpetual access to purchased Collections • Unlimited, concurrent access both remotely and on site

Regularly accessed titles in this subject

• The ability to print, copy and download without DRM restrictions

Business & Management Collection 2013

Two flexible purchase models to choose from:

Business & Management Collection 2013

Business & Management Collection 2012

Business & Management Collection 2011

Collections Model: Over 142 collections based on subjects and years Build Your Own Collections: pick titles from across subject areas and years to create your own collections (minimum purchase applies).

• EPUB format available for ebooks from 2011 onwards (in addition to PDF) for compatibility with e-readers • Simultaneous print and online publication with current Collections updated monthly • Free MARC record download by collection

Contact us to set up a trial or receive a quote: North America and Latin America: institutions@us.nature.com | +1 888 331 6288

Indian subcontinent: onlinesales-india@palgrave.com

Customers in UK, Europe and rest of the world: onlinesales@palgrave.com | +44 (0)207 843 4759

Australia and New Zealand: palgraveonline@macmillan.com.au | +61 3 9825 1009

Mainland China: Haifang.Zhang@macmillan.com | +86-10-88811359 (ext 8009)

www.palgraveconnect.com

Contents

BUSINESS & MANAGEMENT

2015 S C H O L A R LY RESOURCES

Accounting

Asian Business

Banking and Finance

Branding

Business Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility

Business History

Economics

Entrepreneurship and Small Business

European Business

Human Resourse Management and Employee Relations

Innovations

International Business

IT for Business

Management and Leadership

Marketing

Operations Management

Organization Studies

Quantitative Methods and Operational Research

Risk Management, Security and Crime Prevention

Strategy

Tourism

Sales, Rights and Ordering

PUBLISHING WITH PALGRAVE MACMILLAN Palgrave Macmillan offers authors the opportunity to publish at any length, across 3 formats: • Article length, with a variety of Palgrave Journals • Mid-form, with Palgrave Pivot • Full-length books We always welcome new proposals, whether from first-time or more experienced authors. Our Publishing Proposal Form, guidelines and full list of editorial contacts can be found at www.palgrave.com/authors. When contacting us, to help us make a quick and authoritative decision, include as much information as possible on the form, including details about the content, a chapter plan, aims and objectives, the intended market and the competition. We will also be happy to receive your CV (and that of any co-authors/editors) and any sample material, if available. Liz Barlow (UK) – Commissioning Editor, Scholarly Business | liz.barlow@palgrave.com Stacy Noto (US) – Editor, Business and Management | stacy.noto@palgrave-usa.com

LEFT HEADER

Publishing peer reviewed, mid-length research across the Humanities, the Social Sciences and Business, within 12 weeks of acceptance. 7-8,000

Average time to publish:

Words used by scholars and librarians to describe Palgrave Pivot

9 weeks

Shortest time to publish: 5.14 weeks (Sporting Times by Kath Woodward)

EXCITING

Benefits to Authors

Speed – accepted manuscripts published within 12 weeks

Flexibility

TIMELY

– publish at lengths between the journal article and conventional monograph

Average length: 135 pages

INNOVATIVE

Peer review Titles published to date:

BOLD MUCH NEEDED

IDEAL

422

As of December 2014

With many more titles publishing in 2015

Interested in publishing with Palgrave Pivot? Visit our Proposals page to find out more

– all titles are subject to rigorous peer review

Wide dissemination – all titles are available as digital collections, ebooks and as hardback editions

www.palgrave.com/pivot

ACCOUNTING ACCOUNTING

ASIAN BUSINESS ASIAN BUSINESS

St. James’s Place Tax Guide 2014-2015

Employment Relations in South Korea

43rd edition

Evidence from Workplace Panel Surveys

Sinclair, Lipkin, St. James’s Place Tax Guide 2014-2015

Walter Sinclair, Independent Tax Specialist, UK, E. Barry Lipkin, Independent Tax Specialist, UK Reviews of previous editions: “The bestselling tax guide is back and it’s as authoritative as ever...gives practical guidance on tax issues, which would benefit both students and professionals alike.” - Accounting Technician “No other manual compares...the complete A-Z on Tax.” - The Times “The best book ever written on taxation.” - The Daily Telegraph “Acknowledged among consumers and professionals alike as the best book on the subject.” - The Independent *Including editions of the book prior to it being published as the St. James’s Place Tax Guide The 43rd annual edition of the leading guide to taxation in Britain. This practical and user-friendly guide is a bestseller with students, professionals, accountants and private individuals, explaining in simple terms how the UK tax system works and how best to minimise tax liabilities. Contents: Preface * Abbreviations * Introduction * 1. This Year’s Tax Changes * 2. The Basis of Your Tax Liability * 3. Personal Reliefs * 4. Annual Payments and Interest * 5. Computing Your Income Tax Bill * 6. Husband, Wife, Civil Partners and Children * 7. Income from Land and Property * 8. Income from Dividends and Interest * 9. Life Assurance * 10. Income from Employments and PAYE * 11. Income from Businesses and Professions * 12. Partnerships * 13. Companies * 14. Pensions * 15. Miscellaneous Aspects * 16. Returns, Assessments and Repayment Claims * 17. Domicile and Residence * 18. Tax on Foreign Income * 19. Nonresidents, Visitors and Immigrants * 20. Capital Gains Tax * 21. The Taxation of Trusts and Estates * 22. Inheritance Tax * 23. An Outline of VAT * 24. Stamp Duty * 25. Social Security * 26. Tax Saving Hints * Tax Tables * Glossary * Index July 2014 UK August 2014 US 492pp Hardback £34.99 / $53.00 / CN$61.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137411921

9781137411921

Public Sector Accounting and Auditing in Europe The Challenge of Harmonization Isabel Brusca, University of Zaragoza, Spain, Eugenio Caperchione, Modena and Reggio Emilia University, Italy, Sandra Cohen, Athens University of Economics and Business, Greece, Francesca Manes Rossi, University of Salerno, Italy Public Sector Accounting and Auditing in Europe provides an overview of the governmental accounting status quo in Europe by analysing the public sector accounting, budgeting and auditing systems in fourteen European countries. IT sheds light on the challenges faced by European countries as they move towards adoption of the European Public Sector Accounting Standards (EPSAS). Governance and Public Management May 2015 UK May 2015 US 264pp 8 b/w tables, 4 figures Hardback £68.00 / $105.00 / CN$115.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137461339

9781137461339

Edited by Kiu Sik Bae, Korea Labor Institute, Rep. of Korea Employment Relations in South Korea provides readers with an overarching view of Korean employment relations and insight into recent changes, and also to help the general public understand more easily the various phenomena and changes in Korean employment relations. Contents: PART I: INTRODUCTION * 1. About the Study * 2. Workplace and Worker Characteristics in Surveyed Workplaces * PART II: THE MANAGEMENT OF EMPLOYMENT RELATIONS * 3. Human Resource Management * 4. Wage Levels and the Management of Wages * 5. Corporate Welfare as Depicted in the Workplace Panel Survey * 6. The Labor Market and Industrial Relations for Non-Regular Workers * PART III: COLLECTIVE INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS * 7. Analysis of the Functional Level of Labor Relations: Focusing on Wage and Collective Bargaining and Labor Disputes * 8. Labor Unions and Industrial Relations * 9. Industrial Relations in Non‐ Unionized Workplaces * PART IV: WORK ORGANIZATION * 10. Education/Training and Skill Formation * 11. Workplace Innovation and the Work Process * 12. Long Working Hours * PART V: SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION * 13. Summary and Conclusion November 2014 UK November 2014 US 288pp 161 b/w tables, 2 figures Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137428066

9781137428066

The Global Rise of Asian Transformation Trends and Developments in Economic Growth Dynamics Edited by Pongsak Hoontrakul, Schulich School of Business, York University, Canada, Christopher Balding, Peking University HSBC School of Business Shenzhen, China, Reena Marwah, Jesus and Mary College, New Delhi, India The Global Rise of Asian Transformation provides insights into the complex process of macro-political and economic dynamics reshaping the current business landscape in Asia. Contents: Preface; Pongsak Hoontrakul * Foreword; Prof. Khunying Suchada Kiranan * 1. Asia’s Transformation for an Asian Century: Choices and Challenges; Pongsak Hoontrakul * 2. Asia’s Evolving Economic Dynamism and Political Pressures; Pongsak Hoontrakul * 3. Life after QEs; Pongsak Hoontrakul * 4. Fast Track to first Regionalization and then Internationalization; Christopher Balding and David Garcia * 5. Harnessing the Power of Social Media and Mobile Technology in Asia; Pongsak Hoontrakul * 6. The Rise of Asia – Part 1: China and India; Pongsak H, Christopher Balding and Reena Marwah * 7. The Rise of Asia – Part 2: ASEAN 2.0 – AEC and Regional Connectivity; Pongsak Hoontrakul * 8. Asia’s Energy Innovation After Shale Gas Revolution; Chanathip Pharino and Pongsak Hoontrakul * 9. Fragile Supply Chains and the challenge of Natural Disasters * References * List of Contributors * Index December 2014 UK December 2014 US 278pp Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137412355

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

9781137412355

ASIAN BUSINESS Japan Inc. on the Brink

SMEs in Indian Textiles

Institutional Corruption and Agency Failure

The Impact of Globalization in a Developing Market

Susan Carpenter, International Markets Analysts Ltd, UK

Anoo Anna Anthony, FISAT Business School, India, Mary Joseph.T, Bharat Mata Institute of Management Studies (BMIMS), India

Japan Inc. on the Brink contends that structural reforms, the essential third arrow in Abe’s ‘Abenomics’, will not happen. As a result, Abenomics is merely a combination of reckless monetary policy and ambiguous fiscal policies which will fail to regenerate Japan’s fragile economy and cut sovereign debt. Contents: INTRODUCTION * 1. Back to Basics? * 2. THE SIGN OF THE TIMES: Japan Inc (1955-1974) * 3. The Route to Heaven-on-Earth * 4. Pork-barrel Politics in the Prefectures: the winners * 5. The Japanese Economic Miracle: Japan Inc on Center Stage * 6. The Roaring 80s: The Bicycle Economy Out of Control * 7. The Metamorphous of Sanraku Inc * 8. The Martini, Glenfiddich and Babycham Marathons * 9. Marketing and Advertising Strategies: What’s it all About? * 10. Bubble, Bubble Turmoil and Trouble * 11. Special Corporations: Insatiable * 12. The Skill at Disguising * 13. The Price of Pork-barrel Patronage: Beggars Can’t be Choosers * 14. Still Bubbling November 2014 UK November 2014 US 344pp Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137469434

9781137469434

SMEs in Indian Textiles examines how globalisation in its transformative influence affects both firms and workers in the developing economies. This book explores the handloom cluster’s value chain linkages to examine whether firms in the cluster gained from their association with global buyers over this extended period, and in what ways. Contents: PART I: EVOLVING PATTERNS OF EXPANDING TRADE * 1 Firms Adapting to Global Marketplaces - Introduction * 2 The Phenomenon of Globalization in Trade * 3 Theorizations of Economic Geography * PART II: THE INDIAN TEXTILE POLICY AND SMEs * 4 Indian Textile and Apparel Industry * 5 SMEs in Indian Textiles * 6 KannurHistory, Background and Trade Linkages * PART III: ANALYTICAL FRAMEWORK AND STUDY DESIGN * 7 Global Value Chain Analysis Framework * 8 The Study of Linkages using Mixed Methods * 9 Presenting the Analysis of Qualitative Data * PART IV: REFLEXIVE RECORDS OF EVIDENCE * 10 Examining Emergent Codes through Constant Comparison * 11 Examining Apriori Codes through Cross Case Analysis of Case Reports * 12 Analysis of Buyer Perceptions and Buying Functions * PART V: IMPACTS, OUTCOMES AND FUTURE DIRECTIONS * 13 Analyzing the Collective Perception by Survey of SMEs * 14 Developing Meta Inferences From Case Studies and Surveys * 15 Conclusion: Possible Strategies Against Self Limiting Growth September 2014 UK September 2014 US 344pp 26 figures, 41 b/w tables Hardback £70.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137444554

The Second Chinese Revolution

9781137444554

Eugenio Bregolat, Govt of Spain The Second Chinese Revolution explores China’s growing impact on the global economy. Contents: 1. Galloping Economic Development * 2. Heads and Tales of the New Economy * 3. Return to Tianamen * 4. Political Reform * 5. Reform in China and Russia

December 2014 UK December 2014 US 360pp 10 b/w tables Hardback £78.00 / $120.00 / CN$138.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137475978

The Rise of Asian Firms Strengths and Strategies Edited by T. S. Chan, Lingnan University, Hong Kong, Geng Cui, Lingnan University, Hong Kong Asian economies have become a driving force in the world economy, so are the Asian firms, especially those from emerging markets. This book presents a collection of articles that address the strengths and strategies of the rising Asian firms in the process of internationalization and the challenges they face.

9781137475978

Contents: 1. Research on Asian Firms: A Review and Look Forward; Geng Cui, T. S. Chan and Hua Zhang * PART I: ASIAN FIRMS: ENVIRONMENT, INSTITUTIONS AND MANAGEMENT * 2. The Impact of Network Relationships, Environment and Localization on the Performance of Taiwanese Small and Medium Sized Enterprises; Ku-Ho Lin, Ya-Yuan Chang, ChuehChu Ou and Wei-Kuo Tseng * 3. The Internationalization of Emerging Market Multinationals: Effects of Host and Home Country Institutional Factors; Yuanyuan Zhang, Geng Cui and T. S. Chan * 4. Imprinting Home Institutional Influence - Chinese Firms’ Long-term Performance in Cross-border Mergers and Acquisitions; Sai Lan, Fan Yang and Hong (Susan) Zhu * 5. Rise of the Indian Firm - Understanding Leadership in Indian Organizations; Christopher Selvarajah, Denny Meyer, Suku Sukunesan and R. Venkatapathy * PART II: INTERNATIONALIZATION OF ASIAN FIRMS: PERSPECTIVES AND STRATEGIES * 6. Adapting to Change: The State of Singapore Private Enterprise in China; Wilfred How and Caroline Yeoh * 7. Perspectives on Chinese Foreign Direct Investment in Australia; Robert Graham Jack and Lijun (Karl) Qin * 8. Acquisition versus Greenfield: The Strategy of Chinese Privately-owned Investors in Developing Countries; Wiboon Kittilaksanawong, Xudong Chen and Shanshan Xie * 9. Different Roads to Rome? Patterns of Internationalization in Chinese Firms; Geng Cui, T. S. Chan, Hua Zhang and Ling Peng *and more....

AIB Southeast Asia November 2014 UK November 2014 US 248pp 14 figures, 32 b/w tables Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137407696

9781137407696

ASIAN BUSINESS Corporate Social Disclosure

The Entrepreneurial Rise in Southeast Asia

Critical Perspectives in China and Japan

The Quadruple Helix Influence on Technological Innovation

Edited by Carlos Noronha, University of Macau, China Corporate Social Disclosure focuses on China and Japan as two countries for critical observations of the latest CSD issues. This volume consists of 12 chapters written by scholars from these two countries, addressing the latest observation of CSD in different industries based on their latest research findings. Contents: 1. Corporate Social Disclosure in China and Japan: An Introduction; Carlos Noronha * PART I: CORPORATE SOCIAL DISCLOSURE IN CHINA * 2. The Trend of Corporate Social Disclosure in Mainland Chinese Listed Companies: A Longitudinal Observation; Cynthia M.I. Si Tou and Carlos Noronha * 3. Corporate Social Disclosure and Performance Gap: ‘Greenwashing’ Foxconn’s Shenzhen Factories; Carlos Noronha and Stefanie X. Wang * 4. Corporate Social Disclosure: The Case of China’s Milk Product Industry; Carlos Noronha and Katy W.P. Kong * 5. How do Chinese SOEs Integrate Economic Functions with Social Functions? A Viewpoint Based on the Analysis of Social Reporting Features; Jenny J.Q. Guan * 6. An Initial Exploration of Corporate Social Disclosure and Responsible Gaming Disclosure in Macau’s Gambling Industry; Tiffany C.H. Leung * PART II: CORPORATE SOCIAL DISCLOSURE IN JAPAN * 7. Corporate Social Disclosure in Annual Reports: Empirical Evidence from Japan; Mohobbot Ali and Mohammad Badrul Haider * 8. Global Compact Corporations in Japan and their Reporting: Trends and Issues; Mari Kondo * 9. Assurance in Sustainability Reporting: Evidence from Japan; Mohammad Badrul Haider and Katsuhiko Kokubu * 10. The Growing Acceptance of Global Standards by Japanese Firms and its Implication in Terms of Social Disclosure; Philippe Debroux * 11. Corporate Social Disclosure Practices in Japanese Corporations: The Case of Meiko Electronics; Gustavo Tanaka * 12. Corporate Social Disclosure in China and Japan: Concluding Remarks; Carlos Noronha

The Palgrave Macmillan Asian Business Series December 2014 UK December 2014 US 376pp 69 b/w tables, 19 figures Hardback £77.00 / $120.00 / CN$138.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137414670

9781137414670

Edited by Stavros Sindakis, The Institute for Knowledge and Innovation - Southeast Asia, Bangkok University, Thailand, Christian Walter, The Institute for Knowledge and Innovation - Southeast Asia, Bangkok University, Thailand Entrepreneurial Rise in South-East Asia examines the start-up scene environments in Singapore, Malaysia, Vietnam, Thailand, and Indonesia. Contents: 1. Entrepreneurial Rise and Technological Innovation in Southeast Asia; Stavros Sindakis * PART I: REGIONAL INNOVATIVE CAPACITY AND NEW BUSINESS CREATION * 2. Innovation Strategies of New Product Development (NPD); Preecha Chaochotechuang, Farhad Daneshgar, Stavros Sindakis * 3. Entrepreneurship in Singapore; David Gomulya, Olexander Chernyshenko, Marilyn Ang Uy, Wong Lun Kai Francis, Ho Moon-Ho Ringo, Chan Kim Yin, He Lu Calvin Ong * PART II: WEALTH CREATION AND ENTREPRENEURIAL FINANCING IN SOUTHEAST ASIA * 4. Entrepreneurial Financing of the Asian Emerging Countries ; Jarunee Wonglimpiyarat * 5. Financing Technology Ventures; Wilton Chau * PART III: HUMAN CAPITAL AND ORGANIZATIONAL ASPECTS OF INNOVATION * 6. Entrepreneurship and the Human Capital of Organizational Innovation; Sharn Orchard * 7. Intellectual Capital in Southeast Asia; G. Scott Erickson * 8. An Entrepreneurial Approach to Human Resource Management in the Public Sector; Lina Vyas * 9. Current Practices, Perceived Innovation Enablers, and Barriers; Audrey Depeige, Stavros Sindakis * PART IV: THE ROLE OF KNOWLEDGE AND INNOVATION IN REGIONAL DEVELOPMENT * 10. Role of Business Plan Competitions in Promoting Entrepreneurship and Innovation in the Southeast Asian Region; Adith Cheosakul * 11. Digital Growth in the ASEAN Educational Community to Further Innovation and Scholarship; Willard G. Van De Bogart * 12. Evolving from The Triple Helix; Irene YH Fan * PART V: INNOVATION AND ENVIRONMENTAL SUSTAINABILITY IN ASIA * 13. Environmental Threats and their Effects on the Innovation Landscape in Thailand; Stefania Paladini, Eleni Anoyrkati * 14. Environmental Protection and Pollution Management in China ; Yiu Fai Tsang * CONCLUSION * 15. Reinforcing the Five Pillars of Innovation in Southeast Asia; Christian Walter

Palgrave Studies in Democracy, Innovation, and Entrepreneurship for Growth January 2015 UK January 2015 US 373pp 48 b/w tables, 24 figures Hardback £78.00 / $120.00 / CN$138.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137378675

9781137378675

Asian Perspectives on the Development of Public Relations

Risky Business in China A Guide to Due Diligence

Other Voices

Jeremy Gordon, China Business Services Limited, UK ‘Jeremy Gordon has written an accessible manual on how to assess risk and due diligence in China. A must-have guide for the world’s potentially largest market.’ - Linda Yueh, author of China’s Growth: The Making of an Economic Superpower; Fellow in Economics, St Edmund Hall, University of Oxford and Adjunct Professor of Economics, London Business School Risk is a major reason that companies fail in, or fail to enter, China. Packed with case studies, this unique book demonstrates how correctly applied due diligence can not only reduce business risk in China, but also provide excellent business intelligence to support negotiations and business relationships. Contents: Introduction * 1. Opportunity and Risk * 2. How Risky is Business in China? * 3. Due Diligence in China * 4. Putting Due Diligence on the Map * 5. Survival Toolkit * 6. Emergency Services * 7. The Good, the Bad, and the Ugly * 8. Conclusion: The New Reality * Appendix: Resources and Reads

Edited by Tom Watson, Bournemouth Media School, UK The National Perspectives on the Development of Public Relations: Other Voices series is the first to offer an authentic world-wide view of the history of public relations. It will feature six books, five of which will cover continental and regional groups. This first book in the series focuses on Asia and Australasia. Contents: Introduction; Tom Watson * 1. Australia and New Zealand; Mark Sheehan (Australia); Chris Galloway (New Zealand) * 2. China; Chun-Ju Flora Hung-Baesecke and Yi-Ru Regina Chen * 3. India; John V. Vil’Anilam * 4. Indonesia; Gregoria Arum Yudarwati * 5. Japan; Koichi Yamamura, Seiya Ikari and Takashi Kenmochi * 6. Malaysia; Zeti Azreen Ahmad * 7. Philippines; Marianne D. Sison and Zeny Sarabia-Panol * 8. Singapore; May O. Lwin and Augustine Pang * 9. Taiwan; Yi-Chen Wu and Ying-Ju Lai * 10. Thailand; Napawan Tantivejakul * 11. Vietnam; Loan T.H. Van

Palgrave Pocket Consultants August 2014 UK September 2014 US 248pp 22 diagrams, 8 b/w tables, 9 b/w illustrations, 3 figures Paperback £16.99 / $27.00 / CN$31.00 9781137433213 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137433213

National Perspectives on the Development of Public Relations April 2014 UK April 2014 US 176pp 1 figure Hardback £45.00 / $67.50 / CN$78.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137398130

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

9781137398130

ASIAN BUSINESS

BANKING AND FINANCE

Asian Business & Management

BANKING AND FINANCE

Michael A. Witt, INSEAD, Singapore Asian Business & Management provides a unique perspective on business and management issues, both within Asia and between Asia and the wider world. Adopting a range of disciplinary and methodological approaches, it is critical reading for a broad global audience with an interest in this dynamic subject.

ISSN: 14724782 / EISSN: 14769328 For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/abm

Follow Palgrave Macmillan on Facebook®. ‘Like’ our Facebook® page to get the latest news, reviews and event invites.

for the latest news, events and competitions

www.facebook.com/PalgraveMacmillan

www.twitter.com/PalgraveBiz

@PalgraveBiz

The Handbook of Global Agricultural Markets

Nijs, The Handbook of Global Agricultural Markets

The Business and Finance of Land, Water, and Soft Commodities Luc Nijs, The Talitha Group LLC This handbook is a one-stop reference for practitioners and academics in finance, business and economics, providing a holistic reference to the international agriculture business. It takes a multidisciplinary approach, looking at the issues, opportunities and investable themes in the global agricultural space, combining research and practical tools. Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. The Investible Agricultural Space * 3. Climate Change and Agriculture * 4. Agricultural Risk Management & Insurance * 5. Biofuels and Agriculture * 5b. Biofuels and the Sustainability Conundrum * 6. Financing the Agricultural Firm * 7. Farmland as an Investible Asset Class * 7b. Farmland * 7c. Land Expectation Value and Timberland Valuation * 8. Advanced Technologies and Agriculture * 9. Challenges in Agricultural Production and Natural Resources Management * 10. Sustainability of Agricultural Productivity Growth * 11. Commodity Derivative Markets * 11b. Trading Agricultural Commodities * 11c. Speculation on (Agricultural) Commodity Markets & Financialization of Commodity Price Formation * 12. The Global Water Challenge * 13. Future Agricultural Dynamics June 2014 UK July 2014 US 608pp 6 graphs, 52 b/w tables Hardback £70.00 / $110.00 / CN$127.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137302335

9781137302335

The Handbook of International Loan Documentation Second Edition Sue Wright, English Lawyer, UK This new edition provides a highly practical and comprehensive resource for bankers and lawyers, at all levels of experience, involved in international lending. The author covers the terms of international loan documentation with comprehensive explanations of the purpose of the provisions, and of areas that may require negotiation. Contents: Introduction * PART I: ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS * 1. Interpretation * 2. The Facility * 3. Utilization * 4. Repayment, Prepayment and Cancellation * 5. Costs of Utilization * 6. Additional Payment Obligations * PART II: GUARANTEE, REPRESENTATIONS, UNDERTAKINGS AND EVENTS OF DEFAULT * 7. Guarantee * 8. Representations, Undertakings, and Events of Default * PART III: BOILERPLATE AND SCHEDULES * 9. Changes to Parties * 10. The Finance Parties * 11. Administration * 12. Governing Law and Enforcement * 13. Schedules * December 2014 UK January 2015 US 408pp 5 figures Paperback £100.00 / $160.00 / CN$185.00 Canadian Rights www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137467584

9781137467584

BANKING AND FINANCE Banks, Bankers, and Bankruptcies Under Crisis Understanding Failure and Mergers During the Great Recession Dimitris N. Chorafas, Switzerland and France Banks, Bankers, and Bankruptcies Under Crisis uses case studies of failed banks, banks that would have failed without taxpayer intervention, and in some cases banks obliged to merge under government pressure, to better understand global banking today. Contents: 1. Banks Too Big to Fail * 2. Banks and Regulators * 3. Banking Practices and the Evolution of Trading Rules * 4. Euroland’s Banking Union and Its Stress Tests * 5. Lehman Brothers and Bear Stearns * 6. American International Group * 7. Federal National Mortgage Association and Federal Loan Mortgage Corporation * 8. Citigroup * 9. British Banks at the Edge * 10. Euroland’s Banks * 11. The Challenges Japan Faced With Its Banking Industry * 12. Japanese Banks Which Bled in the River of Red Ink July 2014 UK July 2014 US 320pp 1 table, 7 figures Hardback £70.00 / $110.00 / CN$127.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137436986

9781137436986

Edited by Damien King, University of the West Indies at Mona, Jamaica; Caribbean Policy Research Institute, David F. Tennant, University of the West Indies, Mona Debt and Development in Small Island Developing States draws on the expertise of established researchers and public officials from within the SIDS community to answer the following pressing questions related to sustainability, debt accumulation, and prospects for future growth. Contents: 1. Introduction; David Tennant and Damien King * PART I: THE PROBLEM - PAST, PRESENT, AND PROSPECTS * 2. The Developmental Impact of Debt; David Tennant * 3. The Debt Experience of SIDS in the Caribbean; Michelle Robinson * 4. The Debt Experience of SIDS in the Pacific; Biman Prasad * 5. The Debt Experience of SIDS in the Atlantic, Indian Ocean and South China Sea (AIMS); Kaymara Barrett, Altricia Dawson and Sidonia Mackenzie * 6. Prospects for the Growth of Debt in SIDS; David Tennant and Kario-Paul Brown * PART II: CAUSES OF DEBT ACCUMULATION IN SIDS * 7. The Sources of Debt in SIDS; Damien King * 8. Institutional Causes of Debt in SIDS in the Caribbean, Pacific and AIMS Regions; Colin Bullock and Christine Clarke * PART III: AN AGENDA FOR DEBT SUSTAINABILITY IN SIDS * 9. An Assessment of Recent Remedial Action Taken by Selected SIDS; Michelle Robinson * 10. Debt Sustainability and Sustainable Development in SIDS; Abdullahi Abdulkadri * 11. Elements of an Agenda for Debt Sustainability in SIDS; Damien King * 12. Conclusion; Damien King and David Tennant December 2014 UK December 2014 US 292pp 61 tables, 31 figures, 3 boxes Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137397126

Criminal Capital How the Finance Industry Facilitates Crime Stephen Platt, Stephen Platt and Associates LLP ‘Stephen is a leader in financial crime writing. This book will catapult your understanding of how criminals compromise financial markets.’ — Robert Mazur, former federal agent and author of The Infiltrator Criminal Capital is an engaging but authoritative account of how financial structures and products can and are being used to evade proper scrutiny and enable criminal activity and what can be done about it. Based on the analysis of the financial methods that are frequently used by criminals, it deals with the widespread abuse of financial systems. Contents: 1. Harmful Practices * 2. Money Laundering Models * 3. Onshore/Offshore Dichotomy * 4. Drug Trafficking * 5. Bribery and Corruption * 6. Piracy * 7. Human Trafficking / Smuggling of Migrants * 8. Terror Financing * 9. Sanctions * 10. Tax Evasion * 11. Causes and Solutions January 2015 UK January 2015 US 248pp 29 diagrams, 1 map Hardback £19.99 / $30.00 / CN$34.50 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137337290

Debt and Development in Small Island Developing States

9781137337290

9781137397126

The Empowered Investor 7 Principles for Strategic Wealth Creation in a New Financial World Cuno Puempin, St. Gallen University, Switzerland, Heinrich von Liechtenstein, University of Navarra, Spain, Fariba Hashemi, Applied Economics Research, Switzerland, Brian Hashemi, Salus Partners SA, Switzerland “After having lost trust in the financial industry the empowered investor mandates us to regain control of our investments. A really revolutionary book that must be read by all investors open to a fundamental redesign of their investment strategy.” - Thorsten Hens, Chairman Department of Banking and Finance, Professor of Financial Economics, University of Zurich The Empowered Investor presents an innovative new framework consisting of seven key principles for strategic wealth creation. Illustrated through real world examples from interviews with highly successful private investors, the book provides a practical perspective grounded in sound academic research and practical experience. Contents: PART I: FROM BROKEN INVESTMENT MODELS TO SUSTAINABLE STRATEGIC INVESTING FRAMEWORK * 1. Perils of the Misguided Investor * 2. Why Traditional Investment Models Don’t Work * 3: Putting the Investor Back at the Core of Investment Strategy * 4. The Essence of Strategy * 5. The Empowered Investor: A New Paradigm of Investing * PART II: HOW TO BE A SUCCESSFUL STRATEGIC INVESTOR * 6. Two Paths to Your Investment Strategy * 7. What Should an Effective Investment Strategy Contain? * 8. How to Develop a Strategy for Wealth Creation * 9. Putting Everything Together June 2014 UK July 2014 US 176pp 10 b/w tables, 10 figures Hardback £19.99 / $30.00 / CN$34.50 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137366863

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

9781137366863

BANKING AND FINANCE Financial Crime and White-Collar Criminals

A Fragile Balance

An Empirical and Theoretical Survey for Research

Emergency Savings and Liquid Resources for Low-Income Consumers

Petter Gottschalk, Norwegian School of Management BI Drawing on five years of data, Gottschalk expands the typical view of white-collar crime from high-profile individual case studies to a large empirical sample, using the three main motivators of financial crime economic, organizational, and behavioral - to build a framework for a general theory of white-collar crime. Contents: 1. White-Collar Crime and Criminals * 2. Empirical Sample of Criminals * 3. More Empirical Analysis of Sample * 4. Theoretical Framework * 5. Economical Dimension * 6. Organizational Dimension * 7. Behavioral Dimension * 8. International Case Studies May 2015 UK May 2015 US 304pp 36 tables, 14 figures Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137515681

9781137515681

Financial Cycles Sovereigns, Bankers, and Stress Tests Dimitris N. Chorafas, Switzerland and France Chorafas argues that to overcome the more narrow limits of the business cycle, we need to go beyond its traditional six to seven year focus and address the longer term. Contents: 1. Financial Cycles * 2. Financial Stability * 3. Dismantling Globalization By Changing the Rules * 4. Twists of Monetary Policy and of Supervision * 5. Debt and Democracy * 6. Debt Sustainability * 7. The Banking Industry * 8. Stress Testing Assets and Liabilities * 9. The Hydra of Financial Exposure * 10. European Banking Union

March 2015 UK March 2015 US 256pp 1 b/w table Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137497970

9781137497970

Edited by J. Michael Collins, University of WisconsinMadison, USA A Fragile Balance examines strategies to promote emergency savings, especially among underserved households. Contents: 1. Paying for the Unexpected: Making the Case for a New Generation of Strategies to Boost Emergency Savings, Affording Contingencies, and Liquid Resources for Low-Income Families; J. Michael Collins * 2. Liquid Savings Patterns and Credit Usage Among the Poor; Leah Gjertson * 3. Upside Down: The Failure of Federal Tax Policies to Support Emergency Savings; Ezra Levin * 4. Save at Home: Building Emergency Savings One Mortgage Payment at a Time; Stephanie Moulton, Anya Samek, Cäzilia Loibl * 5. The SaveUSA Coalition: Using Behavioral Economics to Build Unrestricted Savings at Tax Time; Jonathan Mintz * 6. Refund to Savings: Creating Contingency Savings at Tax Time; Michal Grinstein-Weiss, Krista Comer, Blair Russell, Clinton Key, Dana Perantie, Dan Ariely * 7. Enhancing Financial Capability TANF Bank Accounts; Karan Gill, Dana Mills, Margaret McKenna * 8. Building Emergency Savings Through ‘Impulse Saving’; Kim Manturuk, Jessica Dorrance, Jayson Halladay * 9. Prosperity SmartSave Card: An Incentivized Emergency Savings Strategy; Sharon Henderson * 10. Accelerating Savings Among Low-Income Households; Ed Khashadourian * 11. Start2Save: Helping Working Families Meet Unexpected Expenses and Opportunities; Ingrid Holguin * 12. Incorporating Savings into the Debt Management Plan; Karen Heisler, Seth Lutter * 13. Who Said Pigs Can’t Fly? A Learner-Centered Approach to Emergency; Sonya Caesar * 14. Epilogue: Emergency Savings as a Central Component of Family Financial Security; J. Michael Collins, Thomas Shapiro March 2015 UK March 2015 US 256pp 14 table, 8 figures, 2 images Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137487810

9781137487810

IPO Banks Pitch, Selection and Mandate Philippe Espinasse, P&C Ventures Limited, Hong Kong “Philippe knows the IPO process inside out. Just as importantly, he explains complex concepts in clear and simple prose.” - Robert Cookson, Financial Times Former banker Philippe Espinasse, offers advice for the interview, selection and appointment of lead banks, as well as for the execution of an IPO. The book includes case studies from around the world and explains negotiation techniques through which issuers can save considerable time, effort and costs, and also limit their potential liabilities. Contents: PART I: ASSESSING CANDIDATE BANKS * 1. The Paradigm Shift: The Negotiating Advantage * 2. Using an Independent Adviser or Consultant * 3. How an Adviser / Consultant Can Best Add Value * 4. The Beauty Parade * 5. The Invitation Email * 6. The Confidentiality Agreement * 7. Length of the Request for Proposal (RFP) and Weightings * PART II: THE RFP * 1. Market Conditions * 2. Market Positioning * 3. Valuation * 4. Execution Considerations and Team * 5. Marketing Considerations * 6. Fees and Expenses * 7. Credentials and Other Considerations * 8. Checklists * 9. Information on the Issuer * PART III: INTERVIEWING INVESTMENT BANKS * 1. Interviewing Research Analysts * 2. Drawing up a Shortlist * 3. Obtaining Financing * 4. Format of Oral Presentations * 5. Dealing with Further Marketing Efforts * PART IV: FORMALLY APPOINTING LEAD BANKS * 1. How Many Lead Banks? * 2. Selecting Investment Banks * 3. Communicating Declines * 4. Managing Leaks * 5. The Engagement Letter(s) * 6. Customary Principles for Placement Agreements * 7. The KickOff Meeting * 8. After the Kick-Off Meeting * Conclusion May 2014 UK June 2014 US 216pp 1 figure Hardback £29.99 / $50.00 / CN$57.50 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137412935

9781137412935

BANKING AND FINANCE Managing Risks in the European Periphery Debt Crisis Lessons from the Trade-off between Economics, Politics and the Financial Markets Edited by George Christodoulakis, Manchester Business School, University of Manchester, UK The European Periphery Debt Crisis (EPDC) has its roots in the structural characteristics of the individual economies affected. This book offers a full diagnosis of the EPDC, its association to the national and international structural characteristics and a full analysis from a risk management point of view of the available policy options. Contents: PART I: GENESIS OF THE CRISIS, USE AND ABUSE OF ECONOMIC POLICIES * 1. The Euro Zone Sovereign Debt Crisis (The genesis of the crisis?); Philippe D’Arvisenet * 2. The Trade-Off between Fiscal and Competiveness Adjustments; Daniel Gros with Cinzia Alcidi * 3. Ireland and Greece: A Tale of Two Fiscal Adjustments; Jeffrey D. Anderson and Jessica Stallings * 4. Rating Agencies vs. Sovereign Debt Markets: A Tale of Interacting Risk Preferences; George Christodoulakis * 5. The 2012 Greek Debt Restructuring and its Aftermath; Miranda Xafa * 6. Economic Theories that Influenced the Judges of Karlsruhe; Paul De Grauwe * 7. Privatization of State Assets in the Presence of Crisis; George Christodoulakis * PART II: CRISIS RESOLUTION, PROSPECT AND RETROSPECT * 8. How to Manage Public Debts in the Euro Area?; Catherine Mathieu and Henri Sterdyniak * 9. A Transfer Mechanism as a Stabilization Tool in the EMU; Kerstin Bernoth and Philipp Engler * 10. Sovereign Debt and its Restructuring Framework in the Eurozone; Ashoka Mody * 11. Funding Risks for Corporates in the Periphery: Disintermediation to the Rescue for the Larger Ones, Challenges for the Others; Blaise Ganguin * 12. On Solving Europe’s Financial Issues to Promote Sustainable Growth; Adrian Blundell-Wignall and Caroline Roulet * 13. European Banking Union as a Response to the Fragmentation of the Internal Market Resulting from the Financial and Sovereign Debt Crisis; Dimitris Tsibanoulis with Gerry Kounadis December 2014 UK January 2015 US 304pp 85 figures, 27 b/w tables Hardback £65.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137304940

9781137304940

On the Brink How a Crisis Transformed Lloyd’s of London Andrew Duguid, Lloyd’s, UK ‘Andrew Duguid has written a well-balanced, but at the same time racy and highly readable history of Lloyd’s near-death experience and how the market was saved. Duguid is objective, but has used his inside experience well. On The Brink is a very valuable addition to the historical record of the City of London.’ - Sir Howard Davies, Former Chairman, FSA Huge losses very nearly destroyed Lloyd’s, a revered British institution, the world’s largest insurance market. Ten thousand people faced big personal bills they thought profoundly unfair. They challenged a complacent institution, forcing it to confront its biggest ever crisis. This book tells what really happened, from the inside. Contents: 1. Inside Out * 2. Hidden Trains * 3. Alarm Bells * 4. Fresh Start * 5. The Chasm * 6. Last Chance * 7. Struggling * 8. Tightrope * 9. Aftermath * Reflections August 2014 UK September 2014 US 400pp 7 b/w tables, 12 figures, 10 b/w illustrations Hardback £24.99 / $40.00 / CN$46.00 9781137299291 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137299291

The Pillars of Finance The Misalignment of Finance Theory and Investment Practice Guy Fraser-Sampson, Cass Business School, UK ‘The financial crisis has already caused the tectonic plates of financial and investment theory to shift a little. But Guy Fraser-Sampson is giving them an impressive shove.’ - Tim Price, Head of Investment, PFP Group Written by bestselling finance author Guy FraserSampson, this is a provocative account of the severe limitations of modern finance, advocating a bold new way forward for the finance industry. The Pillars of Finance is a lively and provocative read, challenging some of the core beliefs of modern finance. Contents: 1. Introductory Chapter * 2. Do we Approach Finance Scientifically? * 3. Logic and Emotion * 4. Objectivity and Subjectivity in Finance * 5. Problems with Thinking, Feeling and Perceiving Finance * 6. Return * 7. Risk * 8. Value * 9. The Need for a New Approach * 10. Accepting Lack of Knowledge and Understanding * 11. Modernist Finance * 12. The Modernist Investor May 2014 UK June 2014 US 272pp Hardback £26.99 / $40.00 / CN$46.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137264053

9781137264053

Private Equity Unchained Strategy Insights for the Institutional Investor Thomas Meyer, LDS Partners ‘Based on his wealth of knowledge and experience, Thomas Meyer provides important insights into the private equity business and valuable advice to anyone involved in it. He describes how private equity is an engine of innovation and how the partnership model evolved as a central component of it. He cautions against some of the regulatory and valuation practices that are currently employed in the sector.’ - Colin Mayer, Peter Moores Professor of Management Studies, Said Business School, University of Oxford, author of “Firm Commitment: Why the Corporation is Failing Us and How to Restore Trust in It” There are significant returns to be made from private equity, infrastructure, real estate and other illiquid investments, but a competitive strategy is essential for investment success and for meeting objectives. This book takes readers through all the considerations of planning and implementing an investment strategy in illiquid investments. Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. A Neo-Classical Asset Class * 3. The ‘Repair-Shop of Capitalism’ * 4. Strategy Challenges * 5. Strategic Asset Allocation * 6. The Sky is Not the Limit * 7. The Limited Partnership as Part of Humanity’s DNA * 8. Intermediation * 9. Economics of Private Equity Firms * 10. Objectives * 11. Performance Persistence * 12. Nobody knows Anything * 13. Spreading Risks - Thickly and Thinly * 14. Private Equity Risk * 15. Performance Measurement * 16. The Galapagos Islands of Finance * 17. The Locust and the Deep Blue Sea * 18. Intelligence * 19. Spreading Risks - Part II * 20. Open-Ended Relationships * 21. Hard and Soft Power * 22. Real Options * 23. No Plan Survives… * 24. The Heavy Hand of Regulation * 25. Private Equity Unchained September 2014 UK October 2014 US 336pp 22 figures Hardback £34.99 / $55.00 / CN$63.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137286819

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

9781137286819

BANKING AND FINANCE Trading Thalesians

The Women’s Guide to Successful Investing

What the Ancient World Can Teach Us About Trading Today

Achieving Financial Security and Realizing Your Goals

Saeed Amen, Thalesians, UK Trading Thalesians mixes history on the ancient world with investment ideas for traders involved in financial markets today. It goes through ideas such as measuring risk, whether investors should try to outperform the market, Black Swans and ways of creating appropriate investment targets. It will appeal to professional traders and retail investors. Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. The Basis of Everything is Water: Understanding Risk in Markets * 3. Harvesting Olives: Alpha and Beta Strategies * 4. The Code of Hammurabi: Reducing Risk * 5. Not What They Care About: Having Targets Other Than Returns * 6. Predicting the Eclipse: Searching for a Black Swan and Windows of Doom * 7. In the Stars: Lateral Thinking to Understand Markets * 8. The Silk Road and its Secrets: Is There Really a Secret Sauce in Trading? * 9. The Father of History: This Time is Sometimes Different in Markets * 10. A Last Word to Conclude October 2014 UK November 2014 US 216pp 32 figures Hardback £24.99 / $40.00 / CN$46.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137399526

9781137399526

Transaction Banking and the Impact of Regulatory Change Basel III and Other Challenges for the Global Economy Ruth Wandhöfer, Citigroup ‘This book brings to light the challenges of international regulation and clarifies the role of transaction services in supporting the world economy. It is an essential navigation tool to understand unintended consequences of regulations on this vital business, where rectifying measures should be applied.’ — Vítor Constâncio, Vice President European Central Bank Ruth Wandhöfer takes you on a journey through postcrisis regulatory reform, highlighting the unintended consequences of some of the measures on transaction banking, a business that provides the backbone of financial markets. Contents: Foreword by Vitor Constâncio * 1 Regulation and Transaction Banking: A journey through a relationship at the crossroads * 2 Post-Crisis Regulatory Change * Introduction * 3 Transaction Banking 101 * Introduction * 4 The Journey from Basel I to Basel III: History and fundamentals explained * Introduction and history of the Basel Committee * 5 The Payments Special: Europe Versus the US * Introduction * 6 Impacts of Basel III and Other Regulations on the Transaction Banking Business * Introduction * 7 The Magic Mix: Or how to avoid future financial crises October 2014 UK November 2014 US 312pp 9 figures, 33 b/w tables Hardback £60.00 / $100.00 / CN$115.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137351760

9781137351760

Nancy Tengler, Writer, USA ‘In The Women’s Guides to Successful Investing, Tengler shares her secrets for busy women who know very well how to make money but now want to learn how to invest it. Since an enormous percentage of women will at some point oversee the family wealth, increasing their knowledge and comfort with the process will grow the balance sheets of families across America. And that benefits us all. A must read for mothers and grandmothers and daughters and wives and every man who knows a woman.’ Dr. Arthur Laffer, Founder and Chairman of Laffer Associates, former economic advisor to President Ronald Reagan ‘This book fills a gap for those of us who know how to make money, but know less about how to invest it. As Tengler points out: women tend to live longer, and investing our assets sensibly is the only way to maximize our hard-won success and retire comfortably.’ - Susan Varga, COO, Kudlow & Co., LLC, Radio Producer, nationally-syndicated The Larry Kudlow Show Providing proven wealth accumulation strategies, tailored advice and a comprehensive market analysis, this book is a must-read for female investors who want to master volatile markets with long-term success. August 2014 UK August 2014 US 224pp Hardback £17.99 / $28.00 / CN$32.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137403346

Women of the Street Why Female Money Managers Generate Higher Returns (and How You Can Too) Meredith A. Jones is best known for creating industry-leading hedge fund research. She has presented her original research and insights to industry participants around the world and has had her findings published in books, journals, industry publications, and international major media outlets, including the Economist, the New York Times, CNBC, the Wall Street Journal, the Financial Times, the Journal of Investing, and others . Women invest differently than men. Collectively, their approach has proven profitable and reliable, and it outperforms the industry at large. The portfolio managers interviewed in this book exemplify the best traits that women investors tend to exhibit. Read Women of the Street to learn from them and start investing a little more like a girl. Contents: Part 1: The Research * Introduction: The Women * Chapter 1: The Feminine Investing Mystique * Part II: From Theory to Practice * Chapter 2: Aim Small, Miss Small: Targeting International Small Company Stocks * Chapter 3: Quite Contrary: Going Long in Mid-Cap Stocks * Chapter 4: Getting Extra from Ordinary: Investing Long & Short in Micro & Small Caps * Chapter 5: She Blinded Me With Science: Long & Short Biotech Investing * Chapter 6: Puzzling It Out: Investing in Distressed Credit * Chapter 7: Making all the Rules: Relative Value and Directional Credit Investing * Chapter 8: In the Beginning: Investing in Seed and Early Stage Venture Capital * Chapter 9: The Pragmatist: Growth Equity Investing * Chapter 10: Mrs. Fix-It: Distressed and Turnaround Private Equity Investing * Chapter 11: Billion Dollar Listing: Real Estate Investing * Chapter 12: The Sleuths: Fund of Funds Investing * Part II: Investing as and Like a Girl * Chapter 13: Lessons From The ‘Broad’ Market May 2015 UK April 2015 US 320pp 1 illustration Hardback £18.99 / $30.00 / CN$34.50 Canadian Rights www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137462893

9781137403346

9781137462893

BANKING AND FINANCE Interest Rate Modelling in the Multi-Curve Framework Foundations, Evolution and Implementation Marc Henrard, OpenGamma, UK ‘This is an important and much needed book looking at multiple interest rate curves, including collateralization. The subject is introduced motivating all developments from a historical perspective and is very pleasant to read. Both a rigorous theoretical approach and detailed practical recipes for bootstrapping and interpolation techniques are provided, in a coordinated fashion, using real market products. Advanced discussion of multiple curve dynamics, with specific modeling choices, is also given in the final part. From one of the originators and protagonists of the recent multiple curves literature, this is an appealing book for a potentially wide audience and is strongly recommended.’ - Prof Damiano Brigo, Department of Mathematics, Imperial College London, and Director of the Capco Institute, and Dr Andrea Pallavicini, Imperial College London and Head of Equity, FX and Commodities models, Banca IMI Following the financial crisis dramatic market changes, a new standard in interest rate modelling emerged, called the multi-curve framework. The author provides a detailed analysis of the framework, through its foundations, evolution and implementation. The book also covers recent extensions to collateral and stochastic spreads modelling. Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. The Multi-Curve Framework Foundations * 3. Variation on a Theme * 4. Interpolation * 5. Curve Calibration * 6. More Instruments * and more....

Applied Quantitative Finance May 2014 UK June 2014 US 264pp 24 figures, 35 b/w tables Hardback £60.00 / $100.00 / CN$115.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137374653

9781137374653

Quantitative Finance Back to Basic Principles Adil Reghai, Natixis, France ‘Bâle III identifies Valuation and Risk models as key features to be measured and followed. Recently, with the wide spread mission of the Asset Quality Review (AQR) regulators reinforced best practices in this field proposing concrete solutions. This book offers a step by step introduction to the usage of models in practice and assesses the fair valuation as well as the model risk measurement. It is done with pedagogy and helps the reader fine tune the choice of model following an incremental implementation methodology for many practical situations’. - Jean-Marc Prevost, Global Head of Model Validation, Natixis. The series of recent financial crises have thrown open the world of quantitative finance and financial modeling. This book brings together proven and new methodologies from finance, physics and engineering, along with years of industry and academic experience to provide a cookbook of models for dealing with the challenges of today’s markets.

XVA Desks: A New Era for Risk Management Understanding, Building and Managing Counterparty & Funding Risk Ignacio Ruiz, iRuiz Consulting, UK Written by a practitioner with years working in CVA, FVA and DVA this is a thorough, practical guide to a topic at the very core of the derivatives industry. It takes readers through all aspects of counterparty credit risk management and the business cycle of CVA, DVA and FVA, focusing on risk management, pricing considerations and implementation. Contents: 1. The Banking Industry, the Capital Markets and Counterparty Credit Risk * 2. Introduction to Quantifying Risk: From Market to Counterparty Risk * 3. Counterparty Credit Risk I: Exposure Measurement * 4. Counterparty Credit Risk II: Loss Given Default and Default Probability * 5. Right and Wrong Way Risk * 6. Backtesting Risk Models * 7. Risk Model Validation * 8. A Primer on Risk-Free Pricing * 9. Pricing Counterparty Risk: CVA * 10. FVA and Discounting * 11. A Primer on Regulatory Capital Calculation * 12. CVA & FVA Systems and Project Management

Applied Quantitative Finance March 2015 UK April 2015 US 576pp 135 figures Hardback £60.00 / $90.00 / CN$104.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137448194

9781137448194

Zero Lower Bound Term Structure Modeling A Practitioner’s Guide Leo Krippner, Economics Department, Reserve Bank of New Zealand ‘In this book, Leo Krippner thoroughly develops a new and easy-to-use model of the yield curve with a zero lower bound. He thoughtfully explores the model’s important implications for both investors and policy makers. Anyone interested in the term structure of interest rates will want to own this book.’ - Scott F. Richard, Practice Professor of Finance, The Wharton School, University of Pennsylvania and Former Managing Director and Fixed Income Portfolio Manager, Morgan Stanley Investment Management Nominal yields on government debt in several countries have fallen very near their zero lower bound (ZLB), causing a liquidity trap and limiting the capacity to stimulate economic growth. This book provides a comprehensive reference to ZLB structure modeling in an applied setting. Contents: Chapter 1: Introduction * Chapter 2: A New Framework for a New Environment * Chapter 3: Gaussian Affine Term Structure Models * Chapter 4: Krippner Framework for ZLB Term Structure Modeling * Chapter 5: Black Framework for ZLB Term Structure Modeling * Chapter 6: K-ANSM Foundations and ‘Effective Monetary Stimulus’ * Chapter 7: Monetary Policy Applications * Chapter 8: Financial Market Applications * Chapter 9: Conclusions and Future Research Directions * Appendix A: Matrix Notation

Applied Quantitative Finance February 2015 UK January 2015 US 440pp 80 graphs Hardback £60.00 / $110.00 / CN$127.00 Canadian Rights www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137408327

9781137408327

Contents: 1. Financial Modeling * 2. About Modeling * 3. From Black & Scholes to the Emergence of the Smile Modeling * 4. What is the Fair Value in the Presence of the Smile? * 5. Mono Underlying Risk Exploration * 6. A General Pricing Formula * and more....

Applied Quantitative Finance December 2014 UK January 2015 US 256pp 131 figures Hardback £60.00 / $100.00 / CN$115.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137414496

9781137414496

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

BANKING AND FINANCE Equity Derivatives Explained

The Greeks and Hedging Explained

Mohamed Bouzoubaa, Samurai Finance Consulting ‘Equity Derivatives Explained is the beginner’s guide into the world of financial derivatives. It is impressive in its simplicity and great in its explanatory power.’ - Wim Schoutens, Professor Financial Engineering at the Catholic University of Leuven (Belgium) A succinct book that provides readers with all they need to know about the equity derivatives business. It deals with vanilla equity products, their usage, structuring and their risk management. The author efficiently bridges the gap between theory and practice, constantly linking risk management tools with specific business objectives. Contents: 1. Fundamentals * 2. Inside the World of Equity Derivatives * 3. Forwards, Futures and Swaps * 4. Pricing Vanilla Options * 5. Risk Management Tools * 6. Strategies Built around Vanillas * 7. Yield Enhancement Solutions

Financial Engineering Explained May 2014 UK June 2014 US 112pp 47 figures Paperback £19.99 / $30.00 / CN$34.50 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137335531

9781137335531

Jan-Frederik Mai, XAIA Investment GmbH, Germany, Matthias Scherer, Technische Universität München, Germany ‘This book is a very valuable source for modeling specialists in the financial industry. It follows a nontechnical but mathematically rigorous approach. Many illustrations as well as examples help readers to develop a solid understanding of copula functions and their applications. Especially remarkable are the various parts of the book dealing with the simulation of copulas. In this way the book provides clearly elaborated tools for dependence modeling in financial engineering.’ - Dr. Christian Bluhm, Chief Risk Officer and Spokesman of the Executive Board, FMS Wertmanagement This is a succinct guide to the application and modelling of dependence models or copulas in the financial markets. First applied to credit risk modelling, copulas are now widely used across a range of derivatives transactions, asset pricing techniques and risk models and are a core part of the financial engineer’s toolkit. Contents: 1. What are Copulas? * 2. Which Rules for Handling Copulas Do I Need? * 3. How to Measure Dependence? * 4. What are Popular Families or Copulas? * 5. How to Stimulate Multivariate Distributions? * 6. How to Estimate Parameters of a Multivariate Model? * 7. How to Deal with Uncertainty Concerning Dependence? * 8. How to Construct a Portfolio-Default Model?

Financial Engineering Explained

A practical guide to basic and intermediate hedging techniques for traders, structerers and risk management quants. This book fills a gap for a technical but not impenetrable guide to hedging options, and the ‘Greek’ (Theta, Vega, Rho and Lambda) -parameters that represent the sensitivity of derivatives prices. Contents: 1. Hedging Contingent Claims * 2. Delta Hedging in the Perfect World * 3. The Balance between Gamma and Theta * 4. Trading is the Answer to the Unknown * 5. Vega as a Crucial Greek * 6. The Greek Approximation * 7. Volatility Term Structure * 8. Skew and Smile

Financial Engineering Explained

Financial Engineering with Copulas Explained

October 2014 UK October 2014 US 168pp 8 b/w tables, 34 figures Paperback £24.99 / $40.00 / CN$45.99 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137346308

Peter Leoni, KU Leuven, Belgium ‘An alternative title for this book could have been “Greeks 101”, for that is indeed what this most readable text provides: a concise, well explained and broadly accessible introduction to hedging of financial derivatives. At about 130 pages, its relative shortness comforts the reader that practical details are not hidden behind lengthy mathematical derivations. Enlightening exercises and practical commentary prevent that same reader from sailing too far away from trading reality. A must-read for anyone in search for a 101-type course on the topic.’ - Paul Embrechts, RiskLab, Department of Mathematics, ETH Zurich

9781137346308

May 2014 UK June 2014 US 152pp 35 figures Paperback £19.99 / $30.00 / CN$34.50 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137350732

9781137350732

Interest Rate Derivatives Explained Volume 1: Products and Markets Jörg Kienitz, Jörg Kienitz, Director, Assurance FSI at Deloitte Germany Aimed at practitioners who need to understand the current fixed income markets and learn the techniques necessary to master the fundamentals, this book provides a thorough but concise description of fixed income markets, looking at the business, products and structures and advanced modeling of interest rate instruments. Contents: 1. Clearing, Collateral, Pricing * 2. Rates * 3. Markets and Products: Deposits, Bonds, Futures, Repo * 4. Markets and Products: FRA and Swaps * 5. Using Curves * 6. Options I * 7. Options II * 8. Adjustments

Financial Engineering Explained December 2014 UK January 2015 US 224pp 61 figures, 42 b/w tables Paperback £26.99 / $45.00 / CN$52.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137360069

9781137360069

BANKING AND FINANCE Smile Pricing Explained

Dark Pools

Peter Austing, Barclays Capital, UK ‘This appealing little book is skillfully written by Dr. Peter Austing, a well-known authority on options pricing. It is easy to understand and covers a lot of ground on theory and practice of smile pricing. It will be helpful to both seasoned and aspiring quants, as well as other financial practitioners and academics.’ - Alexander Lipton, MD, Quantitative Solutions Executive, Bank of America

Off-Exchange Liquidity in an Era of High Frequency, Program, and Algorithmic Trading 2nd edition Erik Banks, USA Praise for first edition: ‘This is an excellent book. It is bang up to date, in what is a very fast changing area. It is clearly written, and provides a very comprehensive description of these markets and how they work. While it fully covers dark pools, its coverage is much wider than that - covering trading in equity markets more generally’ - Professor Charles Sutcliffe, The ICMA Centre, University of Reading, UK

Smile Pricing Explained provides a clear and thorough explanation of the concepts of smile modelling that are at the forefront of modern derivatives pricing. The key models used in practice are covered, together with numerical techniques and calibration. Contents: 1. Introduction to Derivatives * 2. Stochastic Calculus * 3. Martingale Pricing * 4. Dynamic Hedging and Replication * 5. Exotic Options in Black-Scholes * 6. Smile Models * 7. Stochastic Volatility * 8. Numerical Techniques * 9. Local Stochastic Volatility * 10. Volatility Products * 11. Multi-Asset

Financial Engineering Explained August 2014 UK September 2014 US 240pp 10 figures, 3 b/w tables Paperback £26.99 / $40.00 / CN$46.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137335715

9781137335715

The XVA of Financial Derivatives: CVA, DVA and FVA Explained

Dark Pools deals with the topic of dark trading, or non-displayed, off-exchange trading execution. It discusses the development, importance and practice of dark equity trading in an environment dominated by high frequency, program, block and algorithmic trading, and considers its future prospects in a world of mobile capital and changing regulation. Contents: PART I: MARKET STRUCTURE * 1. Introduction to Dark Pools * 2. Market Liquidity and Structure * 3. Dark Pool Structure * PART II: MICRO ISSUES * 4. Topics in Pricing and Execution * 5. Trading in Dark Pools * 6. Aspects of Technology and Architecture * PART III: ENVIRONMENT OF THE FUTURE * 7. Regulation, Control, and Transparency * 8. The Future of Dark Pools

Global Financial Markets

Dongsheng Lu, BNY Mellon, USA

October 2014 UK November 2014 US 280pp 13 b/w tables, 23 figures Hardback £50.00 / $80.00 / CN$92.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137449535

This latest addition to the Financial Engineering Explained series focuses on the new standards for derivatives valuation, namely, pricing and risk management taking into account counterparty risk, and the XVA’s – Credit, Funding and Debt value adjustments.

An Option Greeks Primer

Contents: PART I: INTRODUCTION TO DERIVATIVE TRADING * 1. The Participants of Derivative Market and their Interaction (Chart) * 2. Trading Perspective * 3. Operational: Collateral with Counterparty * 4. Funding * 5. Legal * 6. Regulations * PART II: EXPOSITION OF VARIOUS VALUATION ADJUSTMENTS * 7. CVA (Including DVA) Primer: Expected Credit Default Loss * 8. FVA Primer: Derivatives Pricing under Different Funding Situations * 9. FVA Debate and Solution * 10. RVA * PART III: MODELING, CALCULATION AND SYSTEM IMPLEMENTATION * 11. CVA and FVA Modeling * 12. CVA and FVA with Complex CSA Terms * 13. RVA and Downgrade Triggers: Complexity of Replacement Process * 14. Examples * PART IV: CVA/FVA RISK MANAGEMENT AND HEDGING * 15. Traditional Derivatives Greeks and Risk Management * 16. Gamma, Theta and Cross Greeks for CVA * 17. Collateral Operations, Hedging and Cross Currency Risk * 18. Rating Dependent Funding: Credit Dependency of Funding * 19. CVA and FVA Together: Cross Terms * 20. Wrong Way Risk, Wrong Way Collateral * 21. Systemic Downgrade Risk * 22. Centralized vs. Decentralized Management * 23. Absence of Market Traded CDS: No Individual Names

Financial Engineering Explained May 2015 UK June 2015 US 150pp Paperback £24.99 / $40.00 / CN$46.00 Canadian Rights www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137435835

9781137435835

9781137449535

Building Intuition with Delta Hedging and Monte Carlo Simulation using Excel Jawwad Farid, Alchemy Technologies, Pakistan An Option Greeks Primer provides a hands-on, practical guide to understanding derivatives pricing. Aimed at the less quantitative practitioner, it provides a balanced account of options, Greeks and hedging techniques avoiding the complicated mathematics inherent to many texts, and with a focus on modelling, market practice and intuition. Contents: PART I: REFRESHER * 0. Notation and Terminology * 1. Delta and Gamma * PART II: DELTA HEDGING * 2. A Simulation Model for Delta Hedging – European Call Options * 3. Delta Hedging European Put Options * 4. Calculating Cash P&L for a Call Option * 5. Calculating Cash P&L for a Put Option * PART III: BUILDING SURFACES IN EXCEL * 6. Understanding Volatility * 7. Building Volatility Surfaces * 8. Forward Implied Volatilities * PART IV: HEDGING HIGHER ORDER GREEKS * 9. Vega, Volga & Vanna * 10. Hedging Higher Order Greeks * 11. Reviewing the Solver Solution * PART V: APPLICATIONS * 12. Rebalancing, Implied Vol & Rho * 13. Understanding Theta * 14. Option Prices and Time to Expiry

Global Financial Markets February 2015 UK March 2015 US 260pp 320 figures Hardback £36.99 / $62.00 / CN$71.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137371669

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

9781137371669

BANKING AND FINANCE Private Equity Fund Investments

The Political Economy of Microfinance

New Insights on Alignment of Interests, Governance, Returns and Forecasting

Financialising Poverty Philip Mader, University of Basel, Switzerland

Cyril Demaria, Pilot Fish Funds, Switzerland ‘Thanks to the exhaustiveness of its references and the rigor of its analysis, this new publication is a must-read for both practitioners and researchers. ‘ Noël Amenc, PhD, Professor of Finance, Director of the EDHEC Risk Institute, CEO ERI Scientific Beta

According to the author, rather than alleviating poverty, microfinance financialises poverty. By indebting poor people in the Global South, it drives financial expansion and opens new lands of opportunity for the crisis-ridden global capital markets. This book raises fundamental concerns about this widelycelebrated tool for social development.

Private Equity Fund Investments presents new, advanced, evidence-based guidance on investing in private equity funds: first by assessing the investor’s environment and motivations, then by looking into the risks, returns and overall performance of funds and finally, by offering practical solutions to the illiquidity conundrum.

Studies in the Political Economy of Public Policy

Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. Sub-Optimal Risk-Return Profiles in Private Equity * 3. Fee Levels, Performance and Alignment of Interests in Private Equity * 4. The Predictive Power of the J-Curve * 5. Conclusion

Contents: 1. A Framework for Engaging Microfinance * 2. A Genealogy of Microfinance * 3. The Financialisation of Poverty * 4. Financialising Public Goods * 5. Mechanisms of a Microfinance Crisis * 6. At the Crossroads of Development and Finance * 7. Appendix * 7.1 Calculating the Surplus Extraction * 7.2 Projects Using Microfinance for Water and Sanitation May 2015 UK May 2015 US 288pp 1 map, 8 b/w tables, 10 figures Hardback £65.00 / $100.00 / CN$115.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137364203

9781137364203

Global Financial Markets February 2015 UK March 2015 US 272pp 48 figures, 35 b/w tables Hardback £50.00 / $80.00 / CN$92.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137400383

9781137400383

Simulating Security Returns A Filtered Historical Simulation Approach Edited by Giovanni Barone Adesi, University of Italian Switzerland

Private Equity Investing in Emerging Markets Opportunities for Value Creation Roger Leeds, John Hopkins University, USA ‘For anyone with more than a fleeting interest in private equity in emerging markets, Roger Leeds’ book is an invaluable resource. Private equity is so fundamentally different in emerging economies that it barely merits the same nomenclature. Leeds makes this clear and provides readers a roadmap for taking advantage of the opportunities these differences present. As he rightly points out, ‘the case for private equity is even more compelling in developing countries, where alternative sources of capital and business expertise are relatively scarce.’ He relays his insights through aptly chosen case studies’ - Diana Noble, CEO, CDC Drawing on the author’s four decades of experience as a practitioner and academician working with private equity investors, entrepreneurs, and policymakers in over 100 developing countries around the world, this book uses anecdotes and case studies to illustrate and reinforce the key arguments for private equity investment in emerging economies. Contents: 1. A Private Equity Primer * 2. Private Equity Ecosystems: A Stark Contrast Between Developed and Developing Countries * 3. The Private Equity Advantage: Operational Value Creation * 4. Private Equity Performance Before the Global Financial Crisis * 5. A Post-Crisis Assessment: New Opportunities and Challenges * 6. China: Private Equity With Chinese Characteristics * 7. Brazil: The Country of the Future * 8. Kenya: Challenges and Opportunities in a Frontier Market * 9. Looking Through a Crystal Ball

Global Financial Markets March 2015 UK February 2015 US 320pp 61 exhibits, 4 tables Hardback £39.99 / $70.00 / CN$81.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137435347

9781137435347

Simulating Security Returns uses the FHS approach to help simulate the returns of large portfolios of securities. Contents: 1. Introduction: Simulating Security Returns; Giovanni Barone Adesi * 2. VaR Without Correlations for Portfolios of Derivative Securities; Giovanni Barone Adesi, Kostas Giannopoulos, Les Vosper * 3. Backtesting Derivative Portfolios with FHS; Giovanni Barone Adesi, Kostas Giannopoulos, Les Vosper * 4. A GARCH Option Pricing Model with Filtered Historical Simulation; Giovanni Barone Adesi, Robert F. Engle

November 2014 UK November 2014 US 124pp 35 b/w tables, 22 figures Hardback £45.00 / $67.50 / CN$78.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137465542

9781137465542

BANKING AND FINANCE The Geneva Risk and Insurance Review

Journal of Asset Management

Michael Hoy, University of Guelph, Canada, Nicolas Treich, Toulouse School of Economics, France

Stephen Satchell, Trinity College, Cambridge University, UK

The Geneva Risk and Insurance Review publishes papers that advance our understanding of industry behavioral changes under uncertainty. The Journal centers on economics in general, focusing on risk and insurance in particular.

The Journal of Asset Management provides an international forum for the latest techniques and developments for the fund management industry, from high-growth investment strategies to managing risk, from active management to index tracking. The Journal is a bridge between applied academic research, commercial best practice and regulatory interests.

ISSN: 1554964X / EISSN: 15549658 For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/grir

The Geneva Papers on Risk and Insurance Issues and Practice Christophe Courbage, The Geneva Association, Switzerland Founded by The Geneva Association in 1973, this prestigious journal leads its field, publishing papers which both improve the scientific knowledge of the insurance industry and stimulate constructive dialogue between the industry and its economic and social partners.

ISSN: 14708272 / EISSN:147917 For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/jam

Journal of Banking Regulation Dr. Dalvinder Singh, Warwick Law School, University of Warwick, UK The Journal of Banking Regulation has established itself as one of the leading sources of authoritative and detailed information on all aspects of law and regulation affecting banking institutions. Each issue contains detailed briefings, analyses and updates which are of direct relevance to practitioners working in the field.

ISSN: 17456452 / EISSN: 17502071 For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/jbr ISSN: 10185895 / EISSN:14680440 For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/gpp

International Journal of Disclosure and Governance Michael G. Alles, Rutgers Business School, USA Strong governance practices are essential to the integrity of companies and the health of the global economy. The International Journal of Disclosure and Governance serves as a forum for the discussion of theoretical and practical perspectives on the law, finance, and accounting related to financial reporting and compliance.

ISSN: 17413591 / EISSN: 17466539 For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/jdg

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

BRANDING Brand Premium

BRANDING

How Smart Brands Make More Money

Brand Breakout

Nigel Hollis, executive vice president and chief global analyst at Millward Brown, Vermont, USA

How Emerging Market Brands Will Go Global Nirmalya Kumar, Tata Sons, India, Jan-Benedict E.M Steenkamp, University of North Carolina’s KenanFlagler Business School, USA 'This book should be required reading by all global brand executives.’ - Philip Kotler ‘The West’s great brands should listen to those words and tremble.’ – The Economist Written by the world’s leading thinkers on brand strategy, this updated paperback edition looks at what Asian and emerging market brands need to do to succeed in international markets and the challenges they face when competing with Western brands. Contents: Introduction * 1. The Asian Tortoise Route: Migrating to Higher Quality and Brand Premium * 2. The Business to Consumer Route: Leveraging B2B Strengths in B2C Markets * 3. The Diaspora Route: Following Emigrants into the World * 4. The Brand Acquisition Route: Buying Global Brands from Western Multinationals * 5. The Positive Campaign Route: Overcoming Negative Country of Origin Associations * 6. The Cultural Resources Route: Positioning on Positive Cultural Myths * 7. The Natural Resources Route: Branding Commodities in Four Steps * 8. The National Champions Route: Leveraging Strong Support From the State * Conclusion: Looking Ahead February 2015 UK March 2015 US 276pp Paperback £12.99 / $20.00 / CN$23.00 Canadian Rights www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137467591

9781137467591

Brand Media Strategy, 2nd Edition Integrated Communications Planning in the Digital Era

“With Brand Premium, Nigel Hollis applies his perceptive skills to one of the most important marketing problems around - how brands make money! Practical, insightful, and grounded in the success factors for today and tomorrow, Brand Premium will help marketers and analysts understand how brands can thrive and succeed financially.” - Kevin Lane Keller, Tuck School of Business, Dartmouth College, USA “The greatest compliment I can pay this invaluable book is to say that it will be most appreciated by those who already understand and apply much of it. The most experienced and most successful marketing people will find themselves first nodding in recognition and agreement; and then delighting in the newer insights and extensions that Nigel Hollis presents them with.” - Sir Martin Sorrell, CEO, WPP Why a meaningful, different, salient brand is key to unlocking financial value growth in today’s hypercompetitive marketplace. Contents: Foreword * Acknowledgements * Preface * PART I: WHAT’S IT ALL ABOUT? * 1. How Marketing Adds Financial Value To A Business * 2. How Brands Influence Purchase Decisions * 3. What Makes Your Brand Meaningfully Different? * 4. Linking Meaningful Difference To Financial Outcomes * PART II: CREATING A MEANINGFULLY DIFFERENT BRAND * 5. Clarity Of Purpose * 6. Effective Delivery * 7. Resonance * 8. Differentiation * 9. Defining A Meaningfully Different Experience * PART III: AMPLIFYING A MEANINGFULLY DIFFERENT BRAND * 10. Findability * 11. Credibility * 12. Vitality * 13. Affordability At A Price Point * 14. Extendability * 15. Make The Most Of Your Brand November 2014 UK October 2013 US 240pp Hardback £18.99 / $28.00 / CN$32.00 Canadian Rights www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137279910

9781137279910

2nd edition Antony Young, President of the Water Cooler Group, USA This fully updated edition of Brand Media Strategy explains how innovative marketers are growing their brands using advertising, digital media, and the employment of nonpaid and nontraditional media vehicles. Includes updated case studies, data and statistics, and outlines how to build this new data into your planning. Contents: Foreword * Introduction * 1. Google And Facebook * How They’re Changing The Game * 2. The New Media Playbook * A New Set Of Rules For A New Media World * 3. A Shift From Media Planning * To Communications Planning * Enter The Super Planner * 4. Focusing On Outcomes, Not Outputs * Setting The Brand Media Strategy Communication Goals * 5. Insight Over Analysis * Finding A Way In For The Brand Media Strategy * 6. 1 + 1 = 3 * Sparking Consumer Brand Conversations Through Media * 7. Conducting The Orchestra * Making Integration Real * 8. Unlocking Moments Of Receptivity * How Media Context Helps Advertising * Deliver More Relevant Communications * 9. Touch Point Selection * Determining The Right Media Channel Mix * 10. Getting Social * Connecting Through Socially-Enabled Communications * 11. Execution Is The X-Factor * Bringing The Brand Media Strategy To Life * 12. Measurement And Metrics * Making The Brand Media Strategy Accountable * 13. Big Data And Analytics * From Mad Men To Math Men (And Women) * Acknowledgements * Further Reading * Notes * Index September 2014 UK August 2014 US 256pp Hardback £18.99 / $30.00 / CN$34.50 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137279569

9781137279569

The Luxury Market in Brazil Market Opportunities and Potential Claudio Diniz, Independent, Brazil The Luxury Market in Brazil provides a holistic and practitioners approach to luxury marketing in Brazil. The book analyses the key challenges and opportunities facing luxury brands, while providing an insight into the skills and competencies to develop and implement effective luxury marketing strategies that are specific to the market in question. Contents: 1. The Luxury Universe * 2. The Global Luxury Market * 3. The Luxury Market in Brazil * 4. Who Are the Luxury Consumers in Brazil? * 5. Communication, Advertising and Events * 6. Distributing Luxury Products and Services in Brazil * 7. The Wealthiest and Most Powerful Cities in Brazil * 8. Challenges for the Luxury Market in Brazil * 9. The Potential of the Brazilian Luxury Market * 10. Successful Brazilian Enterprises * 11. The Future for Brazil and Its Luxury Market * 12. How to Participate in This Market, as an Entrepreneur or an Employee * 13. Conclusion June 2014 UK June 2014 US 200pp 8 figures, 31 b/w tables Hardback £65.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137432544

9781137432544

BRANDING Real Luxury

Place Branding and Public Diplomacy

How Luxury Brands Can Create Value for the Long Term Misha Pinkhasov, Nair-Safir, Portugal, Rachna Joshi Nair, Nair-Safir, Paris “The authors’ research and analysis is methodical and clear, and their vision accurate. This book is an excellent tool for perfecting one's understanding of luxury. A veritable bible for both professionals and students.” - Yaffa Assouline, Founder and Editor-inChief of LuxuryCulture.com ‘Neither enthralled by luxury’s glamor nor overcritical of its excesses, the authors offer an informed and balanced assessment of the industry’s current condition and how it must prepare for the future.’ - Soumitra Dutta, Dean, S.C. Johnson Graduate School of Management, Cornell University, New York

Nicholas J. Cull, Annenberg School for Communication, University of Southern California, USA, Robert Govers, Independent advisor, scholar and author on place branding Place Branding and Public Diplomacy is the first and only journal to concentrate on the practice of applying brand strategy and other marketing techniques and disciplines to the economic, social, political and cultural development of cities, regions and countries.

ISSN: 17518040 / EISSN:17518059 For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/pb

Real Luxury examines what a ‘luxury brand’ is from economic, sociological and psychological standpoints. It spells out the challenges the industry is facing and puts forward a new, practical model aimed at reviving and protecting luxury brands, based on the authors’ hands-on experience in the industry.

Contents: Introduction * 1. A Dilemma Across Time and Culture * 2. The Strengths and Weaknesses of Luxury * 3. The Environment for Luxury * 4. Luxury and the Search for Meaning * 5. Towards a Socially Valuable Business * 6. Creating a Culture of Shared Value * 7. Adapting the Business Model * 8. The Outlook for Luxury August 2014 UK September 2014 US 236pp 3 b/w tables, 12 figures, 2 b/w illustrations Hardback £22.99 / $36.00 / CN$41.50 9781137395566 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137395566

Follow Palgrave Macmillan on Facebook®. ‘Like’ our Facebook® page to get the latest news, reviews and event invites.

for the latest news, events and competitions

www.facebook.com/PalgraveMacmillan

www.twitter.com/PalgraveBiz

@PalgraveBiz

Journal of Brand Management Tim Oliver Brexendorf, WHU, Otto Beisheim School of Management, Germany, Joachim Kernstock, Competence Centre for Brand Management, St Gallen, Switzerland,Shaun M. Powell, University of Wollongong, Australia Journal of Brand Management is the authoritative journal on brand management and strategy, drawing together cutting-edge analysis and latest thinking from leading figures at the world’s foremost companies, consultancies and academic institutions.

ISSN: 1350231X / EISSN:14791803 For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/bm

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

BUSINESS ETHICS AND CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY BUSINESS ETHICS AND CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY

Capitalism and the Social Relationship An Organizational Perspective Edited by Hamid Kazeroony, Inver Hills Community College, USA, Agata Stachowicz-Stanusch, The Silesian University of Technology, Poland

America’s Culture of Professionalism Past, Present, and Prospects David Warfield Brown, The Kettering Foundation, USA ‘A vigorous argument urging rethinking the relation of expertise or professionalism and democracy, including the human and political resources of local communities.’ -Thomas Bender, University Professor of the Humanities and Professor of History, New York University America’s Culture of Professionalism proves an emerging culture of interdependence is possible if and when enough professionals and laypersons refashion their roles and relationships having both something to contribute and something to learn from each other. Contents: Part I: The Culture of Professionalism * Chapter 1 Knowledge as Property * Chapter 2 ‘Thriving on Ignorance’ * Chapter 3 Self-Serving Professionals * Part II: Culture Change? * Chapter 4 Nobody’s Property * Chapter 5 Everybody Counts * Chapter 6 Nurturing Others’ Capacities June 2014 UK June 2014 US 208pp Hardback £31.50 / $50.00 / CN$57.50 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137341914

Capitalism and the Social Relationship examines the changing external environment of organizations. This book explores the contradictions within the global capitalist system and their consequences to assess and find ways in creating new knowledge for managers/ leaders to reorient themselves in appropriate restructuring of organizations to better serve their stakeholders. Contents: PART I: CAPITALISM: THE DIALECTICAL CONTRADICTIONS PAVING THE WAY * PART II: CAPITALISM AND ORGANIZATIONAL INNER-WORKING * PART III: CAPITALISM TRIAD: THE ORGANIZATION, ITS EXTERNAL STAKEHOLDERS, AND THE CAPITALIST SYSTEM * PART IV: CAPITALISM: ITS FUTURE AND THE CONSEQUENCES FOR ORGANIZATIONS AND SOCIAL RELATIONSHIP May 2014 UK May 2014 US 360pp 15 figures, 13 b/w tables Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$132.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137325693

9781137325693

9781137341914

Development Corruption in South Africa Governance Matters

Business Efficiency and Ethics

Soma Pillay, Federation University Australia, Australia

Values and Strategic Decision Making Dimitris N. Chorafas, Switzerland and France Business Efficiency and Ethics presents both the theory of business efficiency and ethics, and a wealth of case studies based on practical experience. This unique perspective offers a framework for identifying this behaviour and reestablishing appropriate business behavior standards. Contents: Table of Contents * 1. Ethical Values, Efficiency and Effectiveness * 2. Senior Managers Are in the Front Line of Efficiency and Ethics * 3. Social Ethics and Rising Corruption * 4. Ethics and Efficiency in Public Administration * 5. Be Ready for the ‘Unthinkable’ * 6. Ethics and Efficiency in Financial Industry * 7. Libor Scandal, Derivatives, Gold Deceits and the EFTs * 8. The Strategy of Financial Gambling * 9. Barings. The Crashing of a Venerable Bank * 10. Parmalat. The Hedge Fund with Dairy Products in the Side * 11. Efficiency and Ethics in Manufacturing and Services * 12. Ethics, Opportunities and Risks with Information Technology December 2014 UK December 2014 US 312pp Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137484246

9781137484246

Development Corruption in South Africa examines governance matters with a focus on corruption. This rich empirical body on governance variables and governance performance is a welcome addition to South African government literature. Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. Governance Matters in South Africa * 3. Legislative Measures and Institutional Structures * 4. An Institutional Theory Perspective on Corruption: The Case of a Developing Democracy * 5. Systemic Factors Moderating Whistle Blowing * 6. Exploring Whistle Blowing Intentions in South Africa * 7. Linking Cultural Dimensions with the Nature of Corruption * 8. A Cultural Ecology of New Public Management * 9. Conclusion December 2014 UK December 2014 US 226pp 23 illustrations, 20 b/w tables, 7 figures Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137386953

9781137386953

BUSINESS ETHICS AND CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY Fair Trade In CSR Strategy of Global Retailers Edited by Magdalena Stefańska, Poznan University, Poland, Renata Nestorowicz, Poznan University, Poland Fair Trade in Strategy of Global Retailers Based on CSR shows how retailers can improve the success of their fair trade strategy. Using Polish market research, the authors analyze the aggressive and detrimental competition between retailers such as Ikea, and Tesco to emphasize the benefits of CSR strategy for stakeholders and society at large. Contents: 1. Theoretical Foundation of CSR in Retailing Magdalena Stefańska and Grażyna Śmigielska * Translated by Ewa Grzywaczewska-Stewart * 2. Development of the Fair Trade idea in Europe and USA - Magdalena Stefańska and Renata Nestorowicz * Translated by Natalia Spychała * 3. A Critical Look at the Application in Practice of Fair Trade - Ewa Jerzyk, Henryk Mruk and Ryszard Stefański * Translated by Waldemar Janowski * 4. Corporate Social Responsibility and Fair Trade in Relations of Retailers with Suppliers - Magdalena Stefańska and Ryszard Stefański * Translated by Ewa GrzywaczewskaStewart * 5. The Influence of Communications on CSR and Fair Trade on Attitude, Customers Behaviour and Retailers Perception - Tomasz Wanat and Magdalena Stefańska * Translated by Ewa Grzywaczewska-Stewart * 6. The Effect of Communicating CSR and Fair Trade on the Attitudes and Behaviour of Employees of Trading Enterprises - Anna Rogala, Tomasz Wanat, Renata Nestorowicz and Magdalena Stefańska * Translated by Ewa Grzywaczewska-Stewart * 7. Fair Trade - Trends for the Future - Henryk Mruk, Ewa Jerzyk, Magdalena Stefańska, Ryszard Stefański and Renata Nestorowicz * Translated by Ewa Grzywaczewska-Stewart February 2015 UK February 2015 US 256pp 4 b/w illustrations, 5 graphs, 34 b/w tables Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 9781137395689 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137395689

Modes of Explanation Affordances for Action and Prediction Edited by Michael Lissack, Institute for the Study of Coherence and Emergence, USA, Abraham Graber, University of Iowa, USA Modes of Explanation is the first book in decades to attempt to bring these conflicting approaches together and to offer a compelling narrative to explore how the paradox of ‘explanation’ can converge. Contents: PART I: CONTEXT * 1. Introduction; Michael Lissack, Abraham Graber * 2. A Place in History; Alicia Juarrero * 3. The Context of Our Query; Michael Lissack * PART II: CASE STUDY * 4. Case Study: Creationism; Zack Kopplin * PART III: EXAMINING THE CASE * 5. Scientific Realism on Historical Science and Creationism; Abraham Graber * 6. A Pragmatic Constructivist Take on the Case; Michael Lissack * PART IV: DIALOGUE * 7. Robustness and Explanation; William Wimsatt * 8. A Mode of ‘Epi-Thinking’ Leads to the Exploration of Vagueness and Finality; Stanley Salthe * 9. Occam’s Razor, the Complexity of Truth, and the Simplicity Puzzle; Kevin Kelly, Konstantin Genin * 10. Getting a Grip; Nancy Nersessian * 11. Modes of Explanation; Sandra Mitchell * 12. Narrative as a Mode of Explanation; Rukmini Nair * 13. Economic Explanations; Paul Thagard * 14. Narratives and Models in Complex Systems; Timothy Allen, Edmond Ramly, Samantha Paulsen, Gregori Kanatzidis, Nathan Miller * 15. Evaluating Explanations through their Conceptual Structures; Steven Wallis * 16. Investigating the Lay and Scientific Norms for Using ‘Explanation’; Jonathan Waskan, Ian Harmon, Andrew Higgins, Joseph Spino * PART V: CONCLUSION * 17. Conclusion; Michael Lissack, Abraham Graber * PART VI: AFTERWORD * Afterword 1. The Scientific Attitude Toward Explanation; Lee McIntyre * Afterword 2. Explanation Revisited; Jan Faye * Afterword 3. Is The World Completely Intelligible?; Peter Achinstein * Afterword 4. Explanation and Pluralism; Beckett Sterner * Reprise; Michael Lissack December 2014 UK December 2014 US 336pp 48 figures Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137406453

9781137406453

The Palgrave Handbook of Research Design in Business and Management Edited by Kenneth D. Strang, State University of New York, Queensbury Campus, USA The Palgrave Handbook of Research Design in Business and Management uses a new state-of-the-art research design typology model to guide researchers in creating the blueprints for their experiments. By focusing on theory and cuttingedge empirical best-practices, this handbook utilizes visual techniques to appease all learning styles. Contents: Preliminary Material * i. Foreword: Vision and Reality; Joseph F. Hair, Jr * ii. Preface: What’s Unique for Practitioners; Kenneth D. Strang * Research Design Guidelines * 1. Why Practitioner-Scholars Need a Research Design Typology; Kenneth D. Strang * 2. Articulating a Research Design Ideology; Kenneth D. Strang * 3. Developing a Goal-Driven Research Strategy; Kenneth D. Strang * 4. Matching Research Method with Ideology and Strategy; Kenneth D. Strang * 5. Selecting Research Techniques for a Method and Strategy; Kenneth D. Strang * 6. Design Issues in Cross-Cultural Research: Suggestions for Researchers; Linda Brennan, Lukus Parker, Dang Nguyen, Torgeir Aleti * 7. Establishing Rationale and Significance of Research; Judith Hahn * 8. Organizing and Conducting Scholarly Literature Reviews; Linnaya Graf * 9. Interpreting Findings and Discussing Implications for all Ideologies; Mary Ann Rafoth, George Semich, Richard Fuller * Positivist Applications * 10. Implications of Experimental Versus Quasi-Experimental Designs; Jeremy W. Grabbe * 11. Structural Equation Modeling: Principles, Processes, and Practices; Sewon Kim, Edward Sturman, Eun Sook Kim * 12. Correlation to Logistic Regression Illustrated with a Victimization-Sexual Orientation Study; Creaig A. Dunton, Mark Beaulieu * 13. Survey Method versus Longitudinal Surveys and Observation for Data Collection; John F. Gaski * 14. Cross-Sectional Survey and Correspondence Analysis of Financial Manager Behavior; Kenneth D. Strang * 15. Control Variables: Problematic Issues and Best Practices; Leon Schjoedt, Krittaya Sangboon * 16. Monte-Carlo Simulation Using Excel: Case Study in Financial Forecasting; Seifedine Kadry * Pragmativist Applications * 17. Critical Analysis using Four Case Studies Across Industries; Linnaya Graf * 18. Integrating Multiple Case Studies with a Merger and Acquisition Example; Lars Schweizer * 19. Iterative-Pragmatic Case Study Method and Comparisons with other Case Study Method Ideologies; Harm-Jan Steenhuis * 20. Action Research Applied with Two Single Case Studies; Angeline Lim, Dae Seok-Chai * 21. Transportation Queue Action Research at an Australian Titanium Dioxide Mining Refinery; Kenneth D. Strang * 22. Participant Observation as Ethnography or Ethnography as Participant Observation in Organizational Research; Peter Sandiford * Constructivist Applications * 23. Constructivist Grounded Theory Applied to a Culture Study; Narasimha R.Vajjhala * 24. Phenomenology Variations from Traditional Approaches to Eidetic and Hermeneutic Applications; Jillian McCarthy * 25. Hermeneutic and Eidetic Phenomenology Applied to a Clinical Healthcare Study; Jillian McCarthy * 26. Structure of a Dissertation for a Participatory Phenomenology Design; Judith Hahn * 27. Emancipatory Phenomenology Applied to a Child Sex Offender Study; Rodney Alexander * Final Generalizations and Descriptive Characteristics March 2015 UK March 2015 US 464pp 94 b/w illustrations, 1 graph, 57 b/w tables Hardback £147.00 / $235.00 / CN$271.00 9781137379924 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137379924

Philanthropy in Transition Mark S. LeClair, Fairfield University, USA Philanthropy in Transition examines the rising importance of new channels of giving, from purchase made from social market enterprises to social impact investing. While these movements extend the reach and appeal beyond traditional philanthropy, the result is a widening distance between donor and recipient that raises new challenges. Contents: Preface * Acknowledgements * List of Tables * List of abbreviations * 1. A History of Philanthropy in the United States * 2. U.S. Philanthropy: Trends in Giving and the Impact on Society * 3. Government Policy and Charitable Contributions * 4.The New Philanthropy: The Rise of Non-Traditional Giving in the United States * 5. Engaging the Ethical Consumer and Investor * Glossary October 2014 UK October 2014 US 192pp 20 b/w tables Hardback £65.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137395610

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

9781137395610

BUSINESS ETHICS AND CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY Scaling up Business Solutions to Social Problems

The True Value of CSR Corporate Identity and Stakeholder Perceptions

A Practical Guide for Social and Corporate Entrepreneurs

Edited by Barbara Fryzel, Jagiellonian University, Poland

Olivier Kayser, Hystra, France, Maria Valeria Budinich, ASHOKA, USA A silent revolution is underway, as entrepreneurs challenge prevalent notions of business motives and methods to invent market-based solutions to eradicate social injustice. Yet many fail to succeed. Based on original research, the authors uncover why impressive solutions fail to scale up, featuring global case studies and practical solutions. Contents: Introduction * PART I: SOLUTIONS THAT WORK * 1. A World Of Opportunities * 2. Social Entrepreneurs * 3. Why ‘Market Based’solutions? * PART II: MARKET BASED SOLUTIONS FOR * 4. Cooking * 5. Affordable Housing * 6. Lighting * 7. Safe Drinking Water * 8. Banking Services * 9. Boosting The Profitability Of Micro-Entrepreneurs * 10. Offering Fair Employment * 11. When Markets Fail * PART III: OBSTACLES TO SCALE * 12. Where To Start? * 13. Social Entrepreneurs: How To Scale Up Impact? * 14. Corporations: The Incumbent Dilemma * 15. Citizen Sector Organizations * 16. Hybrid Value Chains * 17. The Longest Mile * 18. Needs And Wants * 19. Impact Investing * 20. The Role Of Philanthropy * 21. Are We Reinventing Capitalism? February 2015 UK March 2015 US 256pp 9 figures, 9 b/w tables, 19 b/w illustrations Hardback £29.99 / $47.00 / CN$54.00 9781137466525 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137466525

The Social License How to Keep Your Organization Legitimate John Morrison, Institute for Human Rights and Business, UK “Provocative and challenging The Social License makes a compelling case for why companies must look to increase their positive social impact as an integral part of their core business strategies.” - Paul Polman, CEO, Unilever plc “John Morrison has led significant initiatives on business and human rights over recent years. Now his book takes some of that collective experience and orders it conceptually in a way that is accessible and makes an important point about the social licence of corporations to operate.” - Mary Robinson, former President of Ireland; United Nations Special Envoy on Climate Change

By considering the importance of Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) as a business paradigm but also as a growing scepticism about it’s outcomes, The True Value of CSR answers questions about true value behind this concept, motivations of firms embedding CSR in their core strategies and a capacity of CSR to make a real difference on the market. Contents: 1. The Meaning Of Responsibility In Organizations. Some Reflections. * 1.1. What Does It Mean CSR?, Prof. Dr. Rafael Alvira * 1.2. Corporate Social Responsibility: Some Clarifications And Questions, Prof Leszek Balcerowicz * 1.3. CSR: Between Management Strategy And A New Paradigm Of Thought, Prof Janina Filek * 1.4. The Stakeholder Organization Theory And Its Systemic Foundation Revisited, Prof Wojciech W. Gasparski * 2. A Market For CSR. Forming Identities And Behaviours * 2.1. Identity, Responsibility And Corporate Personhood, Dr Paul Griseri * 2.2. Dimensions Of CSR Identity, Dr Nina Seppala, Regent’s University London, Dr Barbara Fryzel * 2.3. The Social Construction Of CSR’s Identity In Management Consulting , Stephanos Avakian * 2.4. The Relationship Between CSR Communication And Corporate Reputation In The Credit Lending Process. A Qualitative Study Based On Italian Banks, Dr Rita Lamboglia, Dr Giuseppe d’Onza * 3. Capitalist Economy And CSR – Contradictions And Inconsistencies? * 3.1. Fraud, Corruption And CSR. Hands-On Account Of A Fraud Investigator, Mariusz Witalis * 3.2. Corporate Social Responsibility, Inequality And Corporate Governance, Prof Peter Abell, Prof Ofer Engel, Dr Henry P. Wynn * 3.3. Actions Speak Louder Than Words: Competitive Conduct Vs CSR Policy, Dr A. Vindelyn Smith-Hillman * 3.4. The Capitalist Economy And CSR: Contradictions And Inconsistencies * From CSR To Business In Development, Peter Davis * 3.5. Regulatory Roadblocks To Environmental Sustainability, László Fekete * 3.6. The Dichotomy Of Values Vs. Rules In Anti-Corruption Law, Jean Pierre Mean * 4. Responsible Business And Behavioural Patterns * 4.1. Business And Society: Collective And Individual Corporate Social Responsibility, Richard Pettinger * 4.2. Standards: A Behavioural Approach To Management, Richard Pettinger * 4.3. How Can Neuroeconomics Unravel CSR?, Dr Jang Park December 2014 UK December 2014 US 328pp 7 figures, 12 b/w tables Hardback £70.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137433183

Self-Regulation and Legalization Making Global Rules for Banks and Corporations Annegret Flohr, Peace Research Institute, Germany Departing from an International Relations perspective, this book inquires how industry self-regulation affects the role of international law in governing global banks. It provides case studies of the Wolfsberg Principles and the Equator Principles.

A distinctive and direct guide to legitimacy in business, focusing on the new benchmark of a ‘Social License to Operate’. Featuring case studies of what is and isn’t working, this book explains how business owners and CSR professionals can integrate legitimacy into the heart of their company strategy, beyond CSR and good PR. Contents: PART I: INTRODUCTION * 1. Macondo * 2. The Social Licence * 3. What’s wrong with CSR? * PART II: THE FOUNDATIONS * 4. Legitimacy – Who Can and Who Cannot Have a Social Licence * 5. Trust – Confidence in the Relationship with Those Affected * 6. Consent – Granting Necessary Permissions for an Activity * PART III: MAINTAINING THE SOCIAL LICENCE * 7. Benefits – the Delivery of Sufficiently Positive Outcomes for All Concerned * 8. Power, Knowledge and Participation – Equity Among All Parties * 9. Transparency and Accountability – the Ability to Hold Parties Responsible * 10. Prevention and Remedies – Protecting Victims and Ensuring Justice * PART IV: WHAT NEXT? * 11. Different Organizations and the Social Licence * 12. A Basis for Partnership and Accountability * 13. The Social Licence – a Prognosis August 2014 UK September 2014 US 202pp 1 map Hardback £22.99 / $35.00 / CN$40.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137370716

9781137370716

9781137433183

Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. Industry Self-Regulation: Soft Rules for Corporations * 3. The Theoretical Framework: Legalization as Hard Rules for States? * 4. A Brief History of Governance in the Financial Sector * 5. Anti-Money Laundering and the Wolfsberg Principles * 6. Legalization of Anti-Money Laundering * 7. Environmental Safeguards and the Equator Principles * 8. Legalization of Environmental and Social Safeguards * 9. Conclusion: Patterns and Dynamics of SelfRegulatory Impact

Global Issues June 2014 UK June 2014 US 272pp 10 b/w tables, 9 figures Hardback £65.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137359551

9781137359551

BUSINESS HISTORY The Moral Responsibilities of Companies Chris Chapple, BDO LLP, London, UK The Moral Responsibilities of Companies is a philosophical analysis of the question of whether companies can be held morally responsible for the harms they create, and what implications such a view has on the moral position of employees and shareholders in these companies. Contents: Preface * 1. The Problem of Corporate Responsibility * 2. The Object of Study: the Nature of the Company * 3. The Emergence Account (i) - the Agent-choice Condition * 4. The Emergence Account (ii) - causation and Control * 5. The Emergence Account (iii) - Good Judgment * 6. Developing an Alternative Account of Good Judgment * 7. Understanding Collective Responsibility * 8. Implications of the Emergence Account (i) – Rights and Punishment * 9. Implications of the Emergence Account (ii) - Individual Moral Responsibility * 10. Conclusions * Notes * Bibliography * Index

Palgrave Studies in Ethics and Public Policy October 2014 UK October 2014 US 252pp 3 tables Hardback £60.00 / $95.00 / CN$110.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137377975

9781137377975

BUSINESS HISTORY

A Business History of the Swatch Group The Rebirth of Swiss Watchmaking and the Globalization of the Luxury Industry Pierre-Yves Donzé, Kyoto University, Japan A Business History of the Swatch Group offers a detailed and full analysis of the strategy which enabled the Swatch Group to establish itself on the world market. In particular, it tackles the issues of production restructuring, with the opening of subsidiaries in Asia, and the implementation of a new marketing strategy, characterized by the move towards luxury. Contents: 1 Introduction * 2 The Watchmaking Crisis of 19751985 * 3 The Creation of Swatch Group and the ‘Swatch Legend’ * 4 Rationalization and Globalization of the Production System (1985-1998) * 5 A New Marketing Strategy (1985-1998) * 6 The Major Move into Luxury (since 1995) * 7 Omega’s Choice * 8 China: a New El Dorado * 9 Swatch Group’s Competitors * 10 Conclusion April 2014 UK April 2014 US 168pp 24 figures, 16 b/w tables Hardback £65.00 / $110.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137389060

9781137389060

The Evolution of the Property Relation Understanding Paradigms, Debates, and Prospects Ann E. Davis, Marist College, USA Evolution of the Property Relation defines an approach to economics which is centered around the concept of property and explores the historical evolution of the relationship of the individual, private property, and the state, and the distinctive changes wrought by the emergence of the market. Contents: PART I * 1. The Property Relation * 2. Property and Paradigms * PART II * 3. The State * 4. The Public/Private Divide * 5. Money * PART III * 6. Beyond Property * 7. Historicizing the Property Relation *

February 2015 UK February 2015 US 304pp 11 b/w tables, 13 figures Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137352101

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

9781137352101

BUSINESS HISTORY

ECONOMICS

Selling Textiles in the Long Eighteenth Century Comparative Perspectives from Western Europe Edited by Jon Stobart, University of Northampton, UK, Bruno Blondé, University of Antwerp, Belgium Textiles are a key component of the industrial and consumer revolutions, yet we lack a coherent picture of how the marketing of textiles varied across the long 18th century and between different regions. This book provides important new insights into the ways in which changes in the supply of textiles related to shifting patterns of demand. Contents: Introduction; Bruno Blondé and Jon Stobart * 1. An Education in Comfort: Indian Textiles and the Remaking of English Homes over the Long Eighteenth Century; Beverly Lemire * 2. Making the Bed in later Stuart and Georgian England; Sara Pennell * 3. Customers and Markets for ‘New’ Textiles in Seventeenth- and Eighteenth-century Sweden; Lili-Annè Aldman * 4. The International Textile Trade in the Austrian Netherlands, 1750-1791; Ann Coenen * 5. Material Marketing: How Lyonnais Silk Manufacturers Sold Silks, 1660-1789; Lesley Miller * 6. Rural Retailing of Textiles in Early Nineteenth-century Sweden; Pia Lundqvist and Anna Brismark * 7. New Products, New Sellers? Changes in the Dutch Textile Trades, c. 1650-1750; Danielle van den Heuvel * 8. ‘According to the latest and most elegant fashion’. Retailing Textiles and Changes in Supply and Demand in Seventeenth and Eighteenth-century Antwerp; Bruno Blondé, Laura Van Aert and Ilja Van Damme * 9. Taste and Textiles: Selling Fashion in Eighteenth-century Provincial England; Jon Stobart * 10. Luxury and Revolution: Selling High Status Sarments in Revolutionary France; Natacha Coquery * 11. Second-hand Trade and Respectability: Mediating Consumer Trust in Old Textiles and Used Clothing (Low Countries, Seventeenth-Eighteenth Centuries); Ilja Van Damme * 12. Urban Markets for Used Textiles: Examples from Eighteenth-century Central Europe; Georg Stöger September 2014 UK September 2014 US 256pp 37 figures, 16 b/w tables Hardback £60.00 / $95.00 / CN$110.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137295200

9781137295200

ECONOMICS

Fusion Economics How Pragmatism is Changing the World Laurence J. Brahm, Professional ‘Fusion Economics is an extraordinary interweaving of personal experience and far-sighted economic and ecological thinking which may very well hold the key to China’s future.’ - John Simpson, World Affairs Editor, BBC News The current international financial system has created a huge gap between the wealthy and the rest. Grounded and straightforward in his approach, Brahm calls for a turn away from economic systems dangerously steeped in ideology and stymied by politics, outlining a new global consensus based on pragmatism, common sense, and grass-roots realities. Contents: Preface: Voice of the Voiceless * Fed Up With Television Talking Heads? Listen to Voices in the Street * Introduction: The Washington Consensus is Dead! * We Need a New Consensus * PART I: FUSION ECONOMICS * Burying Ideology, Dumping Theory, Adopting Pragmatism and Local Wisdom from the Street (or Jungle) * 1. Re-Engineering China * Ending Ideology and Getting Pragmatic * 2. Voodoo Economics * Oust Outside Theory and Adopt Local Solutions * 3. Red Guards with Credit Cards * Merge Planning and Market the Fusion Way * PART II: PRAGMATIC IDEALISM * Compassionate Capital, Stakeholder Value and Social Enterprise * 4. The Tao of Shangri-la * Learning Social Enterprise from Nomads and Monks * 5. The Positive Energy Bank * Advanced Economics Taught by Tibetan Lamas and Bodhisattvas * 6. Creating Shambhala * Building a Social Enterprise On Top of the World * PART III: DIVERSIFIED LOCALIZATION * Empowering People Brings Sustainable Security * 7. The Disempowerment Factor * Stop Terrorism at Its Root * 8. Himalayan Consensus * Happiness, Micro-Finance and Community Development * 9. African Consensus * Community Empowerment to Prevent Violence * PART IV: The New Earth Consensus * Community Consciousness and Planetary Survival * 10. Occupy Your Mind * The Peaceful Revolution Comes to America * 11. Re-Pioneering America * Revitalizing Communities and the Green Economic Grid * 12. The World is Not Flat * Back to Basics, Local Diversity, and Community Capital Regeneration * 13. From Russia with Fusion Economics * Rise of BRICS, a New Settlement Currency and Development Bank * 14. We Want a Future * Community, Renewability, and Survival of the Adaptable *and more.... October 2014 UK October 2014 US 272pp Hardback £24.99 / $35.00 / CN$39.99 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137444172

9781137444172

Game Theory Bargaining and Auction Strategies Practical Examples from Internet Auctions to Investment Banking Gregor Berz, Consultant, Germany This text bridges the gulf between theoretical economic principles of negotiation and auction theory and their multifaceted applications in actual practice. It is intended to be a supplement to the already existing literature, as a comprehensive collection of reports detailing experiences and results of very different negotiations and auctions. Contents: PART I: NEGOTIATION AND AUCTION FORMS * PART II: RATIONAL NEGOTIATION STRATEGIES * PART III: AUCTION DESIGNS * PART IV: PREREQUISITES FOR REAL AUCTIONS

December 2014 UK December 2014 US 212pp 29 figures, 24 b/w tables Hardback £68.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137475411

9781137475411

ECONOMICS Pricing, Online Marketing Behavior, and Analytics Giampaolo Viglia, University of Eastern Piedmont, Italy Pricing, Online Marketing Behavior, and Analytics covers many different aspects of how online marketing works and its continuous evolution. Contents: 1. Definition of Online Marketing * 2. Online Marketing Communication Channels * 3. Online Marketing Metrics and Analytics * 4. Online Pricing * 5. A Peculiar Type of Revenue Management: Overbooking * 6. Case Study: Applications on the Hotel Industry

Comparative Economic Studies Josef C. Brada, Arizona State University, USA, Paul Wachtel, New York University, USA A journal of the Association for Comparative Economic Studies, Comparative Economic Studies is devoted to the study of economic systems - those currently existing as well as systems that have existed in the past or that may exist only in theory. CES is particularly interested in studies that investigate how economic systems respond to crisis.

ISSN: 8887233 / EISSN: 14783320 For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/ces

May 2014 UK May 2014 US 122pp 5 figures, 5 b/w tables Hardback ÂŁ45.00 / $67.50 / CN$78.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137413253

9781137413253

Business Economics Robert Thomas Crow, Burlingame, California, USA Business Economics is an essential resource for those with a practical interest in how economics is used within business. Itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s more crucial than ever to have access to clear analysis and insightful commentary about the economy. The journal provides this and more, publishing hard-hitting articles from academics, policy-makers and those in commerce.

IMF Economic Review Pierre Olivier Gourinchas, University of California, Berkeley, USA,Luc Laeven, International Monetary Fund The IMF Economic Review is the official research journal of the IMF. It is dedicated to publishing peer-reviewed, high-quality, context-related academic research on open-economy macroeconomics. It emphasizes rigorous analysis with an empirical orientation that is of interest to a broad audience, including academics and policymakers.

ISSN: 20414161 / EISSN:2041417X For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/imfer

ISSN: 0007666X / EISSN:1554432X For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/be

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SMALL BUSINESS ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SMALL BUSINESS

The Business Growth Benefits of Higher Education Edited by David Greenaway, Leverhulme Centre for Research on Globalisation and Economic Policy, School of Economics, Sir Clive Granger Building, University of Nottingham, Nottingham, UK, Chris D. Rudd, Aston Business School, UK The Business Growth Benefits of Higher Education tackles the role of universities in driving economic growth. Their role as providers of talent, technology and new ideas is considered in the light of the 2008 Global Financial Crisis. A series of expert authors consider success, opportunity and how national frameworks can be fine-tuned to deliver business success. Contents: 1. Introduction and Overview; David Greenaway and Christopher D. Rudd * PART I: INTERNATIONAL PERSPECTIVES * 2. Britain 1850s: Exporting the Idea of a University to Empire; Glyn Davis * 3. Sino-Foreign Business Partnerships and Higher Education; David Greenaway and Christopher D. Rudd * 4. International Business Engagement via Executive Training: A Case Study of the Chevening Young Leaders’ Programme for China; Shujie Yao and Miao He * PART II: SUPPORTING STRATEGIES FOR GROWTH* 5. Business and Higher Education; John Cridland * 6. Innovation and Commercialisation in Global Science; Peter Blezard * 7. Universities and Business: The Moment of Opportunity and the Arrow of Research; Sir Andrew Witty * PART III: INNOVATION * 8. The Crucial Role of Universities in Promoting Radical Innovation; Martin Binks * 9. IP Commercialisation: Can Do Better - A University of Nottingham experiment in the food and drink sector; Neil Davidson * PART IV: BUILDING PARTNERSHIPS * 10. Creating the Future; Stephanie Sirr * 11. Partnerships with a Purpose: Creating Cultural and Commercial Value in the UK Film Sector; Richard Paterson * 12. A Review of Corporate Philanthropy in UK Higher Education: The University of Nottingham Perspective; Melissa Wadams May 2014 UK May 2014 US 200pp 2 figures, 8 b/w tables Hardback £65.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137320698

9781137320698

The Business of Sharing Making it in the New Sharing Economy Alex Stephany, JustPark, UK Providing a colorful insight into the people at the forefront of the emergent Sharing Economy, a movement predicted to already be worth around $26B a year, this book gives vital advice to anyone thinking of starting or investing in a collaborative consumption business. The first of its kind, written by an author on the forefront of this new trend. Contents: Prologue: The $700 Million Moustache * 1. Architects: Building on New Ground * 2. We the People: Selfish Sharers * 3. Founders: Visionaries and Doers * 4. Investors: All Bets are On (All $3 Billion Of Them) * 5. Corporates: Angry, Afraid - and In * 6. Governments: Fits and Starts * Epilogue: A Shared Future? March 2015 UK April 2015 US 240pp 5 colour illustrations, 3 figures Hardback £16.99 / $28.00 / CN$32.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137376176

9781137376176

The Butterfly Effect in Competitive Markets Driving Small Changes for Large Differences Rajagopal, EGADE Business School, Technologico de Monterrey, Mexico The Butterfly Effect in Competitive Markets provides an introduction to the concept of entrepreneurship and entrepreneurial business management. It covers many elements of the entrepreneurial management discipline including choosing a business, organizing, financing, marketing, developing an offering that the market will value, and growing the business in all its dimensions. Contents: PART I: ANALYZING MARKET CHAOS * 1. Chaos in Markets * 2. Reasoned Action and Planned Behavior * 3. Managing Market Shifts * PART II: BUILDING GLOBAL-LOCAL MARKETING EFFECTS * 4. Market Trend Analysis * 5. Consumer Value Management * 6. Darwinism in Marketplace * 7. Business Growth and Local Effects * 8. Sustainable Marketing * PART III: UNVEILING FUTURE EFFECTS * 9. Social Psychology of Consumers * 10. Challenges of Butterfly Effect March 2015 UK March 2015 US 304pp 14 figures, 1 b/w table Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137434951

9781137434951

Coping with Retail Giants Gaining an Edge Over Discounters A. Coskun Samli, University of North Florida, USA Coping with Retail Giants critically analyzes the modern retail market and identifies how businesses gain the competitive edge over the major retailers that currently control the market. Dr. Samli argues that as society advances economically, consumers will seek better values generated by the retailing sector. Contents: Dedication * Preface * Acknowledgements * About this Book * Introduction * 1. Pre-opening Preparations * 2. Retail Marketing Strategy Development * 3. Fitting into Multi-Layered Retail Competition * 4. Major Trends in the Retailing Sector which Independents Must Know * 5. The Retail Evolution * 6. Capitalizing on Market Potentials * 7. Consumer Behavior and Retail Strategy * Appendix to 7 The High Touch Effect * 8. Strategy Alternatives * 9. Developing Measuring, and Managing Store Image * 10. People are our Strength * 11. We Must Communicate with our Market * 12. Developing a Merchandise Mix * 13. Pricing Strategies * 14. Being Connected to a Supply Chain * 15. Store Performance Evaluation * Postscript April 2015 UK April 2015 US 224pp 58 b/w illustrations Hardback £67.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137476333

9781137476333

ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SMALL BUSINESS Craft and the Creative Economy Susan Luckman, University of South Australia, Australia Craft and the Creative Economy examines the place of craft and making in the contemporary cultural economy, with a distinctive focus on the ways in which this creative sector is growing exponentially as a result of online shopfronts and home-based micro-enterprise, ‘mumpreneurialism’ and downshifting, and renewed demand for the handmade. Contents: Introduction * 1. Craft Revival: The Post-Etsy Handmade Economy * 2. Crafts as Creative Industry * 3. Material Authenticity and the Renaissance of the Handmade: The Aura of the Analogue (or ‘The Enchantment of Making’) * 4. Craft Micro-Enterprise, Gender and Work–Life Relationships * 5. ‘Self-Making’ and Marketing the Crafty Self * 6. Craft Work and ‘the Good Life’: Creative Economic Possibilities * 7. Conclusion - Craft Micro-Economies: More than ‘Cool Capitalism’ March 2015 UK March 2015 US 224pp Hardback £65.00 / $95.00 / CN$110.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137399649

9781137399649

Creative Cross-Disciplinary Entrepreneurship A Practical Guide for a Campus-Wide Program Dianne H. B. Welsh, University of North Carolina Greensboro Creative Cross-Disciplinary Entrepreneurship responds to educational demands created through dramatic changes in the nature of business, by describing how to develop a cross-disciplinary curriculum in Entrepreneurship that further increases students’ knowledge base in specific areas of interest and the development of an ‘entrepreneurial mindset.’ Contents: Table of Contents * 1. Why Do We Need Cross-Disciplinary Entrepreneurship? * 2. How to Build an Entrepreneurial University * 3. Cross-Disciplinary Curriculum * 4. Interactive Models and Resources outside the Classroom * 5. Assurance of Learning and Accreditation Issues * 6. Case Study: The University of North Carolina Greensboro * 7. Conclusion * Appendix * Index December 2014 UK December 2014 US 192pp Hardback £66.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Paperback £22.00 / $35.00 / CN$40.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137360793 www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137437013

9781137360793 9781137437013

Entrepreneurship, Self-Employment and Retirement Edited by Natalie Sappleton, Manchester Metropolitan University, UK, Fernando Lourenco, Institute for Tourism Studies, China Entrepreneurship, Self-Employment and Retirement presents a collection of nine studies which contribute to a more robust and richer understanding of entrepreneurship, self-employment and retirement in a diversity of settings, including the Netherlands, Canada, the United Kingdom, Singapore and the US, by drawing on both qualitative and quantitative data. Contents: Chapter 1. Retirement Planning, Financial Literacy and Small Business Owners * Chapter 2. One Size Does Not Fit All: Uncovering Older Entrepreneur Diversity Through Motivations, Emotions And Mentoring Needs * Chapter 3. Entrepreneurship in a Context of Pending Retirement: The Lived Experience of Older Entrepreneurs * Chapter 4. Becoming an Entrepreneur after Retirement: Results from a Longitudinal Study in the Netherlands * Chapter 5. What Drives Post-Retirement Age Knowledge-Based Self-Employment? An Investigation of Social, Policy and Individual Factors * Chapter 6. Entrepreneurship in Mid-Career * Chapter 7. Self-Employment Among Canadian Seniors: Trends And Financial Well-Being * Chapter 8. Hybrid Entrepreneurship during Retirement: Comparison of Motives and Aspirations * Chapter 9. Self-employment around Retirement Age April 2015 UK April 2015 US 224pp 49 b/w tables, 11 figures Hardback £67.50 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137398376

9781137398376

Entrepreneurial Icebreakers Conquering International Markets from Transition Economies Edited by Julia Prats, IESE Business School, Spain, Marc Sosna, IESE Business School, Spain, Sylwia Sysko-Romańczuk, Warsaw University of Technology Business School, Warsaw Entrepreneurial Icebreakers presents key insights about the challenges and the approaches they applied. All companies are featured in 15 teachable case studies – ready to use in entrepreneurship and strategy courses – that represent a broad level of diversity with regard to countries, industries, topics, growth phases, challenges and internationalization strategies. Contents: Introduction * PART I: CONQUERING INTERNATIONAL MARKETS FROM TRANSITION ECONOMIES: INSIGHTS AND REFLECTIONS * 1. Entrepreneurship in Transition Economies * 2. Overcoming Start-Up Challenges in Transition Economies * 3. Overcoming a Negative Country-of-Origin Effect * 4. Growth Strategies and Internationalization Patterns * 5. From Lag Markets to Lead Markets * PART II: CASE STUDIES OF INTERNATIONALLY SUCCESSFUL CEE COMPANIES * CASE 1: ACE Enterprise: ‘Drawing’ out the Future * CASE 2: Atlantic Grupa: Preparing For Leading in The New Europe * CASE 3: Avangate: Preparing the Trans-Atlantic Jump * CASE 4: Big Filter: Russian Filters in the International Market * CASE 5: Fx3x: Star Performance without a Star Attitude * CASE 6: Graphisoft: The Architecture of International Growth * CASE 7: Estonia’s Laser Diagnostic Instruments (LDI) AS: Beaming Towards Growth * CASE 8: LINET: To Be an Object of Desire, Not of Choice * CASE 9: The Masterplast Story: Constructing an Entrepreneurial Success Story * CASE 10: Modesat Communications OÜ: Riding a Big Wave with a Small Boat * CASE 11: Pipistrel: The Freedom of Flight * CASE 12: PKF Betar Company: ‘Meters’ Away From Further Growth * CASE 13: Russian Cosmetics*: ‘Healing’ Skin Care Products in Russia * CASE 14: Selena Group: Internationalizing Through Multilocality * CASE 15: SOLARIS Bus and Coach: A Bus Tour to Global Markets * Appendix 1: The Research Project * Appendix 2: Growth in Real GDP in Central and Eastern Europe, the Baltic States and the CIS * Appendix 3: Profiles: Firms and Entrepreneurs December 2014 UK December 2014 US 432pp 88 figures, 45 b/w tables Hardback £77.00 / $120.00 / CN$138.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137446305

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

9781137446305

ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SMALL BUSINESS Entrepreneurial Profiles of Creative Destruction

Female Entrepreneurship in Transition Economies

Courage, Imagination and Creativity in Action

Trends and Challenges

Elias G. Carayannis, Innovation and Entrepreneurship, School of Business, George Washington University, USA, McDonald Stewart, George Washington University, USA, Ms Caroline M. Sipp, Program on the Management of Science, Technology and Innovation, School of Business, George Washington University, USA,Thanos Venieris, Venieris Enterprises, Greece Entrepreneurial Profiles of Creative Destruction is intended to help students and practitioners of entrepreneurship think about what it takes to create a significant business, with focus on what it may take to create a successful and significant business. Contents: 1. Introduction and Definition of Terms; Elias G. Carayannis * 2. Theory and Literature; Elias G. Carayannis and Don Stewart * 3. Obsessed Maniacs and Clairvoyant Oracles: Empirically Validated Patterns of Entrepreneurial Behavior; Elias G. Carayannis and Don Stewart * 4. Dystechnia: A Model of Technology Deficiency and Implications for Entrepreneurial Opportunity; Don Stewart and Elias G. Carayannis * 5. Knowledge-Driven Creative Destruction: Strategic Knowledge Arbitrage and Serendipity (Skarse)™; Elias G. Carayannis * 6. Real Technology Options and Venture Creation; Elias G. Carayannis and Caroline Sipp * 7. From the Zoo to the Jungle and Back in a Second: the Profile of a Serial Entrepreneur in Action; Thanos Venieris September 2014 UK September 2014 US 360pp 32 figures, 21 b/w tables Hardback £77.00 / $115.00 / CN$132.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9780230002036

9780230002036

Generation Jobless? Turning the youth unemployment crisis into opportunity Peter Vogel, Entrepreneur, Switzerland “Dr. Peter Vogel’s work on tackling youth unemployment around the world is inspiring and gives hope to those who feel like there is nothing left to hope for. This book is an excellent read for anyone who wishes to join the cause to create a better future for the generations to come. His mission is mine, to lay out a blueprint for those with aspirations and great ideas, so that they can become job creators, wealth creators, and in certain cases, go from unemployed to self-employed.” -John Hope Bryant, Founder, Chairman & CEO of Operation HOPE ‘Generation Jobless? is a wonderful read and primer for anyone who cares to make a difference. Truly the best work I have read on the youth labor market crisis – and a personal invitation to each and everyone of us to take part in solving the crisis for our children.’ -Carsten Sudhoff, Founder and CEO, Circular Society AG Offering guidance on the opportunities and threats for future generations, and featuring interviews with business leaders, this book provides a constructive look at change. It directs the youth to become job creators, not job seekers, and to approach the corporate and political worlds with an entrepreneurial mind-set. Contents: Foreword * PART I: YOUTH UNEMPLOYMENT * 1. The Youth Unemployment Crisis and the Threat of a ‘Generation Jobless’ * 2. Millennials and Digital Natives * 3. Trends and Outlook * PART II: FROM CRISIS TO OPPORTUNITY * 4. Entrepreneurship: Turning Job Seekers into Job Creators * 5. Addressing the Gap Between the Education System and the Labor Market * 6. Employers’ Contribution to Tackling Youth Unemployment * 7. Designing Active Labor Market Policies To Tackle Youth Unemployment * 8. More Proposed Solutions * 9. Building Multi-Stakeholder Solutions for Youth Unemployment * Afterword March 2015 UK April 2015 US 248pp 32 figures, 8 b/w tables Hardback £22.99 / $35.00 / CN$40.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137375933

9781137375933

Edited by Veland Ramadani, South-East European University, Macedonia, Shqipe Gërguri-Rashiti, South-East European University, Macedonia, Alain Fayolle, EMLYON Business School, France Female Entrepreneurship in Transition Economies explores different topics in the field of female entrepreneurship, such as motivational factors of female entrepreneurs, career perspectives of women, social female enterprises, tourism and hospitality, and emotional and institutional support of female entrepreneurial initiatives in the perspective of different transitional countries. Contents: 1. Introduction: Female Entrepreneurship In Transitional Economies As A Significant, But Understudied Field; Veland Ramadani, Alain Fayolle And Shqipe Gërguri-Rashiti * 2. Female Entrepreneurship In Transition Economies: An Overview; Mirjana Radović-Marković * 3. Motivational Factors Of Female Entrepreneurs; Alicia Mas-Tur, Domingo Ribeiro Soriano And Norat Roig-Tierno * 4. Female Entrepreneurs Start-Ups: Emotional Versus Traditional Support; Mateja Vadnjal And Jaka Vadnjal * 5. Gender Based Determinants Of Innovative Activity In Southeast European Established Entrepreneurs; Karin Širec And Dijana Močnik * 6. Does Entrepreneur’s Gender Matter For Credibility And Financing Of Smes?; Natalia Vershinina, Yulia Rodionova And Susan Marlow * 7. Privileging Women’s Voices And Experiences: A Career Perspective To Study Female Entrepreneurship In Transitional Economies; Ziyu Long * 8. Gender (In)Equality In Entrepreneurship Challenges: The Case Of Romania; Emilia Herman And Zsuzsanna Katalin Szabo * 9. The Profile Of Women Entrepreneurs In The Republic Of Macedonia; Veland Ramadani, Leo-Paul Dana, Shqipe Gërguri-Rashiti And Hyrije Abazi-Alili * 10. Female Entrepreneurship In Albania: State, Trends And Challenges; Arbër Demeti, Erjona Rebi And Tefta Demeti * 11. Eco-Tourism: Case Studies Of Female Polish Entrepreneurs; Alina M. Zapalska And Dallas Brozik * 12. Female Social Entrepreneurship In Turkey; Duygu Uygur, Elif Bezal Kahraman And Gonca Gunay * 13. Women Entrepreneurs In Chile: Three Decades Of Challenges And Lessons On Innovation And Business Sustainability; Maria-Teresa Lepeley, Olga Pizarro And Vesna Mandakovic * 14. One Nigerian Femtrepreneur: A Case Study Of Virtue In Business; Kemi Ogunyemi April 2015 UK April 2015 US 288pp 39 b/w tables, 44 figures Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137444493

9781137444493

Harnessing Place Branding through Cultural Entrepreneurship Edited by Frank M. Go, Rotterdam School of Management, the Netherlands, Arja Lemmetyinen, University of Turku, Finland, Ulla Hakala, Turku School of Economics, Finland Harnessing Place Branding through Cultural Entrepreneurship draws together three overlapping relationships and knowledge domains. These are the cultural entrepreneurship/creative industries, the public and/or private philanthropic contributions that have funded artistic production and the preservation and presentation of place brands as a mechanism to revitalize local economies and communities. Contents: PART I: PLACE BRANDING: MULTIDISCIPLINARY PRINCIPLES * PART II: CHAPTERS ON INDIVIDUAL PLACE CASE STUDIES * PART III: CHAPTERS ON PARTICULAR PLACE BRAND THEMES December 2014 UK December 2014 US 320pp 11 b/w tables, 24 figures Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137465153

9781137465153

ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SMALL BUSINESS Shared Entrepreneurship

Competing against Multinationals in Emerging Markets

A Path to Engaged Employee Ownership Edited by Frank Shipper, Salisbury University, USA “The authors of Shared Entrepreneurship have provided an informative model of how employee-owned firms have had long-term success by sharing the responsibility for innovation among all employees, the resulting financial outcomes and rewards, and the leadership to make a difference. They also provide details that could be used by start-up and established companies to improve their performance through intensive employee engagement concepts. Business students and managers would benefit from reading the examples of shared entrepreneurship in this timely book.” - Mary Ann Beyster, President, Foundation for Enterprise Development, USA; Executive Producer, We the Owners

Case Studies of SMEs in the Manufacturing Sector Densil A. Williams, University of the West Indies, Jamaica Competing against Multinationals in Emerging Markets provides a comprehensive set of lessons which successful small firms have adopted in order to survive and prosper in an increasingly hostile competitive manufacturing sector where large firms are mostly dominant. Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. Spur Tree Spices * 3. Yono Industries * 4. Island Moldings * 5. Hot Mama’s * 6. Perishables Jamaica Ltd * 7. Caribbean Flavors and Fragrances * 8. Conclusions and Lessons Learnt

Presents text and cases of employee ownership in privately, closely and publicly held companiesand examines modern management concepts. Contents: PART I: UNDERSTANDING AND DEVELOPING SHARED ENTREPRENEURSHIP * PART II: SHARED ENTREPRENEURSHIP IN ACTION August 2014 UK August 2014 US 308pp 24 b/w tables, 15 figures, 1 b/w photo Hardback £72.00 / $110.00 / CN$127.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137332219

9781137332219

December 2014 UK December 2014 US 148pp Hardback £45.00 / $67.50 / CN$78.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137500304

The Theory of Entrepreneurship

9781137500304

Creating and Sustaining Entrepreneurial Value Chandra S. Mishra, Florida Atlantic University, USA, Ramona K. Zachary, Baruch College, USA “This stimulating book integrates opportunity seeking and competence creation to provide an exciting new framework for understanding entrepreneurial behaviour. It will be essential reading for scholars and practitioners alike.” - Mark Casson, Professor of Economics, University of Reading, United Kingdom “The Theory of Entrepreneurship offers the reader a comprehensive and integrated theoretical framework of the entrepreneurial process within the context of value creation. The book is a must read for any serious researcher exploring issues in entrepreneurship.” - J. William Petty, Professor of Finance and W.W. Caruth Chair of Entrepreneurship, Baylor University, USA

Follow Palgrave Macmillan on Facebook®. ‘Like’ our Facebook® page to get the latest news, reviews and event invites.

for the latest news, events and competitions

www.facebook.com/PalgraveMacmillan

www.twitter.com/PalgraveBiz

@PalgraveBiz

The Theory of Entrepreneurship examines the interiors of the entrepreneurial value creation process, and offers a new unified and comprehensive theory to afford empirical investigations as well as delineate a broader view of the entrepreneurial contextual milieu. Contents: Table of Contents * Dedication and Inspiration – The Ode to the Entrepreneur * Executive Summary * List of Figures * Acknowledgements * PART I: STARTING UP: INTRODUCTION * 1. The Imperative and Missing Crux of Entrepreneurship Research * PART II: FROM EXTERNAL INTENTION AND OPPORTUNITY TO ENTREPRENEURIAL COMPETENCE * 2. The Theory of Entrepreneurial Intentionality * 3. Entrepreneurial Opportunity and Cognition * 4. Entrepreneurial Capital Resources * 5. The Theory of Entrepreneurial Competence * PART III: FROM ENTREPRENEURIAL COMPETENCE TO ENTREPRENEURIAL REWARD * 6. Venture Financing, Adverse Selection, and Risk and Return * 7. Moral Hazard, Entrepreneurial Incentives, and Risk Mitigation * 8. Venture Investment and Dynamic Complementary Capabilities * 9. Business Model Theory * PART IV: SUMMING UP: THE THEORY OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP * Chapter 10: The Entrepreneurial Value Creation Theory * Index December 2014 UK December 2014 US 320pp 14 b/w illustrations Hardback £72.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137376428

9781137376428

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

EUROPEAN BUSINESS Eastern European Perspectives on the Development of Public Relations

EUROPEAN BUSINESS

Gazprom

Other Voices

An Energy Giant and Its Challenges in Europe

Edited by Tom Watson, Bournemouth Media School, UK

Edited by Andrey Vavilov, Institute for Financial Studies

The National Perspectives on the Development of Public Relations: Other Voices series is the first to offer an authentic world-wide view of the history of public relations. It features six books, five of which cover continental and regional groups. This second book in the series focuses on Eastern Europe.

This detailed case study of Gazprom explores motivation behind the company’s foreign policies, its strategies and tactics. It examines the challenges Gazprom faces in the European market and emphasizes the role of politics in Russsia’s gas trade. Contents: Introduction: Mirages of Energy Superpower: Gazprom’s Ambitions of Dominance and the Power of the Market; Andrei Vavilov * 1. Overview of Russia’s Natural Gas Industry; Ivan Nazarov * 2. Value and Performance: Gazprom from the Corporate Governance and Finance Perspective; Vladimir Kreyndel * 3. A Phantom Energy Empire: The Failure of Gazprom’s Downstream Integration; Andrei Vavilov and GeorgyTrofimov * 4. A Struggle for Pipelines: Attempts at Strategic Expansion in the Near Abroad; Andrei Vavilov and Georgy Trofimov * 5. European Challenges: Competitive Pressure, Gas Market Liberalization, and the Crisis of Long-Term Contracting; Andrei Vavilov and Georgy Trofimov * 6. The New Export Routes and Gazprom’s Strategic Opportunities in Europe; Andrei Vavilov, Galina Kovalishina, and Georgy Trofimov * 7. The Evolution of the Russian Gas Market; Ivan Nazarov December 2014 UK December 2014 US 292pp 16 b/w tables, 32 figures Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137461094

9781137461094

Rethinking the Future of Europe A Challenge of Governance Edited by Stefan Schepers, European Institute of Public Administration, Belgium, Andrew Kakabadse, Cranfield School of Management, Cranfield University, UK Rethinking the Future of Europe has brought together three contrasting collections of contributions: the incrementalist perspective concerning the step by step development of Europe, the more radical reform/ restructuring approach to the future of Europe, and a view of Europe from the outside. Contents: Introduction; Stefan Schepers and Andrew Kakabadse * 1. Multi-stakeholder Deliberation for (Global) Justice: An Approach from Modern Civic Republicanism; Ganesh Nathan * 2. Forging the iron or chasing the wind? New challenges to Europe’s governance; Klaus Gretschmann * 3. Shaping the European mind-set: A governance design and policy innovation agenda; Nadeem Khan and Nada Kakabadse * 4. New Governance for New Challenges in the European Union; Stefan Schepers * 5. The Transatlantic Regulatory Timing of Policy Innovations: The Case of Renewable Energy; Nadeem Khan, Elias Asproudis & Nada Kakabadse * 6. From consensus to scepticism: the uncertain future of Europe; Romano Prodi * 7. Renewing European Politics; Julian Priestley * 8. An Integrated Europe: Undermined by Transactional Interests; Andrew Kakabadse & Nada Kakabadse * 9. The Future of Europe – A Perspective from Asia; Chandran Nair * 10. Russia Looking at EUrope; Tatiana Romanova * 11. Europe Seen from Africa; Obadiah Mailafia * 12. A View from the Margins of Europe, as the EU versus Russia Standoff Unfolds: Georgia’s virtual ‘choice’; Tedo Japaridze & Ilia Roubanis October 2014 UK October 2014 US 296pp 4 figures, 11 b/w tables, 1 b/w line drawing Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 9781137024008 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137024008

Katerina Tsetsura

Contents: 1. Introduction; Tom Watson * 2. Bulgaria; Dessislava Boshnakova * 3. Croatia; Ana Tkalac Verčič * 4. Czech Republic; Denisa Hejlová * 5. Hungary; György Szondi * 6. Poland; Ryszard Ławniczak * 7. Romania; Adela Rogojinaru * 8. Russia; Katerina Tsetsura, Ludmila V. Minaeva and Nadezda Aydaeva * 9. Slovenia; Dejan Verčič * 10. Ukraine; Anastasiia Grynko and

National Perspectives on the Development of Public Relations August 2014 UK August 2014 US 128pp Hardback £45.00 / $67.50 / CN$78.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137404244

9781137404244

HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEE RELATIONS HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEE RELATIONS

Generations and Work Eric Bolland, Viterbo College, USA, Carlos Lopes, Midway College, USA

Christian Scripture and Human Resource Management

Based on an extensive national survey of workers and four separate industry-specific surveys, Generations and Work will examine and provide answers to the most common issues and problems of multi generational work by assessing differences and commonalities between and among generations.

Building a Path to Servant Leadership through Faith Gary E. Roberts, Regent University, USA Christian Scripture and Human Resource Management provides a much-needed Christian faith-based perspective on human resources management written for both line and human resource managers using the framework of servant leadership, the mandated leadership approach used by Jesus. Contents: 1 Servant Leader Human Resource Management (SLHRM): The ‘City on the Hill’ Foundational Principles of Organizational Integrity * 2 Biblical Foundation for Servant Leader Principles * 3 Servant Leader Human Resource Management Organizational Integrity * 4 The SLHRM Change Management Process and the Barriers to Effective Change * 5 Servant Leader Human Resources Management: Principles of Empowerment and Discipleship Making * 6 Servant Leader Human Resources Management: Principles of Fair Employee Treatment * 7 Servant Leader Human Resources Management: Principles of Work/life Balance and Margin * 8 Servant Leader Human Resources Management: Performance Management Principle * 9 Servant Leader Human Resources Management: Staffing Principles * 10 Servant Leader Human Resources Management: Training and Development * 11 Servant Leader Human Resources Management: Compensation Management * 12 Final Reflections February 2015 UK February 2015 US 272pp Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137440662

9781137440662

Cross-Border Staff Mobility A Comparative Study of Profit and Non-Profit Organisations Edited by Christel Adick, Ruhr-University Bochum, Germany, Martina Maletzky, Ruhr-Universitat Bochum, Germany, Ludger Pries, Ruhr University Bochum, Germany, Bruno Gandlgruber, Universidad Autónoma Metropolitana, Mexico Cross-Border Staff Mobility addresses several research gaps in the study of organisations and rarely analysed areas such as the non-profit sector (NPOs). It combines approaches from HRM, business studies and organisation research, and incorporates micro- and macro-perspectives on organisations and institutions by using situational and neo-institutionalist frames. Contents: 1. Cross-Border Mobility: Not Only Goods and Information, Also People * 2. Cross-border Staff Mobility in German and Mexican Profit Organizations * 3. Staff Mobility in Non-Profit-Organizations in Comparison * 4. Conclusions December 2014 UK December 2014 US 312pp 7 figures, 19 b/w tables Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$132.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137404398

9781137404398

Contents: 1. Introduction and Plan of the Book * 2. The Concept of Generations * 3. Age Based Job Motivators and Generational Conflict * 4. Generation Issues in Different Industries * 5. How Generations Impact Businesses * 6. Does Generation Matter? * 7. Diagnosing and Solving Age Issues * and more. October 2014 UK October 2014 US 280pp 1 b/w illustration, 9 b/w tables, 23 graphs Hardback £70.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 9781137350572 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137350572

HR in the Boardroom The HR Professional’s Guide to Earning a Place in the C-Suite Lance Wright, Lance Wright & Associates, LLC, USA This unique guide explores how senior HR executives can build strong working relationships with the CEO, other members of the executive team, and the board of directors. With case studies and interviews with HR professionals from a range of industries and locations, this is truly the first book of its kind. Contents: Introduction * 1. What CEOs Really Think About Most HR People And Why * 2. How To Earn A Seat At The Executive Table * 3. You’ve Got a Seat at the C-Suite Table – Now What? * 4. What’s The Share Price Today? – Knowing The Business Front To Back * 5. Helping The Executive Team With Its 4 Rs – Recruit, Reward, Retain And Retire Talent * and more... April 2015 UK May 2015 US 240pp Hardback £22.99 / $36.00 / CN$41.50 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137450890

9781137450890

Just Work Narratives of Employment in the 21st Century Grant Michelson, Edith Cowan University, Australia, Shaun Ryan, Deakin University, Australia Exploring major questions such as what people want from their work and why, Just Work discusses both new and enduring themes, examining to what extent this is accounted for by a changing environment of work since the 1970s. Contents: Introduction – Reflections on Work * 1. What has Happened to Work? * 2. Growing, Making and Delivering Stuff * 3. Selling and Serving * 4. Helping People * 5. Protecting People * 6. Informing and Entertaining * 7. Work – In Progress * Appendix One: Participant characteristics * Appendix Two: Author narratives October 2014 UK October 2014 US 208pp 1 b/w table Hardback £67.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137350152

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

9781137350152

HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEE RELATIONS Measuring and Maximizing Training Impact Bridging the Gap between Training and Business Result

Rethinking Interviewing and Personnel Selection

Paul Leone, Professional, USA ‘‘Paul has perfected an invaluable measurement process that allows leaders and executives to showcase the powerful effects of training investments and even convince some of the naysaying stakeholders that training is not just an expensive perk, but an absolute necessity to stay competitive. With his Level 6 analysis, he also helps executives finally understand how to focus and fine tune training efforts to create maximum impact for the organization. We worked with Paul to develop an impressive and rock solid business case that investment in our training programs was incredibly valuable and making a significant contribution to the bottom line.’ - Scott Blanchard, Principal and Vice President, The Ken Blanchard Companies Measuring and Maximizing Training Impact shows trainers how to create building blocks, construct the right linkages, and measure the impact of training programs from the first step (Level 1 – reaction) to the final destination (Level 5 – ROI). Including a new ground-breaking Level 6 exploring training sustainability, this is a must-read for HR professionals.

Teresa Carla Oliveira, University of Coimbra, Portugal

Contents: Foreword – Why Measure? * Introduction – Bridging The Gap Between Training And Business Results * 1. Did They Like It? * 2. Did They Learn Anything? * 3. Are They Doing Anything Different? * 4. Did It Impact The Business? * 5. Was It Worth It? * 6. How Do We Maximize Impact? * Summary * Conclusion * Case Study 1 * Case Study 2

Using Remote Personality Profiling to Influence, Negotiate and Motivate

September 2014 UK September 2014 US 224pp Hardback £19.99 / $30.00 / CN$34.50 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137414793

9781137414793

People Data How to Use and Apply Human Capital Metrics in your Company Tine Huus, Best Work of Our Lives Ltd, Denmark People are an organizations’ biggest asset and easily amount to 30% of company costs so even small improvements can have a bottom-line impact. A unique toolkit to an important new trend, People Data demystifies and simplifies the process of understanding and working with human capital metrics. Contents: Preface * 1. Why Bother about Human Capital Metrics? * 2. Working Strategically with Human Capital * 3. The Machine Room * 4. Determining What Measures You Need * 5. A Toolbox for Managers * 6. Making It Happen * 7. Limitations and Obstacles * 8. Metrics for Sceptics * 9. Calls to Action * Appendices

Palgrave Pocket Consultants May 2015 UK June 2015 US 200pp 25 figures Paperback £17.99 / $29.00 / CN$31.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137466945

9781137466945

The case studies in Rethinking Interviewing and Personnel Selection find support for Herriot (1993, 2003) and Fletcher’s (1997, 2003) claims that the selection interview is a social process which may gain from a degree of semi-structured interaction with candidates. Contents: 1. What Selection Theory Claims * 2. Who Knows for a Fact? * 3. Yet How Do We Know? * 4. Where’s the Logic? * 5. What’s the Proof? * 6. So Why Dismiss Intuition? * 7. Interviewing and Psychological Contract * 8. Tacit Knowledge and Implicit Learning * 9. Rethinking Selection Theory * 10. What Managers Have in Mind * 11. Power Dynamics and Selection * 12. So Where Now? * Annex Sets-Within-Sets of Criteria in Panel Interviewing March 2015 UK March 2015 US 208pp 7 b/w tables, 20 figures Hardback £67.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137497338

9781137497338

Revealed John Taylor, UK, Adrian Furnham, University College London, UK, Janet Breeze, UK ‘Revealed is the perfect road map for anyone who has to assess people, and let’s face it, we’re all responsible for other people in some capacity or another. This book provides the clearest guidance I have seen about what influences people’s behaviors and how we can use this knowledge to succeed. Intriguingly it also provides insights into our ‘Dark Side’ behaviors – most of us have some – apparently!’ - Sir Nigel Knowles, Global Co-CEO, DLA Piper ‘This timely, original and engaging book argues that personality is a crucial determinant of career performance, and that personality can be evaluated at a distance. The message, based on hard data, is important news for the talent management industry; organizations will ignore it at their peril.’ - Robert Hogan, President, Hogan Assessment Systems A practical guide to using remote personality profiling for business purposes. Contents: Introduction * PART I: WHAT WE NEED TO KNOW * 1. Intelligence * 2. Personality * 3. Personal History and Background * 4. Cultural Differences * 5. Motivation * 6. Values and Abilities * 7. Bad Apples and Bad Eggs * PART II: MEASURING AND MANAGING THE DIFFERENCES * 8. Introduction to Remote Profiling * 9. Remote Profiling * 10. Personality Disorders and the Criminal * 11. Body Language and Detecting Deceit * 12. Influence and Persuasion * Conclusion October 2014 UK November 2014 US 284pp 22 b/w tables, 19 figures Hardback £22.99 / $40.00 / CN$46.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137291981

9781137291981

HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEE RELATIONS Servant Leader Human Resource Management

Stress in the Spotlight

A Moral and Spiritual Perspective

Managing and Coping with Stress in the Workplace

Gary E. Roberts, Regent University, USA

Brian Claridge, National UK Press, UK, Cary Cooper, Lancaster University, UK ‘Brian Claridge and Cary Cooper do for stress and coping, what Studs Terkel did for working women and men several decades ago. Through interviews with 23 successful women and men from a range of occupations, from a bomb disposal officer, leaders of major organizations, a surgeon, and a mountain climber among others, they identify demands and challenges these individuals faced and how they managed them. This engaging collection offers useful insights of benefit to all readers.’ - Professor Ronald J. Burke, Schulich School of Business, York University, Canada

Servant Leader Human Resource Management provides a comprehensive conceptual framework based on a dignity enhancing stewardship model that integrates and balances mission achievement with motive, means and ends integrity from both a line manager and human resource department perspective. Contents: 1. Principles of Servant Leader Human Resource Management (SLRHM) * 2. Servant Leader Human Resource Management Organizational Integrity * 3. The SLHRM Change Management Process and the Barriers to Effective Change * 4. Employee Empowerment and Discipleship Making Principles * 5. Employee Fair Treatment Principles * 6. Employee Work-Life Balance and Margin Principles * 7. Employee Performance Management Principles * 8. Employee Staffing Principles * 9. Employee Training and Development Principles * 10. Employee Compensation Management Principles * 11. Final Reflections September 2014 UK September 2014 US 276pp 15 tables Hardback £70.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137428363

9781137428363

Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. Pressures on People in Different walks of Life * 3. Dealing with Pressure * 4. Managing Difficult People * 5. Bouncing Back from Set Backs * 6. Thinking One Step at a Time * 7. Boosting Your Self-Confidence * 8. Juggling Work and Family/Private Life * 9. Time Poor: Maintaining Valued Relationships * 10. Being Adaptable * 11. Glass Half Full * 12. Lessons for the Future October 2014 UK November 2014 US 210pp Hardback £29.99 / $45.00 / CN$52.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137292346

Seven Moralities of Human Resource Management Thomas Klikauer, School of Management, University of Western Sydney, Australia Seven Moralities of Human Resource Management analyses morality of HRM from the perspective of American psychologist Laurence Kohlberg. This book examines and makes value judgements on whether or not HRM is moral from the viewpoint of Kohlberg’s seven stages of morality as a follow-up study of the author’s 2012 book, Seven Management Moralities. Contents: A. Introducing The Seven Moralities of Human Resource Management * B. Human Resource Management and Seven Moral Philosophies * 1. Morality 1: Disciplinary Action, Obedience and Punishment: Obedience and Soliciting the Cooperation of Victims * 2. Morality 2: Performance Management and Rewards: HRM, Intuitionism, Subjectivism, Hobbes, and Nietzsche * 3. Morality 3: Organisational Culture and Workplace Training: HRM, Aristotle, and Modern Virtue Ethics * 4. Morality 4: The Legal Context, Fairness and Equality: HR Policies, Regulations, and Organisational Order * 5. Morality 5: HRM and Utilitarianism: The Happiness Principle as HRM’s Organisational Objective * 6. Morality 6: HRM and Universalism: Kant’s Ethical Philosophy: Means, Human Resources, and Ends * 7. Morality 7: Sustainability and the Natural Environment: Environmental Ethics and Social Ecology * 8. Conclusion: Seven Moralities of HRM and an Analysis of HRM Textbooks: Seven HRM Moralities and Seven HRM Areas; Assessing HRM’s Overall Level of Morality October 2014 UK October 2014 US 376pp 4 figures, 12 b/w tables Hardback £77.00 / $120.00 / CN$138.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137455765

Based upon interviews with individuals in high pressure positions, from business leaders to a bomb disposal expert, this book provides practical insight about how to identify, tackle and overcome any kind of stress.

9781137455765

9781137292346

Why Human Capital is Important for Organizations People Come First Edited by Amelia Manuti, University of Bari, Italy, Pasquale Davide de palma, Independent, Italy Why Human Capital is Important for Organizations encompasses eleven chapters dealing with some of the most important issues in the field of human resource management through the exploration of four key themes: drawing the scenario, the pivots of human capital, measuring human capital, and good practices from abroad. Contents: Introduction; Nigel Nicholson * PART I: DRAWING THE SCENARIO * 1. The Work between Fordism and Post-Fordism; Giacomo Pisani * 2. The Job-fatigue and the Emancipation of Workers: Past Scenarios and Perspectives; Nicola Costantino, Gaetano Veneto and Pasquale Davide de Palma * 3. Organizational Resiliency and Individual Employability: a Note on the Role of Psychological Capital in Change Management; Amelia Manuti * PART II: THE PIVOTS OF HUMAN CAPITAL * 4. Entrepreneurial Employees; Francisco Diaz Bretones * 5. Leading with Heart: The Impact of Emotionally Intelligent Leadership; Kenneth S. Rhee and Tracey H. Sigler * 6. How Expectation Theories are Involved in Internal and External Components of Work Experience: Some Reflections to Recruit and Guide Candidates; Grazia De Benedictis and Pasquale Davide de Palma * 7. Assessment in the Work Context; Clive Fletcher * PART III: MEASURING HUMAN CAPITAL * 8. Measuring and Managing the financial performance of Human Capital Investments; Frank DiBernardino * 9. People Performance Plan...Going Beyond the Present ...into the Future; Pasquale Davide De Palma * PART IV: GOOD PRACTICES FROM ABROAD * 10. Human Capital Management in Asia. The War on Talent Continues in this High-Growth Region; Fermin Diez * 11. Talent in Transition! How People and Organizations Need to Change with Changing Times? The Dynamics and Constants of Transience; Sandeep Apte * Conclusions. (Why) People (really) Come First June 2014 UK June 2014 US 232pp 3 figures, 6 b/w tables Hardback £70.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137410788

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

9781137410788

HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEE RELATIONS The Worldwide Workplace

Attracting and Retaining Talent

Solving the Global Talent Equation

Becoming an Employer of Choice

Mike Johnson, FutureWork Forum, UK ‘If you want to know what the workplace of tomorrow will look and feel like – this is the book you should read.’ - Eric Cornuel, Director General and CEO, European Foundation for Management Development ‘The workplace is changing fast. If you and your organization care and want to be ready for it, this is the book to get real.’ - Gilbert Probst, Managing Director and Dean, World Economic Forum ‘We’re facing global shortages of talent, because we are still educating people for the jobs of the past. This book shows which skills YOUR business needs if it is to survive over the next decade.’ - Peter Lorange, President/CEO, the Lorange Institute for Business, Zurich Traditional notions of work are transforming rapidly as we enter into the global workspace. Through interviews with leading experts, The Worldwide Workplace gives readers a practical understanding of how to prepare for and capitalize on changes to the working environment. Contents: 1. The Workspace of the World * 2. The Challenges of a Worldwide Workspace * 3. Looking for Opportunities in the Worldwide Workspace * 4. Who will be in the Workspace? * 5. What the Worldwide Workspace Looks Like * 6. Workspace Jobs for Today and Tomorrow * 7. Educate to Meet the Workspace Need * 8. A Worldwide Workspace for Your Organization * 9. A Worldwide Workspace for YOU – the Career Plan * 10. A Word from the Future: Does it all make sense? May 2014 UK June 2014 US 222pp 27 figures Hardback £22.99 / $35.00 / CN$40.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137361264

Tim Baker, WINNERS-AT-WORK Pty Ltd, Australia ‘Tim Baker’s latest book provides just the ticket for turning your organization into a great place to work.’ - Professor Marshall Goldsmith, author or editor of 34 books including the global bestsellers MOJO and What Got You Here Won’t Get You There ‘Tim’s book is a real joy: clearly written, nicely produced and very practical. He brings some fresh thinking to the all-important area.’ - Professor Adrian Furnham, University College London ‘Tim Baker’s insights in Attracting and Retaining Talent offer new ways of thinking about how employees relate to their organization. The ideas are fresh and forward thinking. The cases and tools are pragmatic and practical. This is an excellent book on how the organization of the future will match future employee expectations.’ - Professor Dave Ulrich, Ross School of Business, University of Michigan;Partner, the RBL Group Many companies are striving to adopt an ‘employer of choice’ strategy in an attempt to attract and retain quality staff, although few do this well. This book offers a practical roadmap for developing a more productive workplace culture; one that reflects the changing needs of the modern employee and the progressive organisation. Contents: 1. The Eight Changing Values * 2. The New World of Work * 3. The New Employment Relationship Model * 4. Learning and Earning: From Specialist Employment to Flexible Deployment * 5. Customer-centricity: From Internal Focus to Customer Focus * 6. The End of the Job: From Job Focus to Performance Focus * 7. Burn the Organisational Chart! From Functional-based to Project-based Work * 8. Engaging Hearts and Minds: From Human Dispirit and Work to Human Spirit and Work * 9. Committing to the Cause: From Loyalty to Commitment * 10. Three Dimensional Learning: From Training to Learning * 11. Overcoming the Initiative Paradox: From Closed Information to Open Information Palgrave Pocket Consultants

9781137361264 May 2014 UK June 2014 US 292pp 12 tables, 8 figures Paperback £14.99 / $24.00 / CN$27.50 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137411730

9781137411730

Young Workers and Trade Unions A Global View Edited by Andy Hodder, Birmingham Business School, University of Birmingham, UK, Lefteris Kretsos, University of Greenwich, UK Young Workers and Trade Unions provides an understanding of the processes in which unions engage with young people, and views and opinions young people hold relating to collective representation. It features a selection of specific national cases of high relevance to contemporary debates of precariousness, trade union revitalization strategies and austerity policies. Contents: Foreword – Edmund Heery * 1. Young Workers And Unions: Context And Overview; Andy Hodder And Lefteris Kretsos * 2. Trade Unions’ ‘Deliberative Vitality’ Towards Young Workers: Survey Evidence Across Europe; Kurt Vandaele * 3. New Times Are Still Coming, Old Times Are Still Leaving: Notes About Young People’s Participation And Union Traditions In Contemporary Argentina; Julia Soul * 4. Ageing Australian Unions And The ‘Youth Problem’; David Peetz, Robin Price And Janis Bailey * 5. Danish Trade Unions And Young People: Using Media In The Battle For Hearts And Minds; Torsten Geelan * 6. Mobilised But Not Unionised? An Analysis Of The Relationship Between Youth And Trade Unionism In France; Sylvie Contrepois * 7. Trade Unions And Young Workers In Times Of Crisis: A Critical Reflection On The Case Of Greece; Lefteris Kretsos * 8. ‘Stop The Junk Contracts!’ Young Workers And Trade Union Mobilization Against Precarious Employment In Poland; Adam Mrozowicki, Agata Krasowska And Mateusz Karolak * 9. Young Workers And Unions In Spain: A Failed Meeting?; Carlos J. Fernández Rodríguez, Rafael Ibáñez Rojo, Pablo López Calle And Miguel Martínez Lucio * 10. ‘Old Dusty Men’? Young People And Trade Unions In The UK; Andy Hodder * 11. Catching The Next Wave: A Study Of A U.S. Union’s Young Worker Program; Monica Bielski Boris * 12. Concluding Comments; Lefteris Kretsos And Andy Hodder April 2015 UK April 2015 US 224pp 17 b/w tables, 13 figures Hardback £75.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137429513

9781137429513

The Changing Nature of the Graduate Labour Market Media, Policy and Political Discourses in the UK Gerbrand Tholen, Oxford University, UK The assumptions made in the media regarding graduate skills and occupations are no longer valid within the changing educational context. This book traces seven key trends that shape the graduate labour market and reveals that their effects contradict the conceptualisation of the graduate labour market which dominates media and policy discourses. Contents: Introduction * 1. The Representation of the Graduate Labour Market: Media and Political Discourses * 2. Seven Trends Shaping the UK Graduate Labour Market * 3. Where has it Gone Wrong?

September 2014 UK September 2014 US 96pp 1 b/w table, 10 figures Hardback £45.00 / $67.50 / CN$78.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137479068

9781137479068

INNOVATION The Curve Ahead

INNOVATION

Discovering the Path to Unlimited Growth

Managing Flow A Process Theory of the Knowledge-Based Firm

Now available in paperback

2nd edition Ikujiro Nonaka, The Graduate School of International Corporate Strategy, Hitotsubashi University, Tokyo, Japan, Ryoko Toyama, Japan Advanced Institute of Science and Technology, Graduate School of Knowledge Science, Japan, Toru Hirata, Faculty of Economics, Kanazawa University, Ishikawa, Japan Presents an ultimate theory of knowledge-based management and organizational knowledge creation based on empirical research and an extensive literature review. It explores knowledge management as a global concept and is relevant to any company that wants to prosper and thrive in the global knowledge economy. Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. Characteristics of Knowledge * 3. The Theoretical Framework * 4. Vision and Driving Objectives: Values for the Common Good * 5. Eisai * 6. Honda * 7. Implications * 8. Ba * 9. Mayekawa Manufacturing Co., Ltd * 10. Kumon * 11. Implications * 12. Dialogue and Practice: Leveraging Organizational Dialects * 13. Seven-Eleven Japan * 14. Muji * 15. Implications * 16. Dynamic Knowledge Assets in Process * 17. YKK * 18. JFE: Synthesizing Experience * 19. Implications * 20. Leadership: Fostering Distributed Excellence in the Organization * 21. Canon * 22. Toyota Prius * 23. Implications * Conclusions February 2015 UK February 2015 US 280pp 4 b/w tables, 39 figures Paperback £24.99 / $40.00 / CN$45.99 Canadian Rights www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137494825

9781137494825

August 2014 UK July 2014 US 224pp 15 b/w illustrations Hardback £16.99 / $25.00 / CN$29.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137279224

9781137279224

Digital Business Discourse Edited by Erika Darics, Aston University, UK Digital Business Discourse provides a timely and comprehensive snapshot of the current digital communication practices of today’s organisations and workplaces, covering a wide spectrum of communication technologies, such as email, instant messaging, message boards, Twitter, corporate blogs, consumer reviews and mobile communication technologies.

Cloud Systems in Supply Chains Edited by Fawzy Soliman, University of Technology, Australia Cloud Systems in Supply Chains explores the risks that could face supply chain firms if their implementation of cloud systems is not carefully managed or if not appropriately selected and supported. This volume aids supply chain firms in ensuring that their cloud system activities are positioned to assist and sustain their competitive advantages. Contents: Editorial Introduction Cloud Systems in Demand-Supply Chains; Fawzy Soliman, Australia. * 1. Could Cloud Systems drive sustainable competitive advantages in SupplyDemand Chains?; Fawzy Soliman, Australia. * 2. Application of a Cloud-Based Supply Chain Management System to Achieve Mass Customization: Best Practices From Automotive Industry; Niksa Alfirevic, Darko Rendulic, and Anita Talaja, Croatia * 3. Applying Cloud Computing on Supply Chain Management in the Middle East; Hesham Magd, Oman * 4. Service-Oriented Architecture, Agile, Lean and Component Based Software Engineering - Future Solution For cloud computing; Jasmine K.S, India. * 5. Strategies for deployment of Cloud Systems in Supply Chain firms; Fawzy Soliman, Australia. * 6. SaaS Empowered Innovative On-Demand Software Applications: Potential and Challenges of Cloud; Roma Chauhan and Harjit Singh, India. * 7. Evaluating Cloud System Providers: Models, Methods and Applications; Mohamed Firdhous, Suhaidi Hassan, Osman Ghazali, Massudi Mahmuddin, Malaysia. * 8. Macroprudential Regulation and Bank Performance: Evidence from India; Lekshmi and Ganesh, India. * 9. Changing Needs in Supply Chain Management – Curriculum Design to Reflect the Changing Needs; Shirley Yeung. Hong Kong. * 10. Banking and Financial Sector in the Cloud Knowledge, Quality and Innovation Management; Mosad Zineldin and Valentina Vasicheva, Sweden * 11. An Overview Of Information And Communication Technology (Ict) In Jordan; Anas Al-Bakri, Qatar. * 12. Investigating the Role of Knowledge gaps in enhancing quality in cloud environments; Ahmed Mehrez, Qatar. * 13. Does Cloud System drive Supply Chain sustainability?; Fawzy Soliman, Australia. December 2014 UK December 2014 US 336pp 66 figures, 19 b/w tables Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137324238

Dave Power, CEO of Perkins, USA ‘The Curve Ahead is unique book that focuses on the growth challenges of mid-sized companies. Dave Power draws on a lifetime of experiences to show growth company leaders how to sustain growth over time by building innovation into the rhythm of business operations.’ - Eric Schmidt, Executive Chairman, Google ‘Successful growth companies never stop searching for the next innovation. Entrepreneurs who want to build more than a one-product company need to read The Curve Ahead.’ - Vinod Khosla, Khosla Ventures Why do most growth companies stop growing? What can leaders do to overcome the barriers to growth? The Curve Ahead tackles these questions using examples from brands like LoJack and Myspace which experienced a similar decline. This book will help SMEs overcome the growth hump by providing tools to succeed and thrive.

Contents: Foreword; Francesca Bargiela * Introduction; Erika Darics * PART I: NEW TECHNOLOGIES - NEW MODES OF COMMUNICATION * 1. ‘Don’t Even Get Me Started…’: Interactive Metadiscourse in Online Consumer Reviews; Camilla Vásquez * 2. Social CEOs: Tweeting as a Constitutive Form of Organizational Communication; Katerina Girginova * 3. Utterance Chunking in Instant Messaging: A Resource for Interaction Management; Kris M. Markman * 4. Some Linguistic and Pragmatic Aspects of Italian Business E-mail; Nives Lenassi * PART II: NEW MODES OF COMMUNICATION - NEW CONVENTIONS * 5. Doing Leadership in a Virtual Team: Analysing Addressing Devices; Karianne Skovholt * requests and emoticons in a leader’s e-mail messages * 6. Swearing is E-business: Expletives in Instant Messaging in Hong Kong Workplace; Bernie C. N. Mak and Carmen Lee * 7. Snuff Said! Conflicting Corporate and Employee interests in the Pursuit of a Tobacco Client; Kristy Beers Fägersten * 8. Sheer Outrage: Negotiating Customer Dissatisfaction and Interactional Control in Corporate Blog; Valerie Creelman * PART III: THEORETICAL AND METHODOLOGICAL APPROACHES TO DIGITAL BUSINESS DISCOURSE * 9. What Did I Just Tweet?!: The Need to Address Digital Emotional Literacy in Corporate Communications; Steven A. Edelson, Phil Kim, Ron Scott, Julie Szendrey * 10. Recovering the Human in the Network: Exploring Communicology as a Research Methodology in Digital Business Discourse; Craig T. Maier, David DeIuliis * 11. Identification of Rhetorical Moves in Business E-mails Written by Indian Speakers of English; María Luisa CarrióPastor * 12. Deconstruction-Analysis-Explanation (DEANEX): Contextualisation in professional digital discourse; Erika Darics April 2015 UK April 2015 US 272pp 18 b/w tables, 8 figures Hardback £63.00 / $95.00 / CN$110.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137405562

9781137405562

9781137324238

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

INNOVATION Financing Life Science Innovation Venture Capital, Corporate Governance and Commercialization Alexander Styhre, Chalmers University of Technology, Sweden Financing Life Science Innovation reviews the literature on venture capital, corporate governance, and life science venturing and presents a study of the Swedish life science industry and the venture capital investors being active in financially and managerially supporting life science start-up firms. Contents: Introduction: Competitive Capitalism and the Role of Capital Investment * PART I: ELEMENTS OF LIFE SCIENCE INNOVATION * 1. The Financialization of the Economy * 2. Corporate Governance and the Supply of Commercial Human Capital * 3. The Methodology of the Study * PART II: EMPIRICAL STUDIES * 4. Valuing Life Science Ventures * 5. The Corporate Governance of Life Science Companies * 6. Promoting Life Science Venturing and Innovations: Developing National Innovation Systems * PART III: ANALYSIS AND CONTRIBUTION * 7. Managing Life Science Innovation April 2015 UK April 2015 US 258pp 2 b/w tables Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137392466

9781137392466

The Gamification of Higher Education Developing a Game-Based Business Strategy in a Disrupted Marketplace Neil B. Niman, University of New Hampshire, USA “Blending business strategy and game design principles, Niman offers a fresh perspective that looks at how traditional universities must change in order to remain competitive in a rapidly changing environment. Rather than abandoning the residential college experience, he uses gamification to map out a strategy that will enable brick and mortar institutions to compete against the growing wave of online offerings.” - Mark W. Huddleston, President, University of New Hampshire, USA “You’re likely to find Niman’s remedy for the current problems facing the higher education industry both provocative and enticing. As voices grow louder questioning the viability of the traditional system, he shows how game design can be used to fashion a thoughtful solution. By rethinking the entire academic experience, he seeks to engage students and professors in a world of co-creation and value optimization.” - Kevin Bell, Executive Director of Curriculum Development and Deployment, College of Professional Studies, Northeastern University, USA Instead of thinking about education as the mastery of a body of knowledge where the subject matter becomes the focus of our attention, The Gamification of Higher Education encourages us to think of it as a process that draws out the best in individuals and prepares them for happy, productive, and successful lives. Contents: PART I: THE BUSINESS OF HIGHER EDUCATION * 1. The Coming ‘Perfect Storm’ in Higher Education * 2. Insights from the Game Industry * 3. Gamification as a Business Strategy * PART II: GAMING FUNDAMENTALS * 4. The Allure of Games * 5. Design Elements * 6. Structural Design * PART III: TRANSFORMATION THROUGH GAMIFICATION * 7. The Classroom as a Game Space * 8. Creating a Game-Based Student Experience * 9. The Future of Higher Education July 2014 UK July 2014 US 240pp 14 b/w photos Hardback £70.00 / $110.00 / CN$127.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137338730

9781137338730

Integrated Communications in the Postmodern Era Edited by Philip J. Kitchen, ESC Rennes School of Business, France, Ebru Uzunoglu, Izmir University of Economics, Turkey Integrated Communications in the Postmodern Era is for readers who wish to develop their knowledge, insight, skills, and facility into integrated communications within the post-modern era, a topic of relevance everywhere, but particular apposite as the original conference was hosted in Turkey, a rapidly developing nation, and one enjoying significant growth in the global. Contents: 1. Introduction: Integrated Communications in the Post Modern Age; Philip J. Kitchen and Ebru Uzunoglu * 2. Integrated Marketing Communications: A Contextual Approach; Philip J. Kitchen and Marwa Tourky * 3. Integrating Communication at Tourism Destinations: Meeting the Needs of Tourists; Enrique Ortega, Beatriz Rodríguez , and María J. Such-Devesa * 4. Webcare as an Integrative Tool for Customer Care, Reputation Management, and Online Marketing; Guda Van Noort, Lotte M. Willemsen, Peter Kerkhof and Joost W.M. Verhoeven * 5. Stakeholder Engagement - Fad or the Real McCoy? The Attempt of IMC Paradigm Shift via Online Media; Klement Podnar and Urša Golob * 6. The Effects of Marketing Communications and Social Interactions Through Virtual Communities on Consumer-based Brand Equity; B. Zafer Erdogan and Tolga Torun * 7. Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) Communication: A Turkish Exemplar; Selin Türkel and Aysun Akan * 8. Fostering Interactivity through Responsiveness: The Case of Turkish Environmental Non-Profit Organization Websites; Sema Misci Kip and Ebru Uzunoglu * 9. The Making of Gender and Culture in Commercials: Snickers Advertisements; Yesim Kaptan and Burcu Öksüz * 10. The Changing Paradigm of Public Relations in Turkey: From Past to Present; Serra Görpe November 2014 UK November 2014 US 304pp 7 figures, 27 b/w tables Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137388537

Open Innovation through Strategic Alliances Approaches for Product, Technology, and Business Model Creation Edited by Refik Culpan, The Pennsylvania State University at Harrisburg, USA Open Innovation through Strategic Alliances demonstrates the vital role and applications of strategic alliances between firms and research organizations in creating and applying knowledge for the development of new products, technologies, or business models. Contents: Foreword: Charles C. Snow * 1. Open Innovation: Learning from Alliance Research; Joel West * 2. Open Innovation Business Models and the Role of Strategic Alliances; Refik Culpan * 3. Open Innovation through R&D Partnership: Implementation Challenges and Routes to Success; Nadine Roijakkers, John Bell, Jaco Fok, and Wim Vanhaverbeke. * 4. Relational Drivers for Open Innovation Alliances in Biochemistry?; Emiel F.M. Wubben, Andre van Meijeren, and Vincent Blok * 5. Open Innovation and Internationalization Behavior of Firms; Ana M. MorenoMenéndez, and Jose C. Casillas * 6. Accessing Innovation in the Supply Chains; Richard R. Young * 7. Genesis and Evolution of the Xerox P&G Co-Innovation Partnership: Lessons Learned; Robert DeFillippi, Colette Dumas, and Sushil Bhatia * 8. The Role of Open Innovation in BusinessUniversity R&D Collaborations; Ravi Chinta and Refik Culpan * 9. The Big Data Lever for Strategic Alliances; Mariann Jelinek, Steve Barr, Paul Mugge, and Richard Kouri * 10. Open Innovation and KIBS Startups: Technology- and Market-based Alliance Portfolio Configurations; Brian V. Tjemkes, Eduard H. de Pineda, Marc D. Bahlmann, Ard-Pieter de Man, and Alexander S. Alexiev September 2014 UK September 2014 US 348pp 28 b/w tables, 29 figures Hardback £70.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137398550

9781137388537

9781137398550

INNOVATION Program Management of Technology Endeavours

Technology Financing and Commercialization Exploring the Challenges and How Nations Can Build Innovative Capacity

Lateral Thinking in Large Scale Government Program Management

Jarunee Wonglimpiyarat, Thammasat University, Thailand

Ali Al Khouri, Emirates Identity Authority, UAE

Technology Financing and Commercialization offers insights on effective policies that can be applied to other economies in terms of using technology financing to foster technological innovations. It outlines the role of government in accelerating the nation’s innovative capacity by promoting technology investments that will achieve successful and sustainable economic development.

When we look at a program or a project, to identify its size in terms of ‘large’, it would be advisable to consider a few factors that determine the size i.e., effort, uncertainty and complexity involved in delivering the outcome. This book is intended to provide the required lateral thinking in this field of management excellence. Contents: 1. Chapter 1: Introduction * 2. Project Management Philosophy * 3. Program Management Philosophy and Importance of PgMO * 4. Overview of various Project and Program Management Standards * 5 PROgram and PROject Management of Technology Endeavours * 6. Chapter Title: PROMOTE Processes * 7. Chapter 7: Program Reporting and Controls * 8. PROMOTE Case Study * 9. Conclusion May 2015 UK May 2015 US 304pp 30 b/w tables, 60 figures Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137509512

9781137509512

The Seven Sins of Innovation A Strategic Model for Entrepreneurship Dave Richards, Dr Dave Innovation Ltd, UK “Dave Richards has very successfully guided many important and complex innovation projects during his professional career. In this book, he conveys a lifetime of important innovation management insights to fellow practitioners.” – Eric von Hippel, Professor of Innovation Management, MIT Sloan School of Management Offers a psychology based model that features seven key determinants of success or failure for innovation and entrepreneurial endeavours. Provides specific recommendations, examples and case studies that demonstrate how individual and group psychology must be engaged effectively to create entrepreneurial cultures capable of powerful innovation. Contents: 1. Introduction: * 1. The Seven Deadly Sins: * 1.1. Pointless Purposes * 1.2. Hopeless Vision * 1.3. Miscommunication * 1.4. Disengagement * 1.5. Ineffectual Leadership * 1.6. Stifled Creativity * 1.7. Tolerance of Mediocrity * 2. ‘Bridging’: * 2.1. A New Model for Strategic Innovation & Entrepreneurship * 2.2. Lessons from the Edge * 2.3. The ‘Seven Chakras’ of Entrepreneurial Flow * 2.4. Engaging Diversity & Creative Conflict * 2.5. Building Vital Innovation Relationships * 2.6. Engaging Left and Right Brains: Entrepreneurial Psychotherapy * 2.7. The Model Explained: Formulation & Implementation of Success Strategies * 3. Case Studies: * 3.1. The Internet’s Birth and Evolution * 3.2. The Rise and Fall of Nortel Networks * 3.3. The MIT Innovation Lab * 3.4. Public Sector Attempts at Innovation in Health & Wellbeing * 3.5. Oracle Corporation’s Social Responsibility Initiatives * 3.6. Google’s Innovative Culture * 3.7. 3M’s Innovation Leadership * 4. Prescriptions: * 4.1. Inspiring Entrepreneurship & Intrapreneurship * 4.2. Starting an Enterprise * 4.3. Revitalizing an Enterprise * 4.4. Improving Customer Service * 4.5. Marketing Mixology * 4.6. Creating an Innovation Culture * Strategies for Success November 2014 UK December 2014 US 292pp 31 figures, 9 b/w tables Hardback £22.99 / $36.00 / CN$41.50 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137432513

9781137432513

Contents: PART I: CONCEPTS OF TECHNOLOGY FINANCING AND COMMERCIALIZATION * 1. Introduction to Technology Financing, Technology Management and Commercialization * 2. Financing Innovative Businesses Towards Commercialization * 3. Financial Models for Evaluating Technology Investments * PART II: CASE STUDIES OF SUCCESSFUL TECHNOLOGY FINANCING AND COMMERCIALIZATION PROGRAMS * 4. Case Study of Technology Financing and Commercialization Programs – USA * 5. Case Study of Technology Financing and Commercialization Programs – Canada * 6. Case Study of Technology Financing and Commercialization Programs – Israel * PART III: FORGING AHEAD – INNOVATIVE CASE STUDIES IN THE ASIAN ECONOMIES * 7. Case Studies of Technology Financing and Commercialization Programs – Asian Dragons * 8. Case Studies of Technology Financing and Commercialization Programs – Asian Tigers * PART IV: TECHNOLOGY FINANCING TO ENHANCE INNOVATIVE CAPACITY * 9. Technology Financing Towards Effective Economies * 10. Conclusions and Outlook November 2014 UK November 2014 US 328pp 65 figures, 63 b/w tables Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137470614

9781137470614

Winning At Innovation The A-to-F Model Fernando Trías de Bes, ESADE Business School, Spain, Philip Kotler, Kellogg School of Management, Northwestern University, USA “Extremely valuable and very thorough in its approach to innovation.” - Ray Davis, Management Consultant and CMI Judge “The book provides great clarity with regard to innovation: outstanding.” - Judy Craske, Senior Manager at Wylfa Power Station and CMI Judge Innovation is a responsibility normally assigned to R&D departments but this is not enough. Companies need a systematic framework so innovation can occur at different levels of the organization. Trías de Bes and Kotler present a unique, flexible A-F model for innovation for all companies that want to succeed in the global field. Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. Entrepreneurial Barriers To Innovation * PART I * 3. Overall Picture Of The A-To-F Model * 4. Activators * 5. Browsers * 6. Creators * 7. Developers * 8. Executors * 9. Facilitators * 10. The Advantages Of Designing Innovation Processes With The A-To-F Model * 11. Annex I - Examples Of Processes Design Using The A-To-F Model * 12. Annex II - Detail Of Collaboration Tasks And Examples * PART II * 13. Planning Innovation * 14. Metrics * 15. How To Foster a Creative Culture * 16. Incentive And Rewards January 2015 UK February 2015 US 288pp 48 figures, 29 tables, 5 diagrams Paperback £14.99 / $25.00 / CN$29.00 Canadian Rights www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137479174

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

9781137479174

INNOVATION Innovation in the Family Business

The Workplace Community

Succeeding Through Generations

A Guide to Releasing Human Potential and Engaging Employees

Joe Schmieder, The Family Business Consulting Group, USA ‘Joe Schmieder’s new book on innovation in family owned businesses is grounded in sound research but brought to life by real world experience and examples. Joe takes a thoughtful look at innovation in the FOB context but also shares a variety of insights and best practices applicable to family businesses more generally. This is a helpful and easy read for anyone working in or around a family owned business.’ - Bruce C. Young, Partner, Warner Norcross & Judd LLP, Board Member, The Family Business Alliance, and a third generation participant in a family business

Ian Gee, Edgelands Consultancy, UK, Matthew Hanwell, Nokia, Finland “If you are interested in creating vibrant platforms for innovation, problem solving and leadership development and at the same time strengthening your organization’s culture, mission and shared values, then this is a book you should read. The Workplace Community is a new way of encouraging creative thinking across organizational departmental boundaries and it allows engagement at every level and with every stakeholder. Highly readable and very practical I have already shared it with my senior management team.” - Mark McGreevy, Group CEO, Depaul International, London

Schmieder shares a broad range of tools and pathways that family businesses across sectors use to stimulate, execute, measure, and reward innovation. The 50-plus family stories cited in this book will inspire any family enterprise to create a strategy and environment that can stimulate success for many generations to come.

The Workplace Community offers a structured, practical guide to developing collaborative knowledge-based communities in the workplace, from introducing employees and managers to new ways of working, to measuring effectiveness and providing corrective interventions for those who haven’t achieved the desired results.

Contents: Introduction – Creating the Future – Leading Through Innovation * 1. The Family Difference – Capitalizing on Family Innovation * 2. Structured Chaos – Creating a Culture of Innovation * 3. Core Offerings – Driving Value with Product and Service Innovations * 4. Family Continuity – Applying Innovative Thinking to Succession * 5. Family Continuity – Applying Innovative Thinking to Governance * 6. Money and Metrics – Funding and Measuring Innovation * 7. The Next Generation – Re-Innovating the Family Business * 8. Moving Innovation Forward – Concluding Thoughts

Contents: 1. Ways of Working – What Choices Do We Have? * 2. What is a Workplace Community? * 3. How to Tell if a Community is the Right Way of Working for You and Your Organisation? * 4. Elements of an Effective Community * 5. Setting up a Workplace Community – Tools and Techniques * 6. Stages of Community Development and What Can Go Wrong * 7. Tools and Techniques for Planned Interventions * 8. ROI and Measuring the Effectiveness of Your Community * Resources

A Family Business Publication December 2014 UK December 2014 US 144pp Paperback £14.99 / $23.00 / CN$26.99 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137386236

9781137386236

Phronesis and Quiddity in Management A School of Knowledge Approach Kimio Kase, IESE Business School, Spain; International University of Japan, Japan, César González Cantón, CUNEF, Complutense University of Madrid, Spain, Ikujiro Nonaka, The Graduate School of International Corporate Strategy, Hitotsubashi University, Tokyo, Japan Phronesis and Quiddity in Management addresses the issue of the excellence in judgment-making, its concept and characterisation. This book investigates first into what constitutes excellent managerial skills centred on leadership revolving around judgement-making (rather than decision-making) and second into whether they can be taught. Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. The Rationalist Approach To Judgement-Making. Description And Critique * 3. The Metaphysics Of Judgement-Making: Contingency * 4. Consciousness And Quiddity * 5. Phronesis And Quiddity * 6. Conclusions And Discussions * Annex 1: Sazo Idemitsu (1885-1981) * Annex 2: Kazuo Inamori * Annex 3: La Fageda: Knowledge Generation In Social Business

The Nonaka Series on Knowledge and Innovation December 2014 UK December 2014 US 360pp 10 b/w tables, 14 figures Hardback £77.00 / $120.00 / CN$138.00 Canadian Rights www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9780230348004

9780230348004

Palgrave Pocket Consultants November 2014 UK December 2014 US 248pp 30 b/w tables, 8 figures Paperback £16.99 / $27.00 / CN$31.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137441676

9781137441676

The Source of Innovation in China Highly Innovative Human Systems Edited by Ying Ying Zhang, CUNEF Madrid, Spain, Yu Zhou, Renmin University of China, China Given the most popular understanding of Chinese comparative advantage is their low labour cost, The Source of Innovation in China argues the fundamental source for Chinese economic growth is its innovation. Based on case studies and surveys collected from 600 firms, this book describes competitive advantages of successful Chinese enterprises. Contents: 1. The Rise of China: Innovation or Cost Leader * 2. Chinese Innovation in Product, Process and Strategy * 3. Chinese Culture and Value: Enhancing or Impeding Innovation? * 4. Network-based Innovation in China: Typology Along with Economic Evolution * 5. Peoplecentric Innovation: Strategic HR Management and Innovation* 6. Innovation Challenge when Multinationalizing: The Source for Innovation

Palgrave Studies in Chinese Management January 2015 UK January 2015 US 256pp 22 figures, 11 b/w tables Hardback £70.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137335050

9781137335050

INNOVATION Sustainable Development and Quality Assurance in Higher Education Transformation of Learning and Society Edited by Zinaida Fadeeva, United Nations University, Japan, Laima Galkute, Vilnius University, Lithuania, Clemens Mader, University of Lüneburg, Germany, Geoff Scott, University of Western Sydney, Australia To help address the challenges of sustainable development, higher education institutions must transform themselves, bringing together best practice in quality management for tertiary education with best practice in education for sustainable development. This book provides tested strategies and pathways for undertaking this successfully. Contents: 1. Assessment for Transformation: Higher Education Thrives in Redefining Quality Systems; Zinaida Fadeeva, Laima Galkute, Clemens Mader and Geoff Scott * 2. Rankings and the Reconstruction of Knowledge during the Age of Austerity; Ellen Hazelkorn * 3. Sustainable Engagement: Towards a Participative Quality Culture of Sustainable Development in Higher Education; Oliver Vettori and Christian Rammel * 4. The Role of Assessment and Quality Management in Transformations towards Sustainable Development: The Nexus between Higher Education, Society and Policy; Clemens Mader * 5. Drivers for Change in the Austrian University Sector: Implications for Quality Management; Andrea Bernhard and Nadine Shovakar * 6. Quality Assurance System based on Sustainable Development Paradigm: The Lithuanian Perspective; Laima Galkute * 7. Quality System Development at the University of Graz: Lessons Learned from the Case of RCE Graz-Styria; Friedrich M. Zimmermann, Andreas Raggautz, Kathrin Maier, Thomas Drage, Marlene Mader, Mario Diethart and Jonas Meyer

Palgrave Studies in Global Higher Education October 2014 UK October 2014 US 320pp 21 figures, 13 b/w line drawings, 13 b/w tables Hardback £65.00 / $100.00 / CN$115.00 9781137459138 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137459138

Green Innovation and Future Technology Engaging Regional SMEs in the Green Economy Edited by Felicity Kelliher, Waterford Institute of Technology, Ireland, Leana Reinl, Waterford Institute of Technology, Ireland Green Innovation and Future Technology explores green innovation and future technology skill development within regional small to medium sized enterprises. Notwithstanding the goals of a greener Europe, there has been little debate as to how the skills required to fulfil the goals of sustainable development can be imparted within regions and within rural business communities. Contents: Introduction * Chapter 1: THE GREEN ECONOMY * Chapter 2: THE GREEN INNOVATION AND FUTURE TECHNOLOGIES (GIFT) CONCEPT * Chapter 3: MULTILEVEL ENGAGEMENT: THEORY AND PRACTICE INTEGRATION * Chapter 4: RECIPROCAL KNOWLEDGE TRANSFER ACTIVITIES BETWEEN SMEs AND ACADEMIA * Chapter 5: GREEN STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT: THE LEARNING JOURNEY

December 2014 UK December 2014 US 140pp 2 figures, 6 b/w illustrations Hardback £45.00 / $67.50 / CN$78.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137479808

9781137479808

Innovation in Luxury Fashion Family Business Processes and Products Innovation as a Means of Growth Elisa Giacosa, University of Turin, Italy

3D Printing for Development in the Global South The 3D4D Challenge Thomas Birtchnell, University of Wollongong, Australia, William Hoyle, Techfortrade, UK Birtchnell and Hoyle explore how printers, designs, materials and infrastructures all need to be ‘just right’ in order for meaningful social change to happen with appropriate scale. The 3D4D Challenge suggests 3D printing could reach scale in the Global South, even perhaps having the same impact as the mobile phone or microfinance in development. Contents: Introduction * 3DP in the Developing World * Development at the Press of a Button * Disruptive Innovations * The 3DP Ecosystem * The Argument of 3D4D * 1. The 3D4D Challenge * Beginnings * Spreading the Word * Building Momentum and Ideas * The Competition * The Final and the Fallout * 2. What is 3D Printing? * Wealth Without Money * 3D Printing Evangelism * The Next Spinning Jenny * The Next Print Revolution * The 3D4D Goldilocks Zone * Benchmarking 3DP * 3. What Does 3D Printing Change? * How the Other Half Makes * The Division of Labour * Global Production Networks * Post-Fordism * Prosumerism * First World Problems * 4. What Does 3D Printing Change About Development? * Top-Down Development * The Inclusivity Challenge * Bottom-Up Grassroots Innovation

October 2014 UK October 2014 US 136pp 1 illustration Hardback £45.00 / $67.50 / CN$78.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137365651

A large number of family businesses operate in the luxury fashion sector which shows their importance as a source of growth, development and social and economic stability. This book analyses how a strategy of innovation in terms of products and processes can offer a competitive advantage to family businesses operating in the luxury fashion sector. Contents: Introduction * Part I The Family Businesses Phenomenon in the Luxury Fashion Context * Chapter 1 The Family Business Model in the Luxury Fashion Context * Part II The Innovativeness of Luxury Fashion Family Businesses * Chapter 2 The Tendency to Innovate of Family Firms in the Luxury Fashion Business * Chapter 3 Factors of influence on Luxury Fashion Family Businesses Innovativeness * Chapter 4 The focus of the Innovation of Family Firms in the Luxury Fashion Business * Conclusions

December 2014 UK December 2014 US 206pp 16 figures, 1 b/w table Hardback £45.00 / $67.50 / CN$78.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137498649

9781137498649

9781137365651

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

INNOVATION

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS

The Role of Creative Ignorance

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS

Portraits of Pathfinders and Path Creators Piero Formica, Faculty of Economics and Business Administration, University of Tartu, Estonia The Role of Creative Ignorance outlines the importance of creative ignorance using narrative examples of innovators and companies worldwide. Contents: Foreword by Professor Martin Curley * Acknowledgements * Note from the Author * Introduction: Knowing and Not Knowing, by John Edmondson * The Role of Creative Ignorance as a Willing Action * 1. Why Is Creative Ignorance Important? * 2. Introducing Path finders and Path Creators * 3. The Embrace Between Science and Entrepreneurship * 4. The Unity of Opposites * 5. Ambitious Entrepreneurs * 6. Creation out of Nothing * The Portraits * 7. Experimental Theatre: Path Finders and Path Creators Take To the Stage * 8. Portrait of Path Finders * 9. Path Finders of ‘Made in Italy’ * 10. Portrait of Path Creators * 11. Looking for Path Creators of the Grand Unification between Manufacture and Culture. The Opera Houses Case * 12. Path Creators of the Third Millennium University * Epilogue: Traveling to the No Comfort Zone and Reaching the Flow Zone * Selected Bibliography

December 2014 UK December 2014 US 128pp 18 b/w illustrations, 1 graph Hardback £45.00 / $67.50 / CN$78.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137489623

9781137489623

Social Franchising Edited by Ilan Alon, Rollins College, Florida, USA Social franchising represents a third generation form of franchising development, after trade-name and business-format franchising. At the intersection of social enterprise and micro finance literatures, this book reviews a variety of social franchising formats across a number of developing countries. Contents: Introduction (Ilan Alon) * 1. Social Franchising as an Organizational Format – An Overview; Anita du Toit * 2. Overcoming Institutional Challenges in Microfranchising; Lisa Jones Christensen and David Lehr * 3. The Scope for Scaling Up Social Enterprises in China; Michael Norton * 4. Access Afya: Micro-Clinic Health Franchise Designed for Scale; Kevin McKague, Melissa Menke, Ajanthy Arasaratnam * 5. World Vision: Catalyzing the growth of Microfranchising in Tanzania; Andy Hunter and Ashley Wheaton

October 2014 UK September 2014 US 100pp 16 figures Hardback £45.00 / $67.50 / CN$78.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137455826

9781137455826

The Palgrave Handbook of Experiential Learning in International Business Edited by Vas Taras, University of North Carolina at Greensboro, USA, Maria Alejandra Gonzalez-Perez, Universidad EAFIT, Colombia The Handbook of Experiential Learning In International Business is a one-stop source for international managers, business educators and trainers who seek to either select and use an existing experiential learning project, or develop new projects and exercises of this kind. Contents: 1. Introduction; Allan Bird * 2. Conceptual and theoretical foundations: Experiential Learning in International Business and International Management fields; Maria-Alejandra Gonzalez-Perez & Vasyl Taras * 3. Teaching International Business without Teaching International Business: A Reverse Learning Approach; Christian Zuber & Hans-Christian Pfohl * 4. Students as global virtual team leaders: A model for inquiry-based experiential learning; Peter Zettinig, Audra I. Mockaitis & Lena Zander * 5. Integrated experiential learning: Africa and United States case; Lucy Ojode * 6. A model of the firm’s sources of experiential knowledge in the internationalization process; Luis Dau * 7. A Comprehensive Approach to Understand Learning Styles across Countries: A Comparison between the Japanese and Thai Employees of Japanese MNCs; Yoshitaka Yamazaki & Thitiwat Attrapreyangkul * 8. Investing in human capital through training & development: an experiential learning framework; Adrienne Isakovic * 9. X-Culture: Challenges and Best Practices of Large-Scale . Experiential Collaborative Projects; Vasyl Taras & Xavier Ordenana * 10. A decade of Global Enterprise Experiences; Deb Gilbertson & Virginia Cathro * 11. Designing Experiential into International Business Program; Allan Bird, Henry Lane, Nicholas Athanassiou * 12. Combining cross-border online teams and field projects in developing entrepreneurial competencies; Tiit Elenurm * 13. Alternative modes of teaching international business: Online experiential learning; Meena Chavan * 14. Inter-generational and multi-cultural experiential learning in International Business Education; Alfredo Jiménez & Carmen Palmero * 15. Action Learning for Business Students: The Role of Consulting Projects in the MBA Curriculum; James P. Johnson & Michael Brown * 16. It takes a global village: a network approach to providing executive MBA students with a truly global experience; José R. de la Torre * 17. The Role of Experiential Learning in Educating Responsible Citizens; Clara Lei Weng Si (Clara), Ching Chi (Cindia) Lam, Fernando Lourenço & Natalie Sappleton * 18. Beauty or the beast? – Challenges to doing business in emerging markets; Aleksandra Wąsowska * 19. Creative ways of engaging in the global community: Experiential learning approach; Irina Naoumova & Annette Rogers * 20. Social enterprise work placements: Connecting competence to international management experience; Joshua Lange & Keith Douglass Warner * 21. Global Knowledge to Local Practice: Experiential Service Learning Model in International Business and Social Entrepreneurship Education; Sunny Jeong * 22. Transformative Experiences in Teaching International Business: A Study Using an Online Blended Learning System Across Geographies and Contexts; Suresh George, Basil Janavaras, and Todd H. Friends * 23. Game On: Virtual Reality in International Business Education; Grishma Shah & John Cragin * 24. Developing Cultural Intelligence Using Social Media; Olivia Hernández-Pozas * 25. Who Are You Really? Exploring Cultural Identity from the Inside Out; Ruth C. May * 26. Experiential Learning via the Design Thinking Technique; Maiia Deutschmann & Motitz Botts * 27. Towards reflexivity in international business classrooms: Experiential activities involving critical reflection; Mark Tayar & Varina Paisley * 28. Transformative Experiences in Teaching International Business: A Study Using an Online Blended Learning System Across Geographies and Contexts; Bülent Kılıç, Muhsine Itır Özgen, Esra Tuncer, Pınar Özbek & Rengin Işık * 29. Enhancing educational quality through active learning in mega classes; Nikolaos Papazoglou * 30. Balancing skill application and cultural context in international travel programs; Jennie L. Walker * more... December 2014 UK December 2014 US 952pp 69 b/w tables, 93 figures Hardback £165.00 / $260.00 / CN$299.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137467706

9781137467706

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS Building Bridges Among the BRICs

Business and Education in the Middle East

Edited by Robert Crane, Estonian Business School, Estonia All four authors of Building Bridges Among the BRICs take a close look at the national culture of their nations with their strengths and weaknesses for politics and business. They examine the origins of these cultures from the historical and geographical perspectives. Contents: 1. Brazil * 2. Russia * 3. India * 4. China December 2014 UK December 2014 US 216pp 23 figures, 10 b/w tables Hardback £67.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137375384

9781137375384

Business Ecosystems Constructs, Configurations, and the Nurturing Process Ke Rong, University of Bournemouth, UK, Yongjiang Shi, Institute for Manufacturing, University of Cambridge, UK Business Ecosystems examines business ecosystems in an emerging industry context whilst exploring four essential areas of business ecosystems: the business ecosystems’ key constructive elements, their typical patterns of the element configurations, the five phase process of their life cycle, and the nurturing strategies and processes from a firm perspective. Contents: 1. Introduction * PART I: BACKGROUND EXPLORATION OF BUSINESS ECOSYSTEM * 2. Industrial Challenges * 3. Literature Review * 4. Research Design * PART II: CASE OBERSAVATION OF BUSINESS ECOSYSTEMS * 5. Arm Nurtures The Business Ecosystem From The Beginning * 6. Intel Re-Enter The Mobile Computing Business Ecosystem * 7. MTK Enhances The Business Ecosystem Efficiency * PART III: THEORY CONSTRUCTION OF BUSINESS ECOSYSTEMS * 8. The Business Ecosystem Life Cycle And Its Phase Ending Status * 9. Business Ecosystem Constructive Elements * 10. Business Ecosystem Configuration Pattern * 11. Business Ecosystem Nurturing Process * 12. Conclusion And Discussion November 2014 UK November 2014 US 288pp 46 figures, 43 b/w tables Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137405906

9781137405906

Edited by Nehme Azoury, USEK School of Business, Lebanon Business and Education in the Middle East brings together academic and business expertise in order to come up with long-term strategies that will have a great effect on the university performance and governance. The book shares experiences and knowledge to explore innovative strategies and plans with a new perspective for the future. Contents: Introduction; Nehme Azoury * 1. The New Social Contract: The Business of Values; Ramsay Najjar * 2. The Next Digital Development in Education; Jonathan Michie * 3. A Business Outlook for the Arab Region; Adnan Kassar * 4. The Future of Learning in the World of Hospitality at Le Cordon Bleu; André Cointreau * 5. Winds of Business Change; Salma Hareb * 6. Business Challenges in Turbulent Lands: the Case of the Middle East and North Africa; Taeb Hafzi * 7. Impact of Technological Development on Businesses; Talal Abou Ghazaleh * 8. Education in the Middle East: Challenges and Opportunities; Sherif Kamel * 9. Education in the Globalized Era; Lindos Daou and Charbel El Khoury August 2014 UK August 2014 US 168pp 4 b/w tables, 3 figures Hardback £65.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137396945

9781137396945

Corporate Governance Practices in India Priyanka Kaushik Sharma, University of Delhi, India Corporate Governance Practices in India examines corporate governance practice in Indian industry. This book critically analyses the governance practice and evaluates the needs of corporate governance in the two major industries in India: Auto Industry and Heavy Engineering Industry. Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. Conceptual Framework Of Corporate Governance * 3. Codes And Standard On Corporate Governance * 4. Evaluation Of Corporate Governance Compliance * 5. Summary, Conclusions And Suggestions May 2015 UK May 2015 US 240pp Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137519351

9781137519351

Follow Palgrave Macmillan on Facebook®. ‘Like’ our Facebook® page to get the latest news, reviews and event invites.

for the latest news, events and competitions

www.facebook.com/PalgraveMacmillan

www.twitter.com/PalgraveBiz

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

@PalgraveBiz

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS Corporate Governance, Responsibility and Sustainability Initiatives in Emerging Economies Edited by Arindam Banik, Department of Economics, University of West Indies, Ananda Das Gupta, Indian Institute of Planatation Management, India, Pradip K. Bhaumik, International Management Institute, India Corporate Governance, Responsibility and Sustainability investigates various dimensions of corporate governance issues in key emerging economies such as China, India, Brazil, South Africa and Russia. The book explores a number of issues in the areas of corporate governance framework, market discipline and building an efficient, competitive market. Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. Corporate Governance and Corporate Social Responsibilities (CSR) in China; Hou Shuiping, Xie Chunling and Arindam Banik * 3. Corporate Governance in India; Pradip K. Bhaumik * 4. Corporate Governance in Brazil; Antonio Glenson de Carvalho, Humberto Gallucci Netto and Joelson de Oliveira Sampaio * 5. Corporate Governance in South Africa; Tirthankar Nag * 6. Corporate Governance on Russia; Nandita Mishra * 7. Corporate Governance and Corporate Social Responsibility and Indian Context; Ananda Das Gupta * 8. Social impact Management and Sustainability; Ananda Das Gupta * 9. Summary and Conclusions April 2015 UK April 2015 US 192pp 13 b/w tables, 8 figures Hardback £67.50 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137361844

9781137361844

Experiences of Emerging Economy Firms Edited by Marin Marinov, University of Gloucestershire, UK Experiences of Emerging Economy Firms investigates the different elements of the experiences of emerging economy firms and sheds essential light on a large variety of aspects associated with their functioning in both home and host contexts. Contents: 1. The Upsurge of firms from Emerging Economies; Marin Alexandrov Marinov * 2. Liability of Emergingness of Emerging Economy Multinational Firms in Developed Countries: A Conceptual Approach; Katrin Held and Nicola Berg * 3. Entry, Exist and Re-Entry Patterns of Chinese Multinational Firms: Survey Evindence; Tiia Vissak and Xiaotian Zhang * 4. Institutional Environment and Post-Entry Choices of Multinational Firms; Chang Liu, Zijie Li, Yi Li and Yuting Liang * 5. Transferring ‘Yellow River Capitalism’ to Africa; Connie Zheng * 6. Indian Multinational Firms in Developed Countries: A Case Study on Cultural Strategies; Roli Nigam and Zhan Su * 7. Reviewing Research of the Internationalisation of Brazilian Multinational Firms: An Analysis of the Period 2001-2012; Mario Enrique Ogasawara and Gilmar Masiero * 8. Multinational Corporations and Spillover Effects: A Study on the Effects of the Foreign Presence on the Innovative Capacity of Small and Medium-Sized Enterprises in Minas Gerais, Brazil; Cristina Lelis Leal Calegario, Nádia Campos Pereira Bruhn and Juciaria Nunes de Alcântara * 9. Learning from the Globalisation of an Emerging Economy Firms; Brian Li, Maya Kumar and Mary Ann Von Glinow * 10. Institutions and Diversification of International Markets: A Study of Clothing Manufacturers from Tanzania and Kenya; Deusdedit Rwehumbiza, Md. Noor Un Nabi and Ulz Dornberger April 2015 UK April 2015 US 224pp 7 figures, 27 b/w tables Hardback £67.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137472274

9781137472274

Global Enterprise Management, Volume I New Perspectives on Challenges and Future Developments Edited by Angelo A. Camillo, Woodbury School of Business, Woodbury University - Burbank, USA Global Enterprise Management unites theory, academic knowledge, and practitioner experience to provide students, educators, and practitioners with the skills to succeed in the global managerial landscape. Contents: 1. Firm’s Global Strategies and The Effect of Group Knowledge Environmental Variables on Decision Making Process; Angelo Camillo * 2. International and Comparative Human Resource Management; Andreas Kornelakis, Horen Voskeritsian * 3. Physical and Psychosocial Sources as Potential Predictors of Job Stress in the Workplace; Francesca Di Virgilio, Nicoletta Bova, Svetlana Holt * 4. The Confluence of Diversity and Ethics in Global Managerial Performance; Joan Marques * 5. A Dynamic Model for the Global Corporation: The Triad Networks – Coevolution – Competitiveness; Claudia Ogrean, Mihaela Herciu * 6. Is International Marketing Channel Strategy Adapted? An Australia Empirical Study; Ho Yin Wong * 7. Business Model Design and Innovation in the Process of Expansion and Growth of Global Enterprises; Oleksiy Osiyevskyy, M Amin Zargarzadeh * 8. The Glocalization of International Firms: An Empirical Investigation in the Hospitality Sector; Angelo Camillo, Manuela Presutti, Svetlana Holt * 9. Strategic Tax Issues Confronting Managers of Global Enterprises; John E. Karayan * 10. From Relationality, Behavioral Dynamics to Dynamic Relationality: A New Perspective on CrossCultural Negotiations; Junjun Cheng, Zhan Wu, Yong Su * 11. On the Support of the General Contractor’s Decisions in the Processes of Event Project Management; Pawel Błaszczyk, Tomasz Błaszczyk * 12. Liability of Country of Origin and Post Acquisition Strategies of Emerging Market MNCs in Advanced Economies; Huu Le Nguyen, Jorma Larimo May 2015 UK May 2015 US 356pp 15 tables, 19 figures Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137429582

Institutional Impacts on Firm Internationalization Edited by Svetla Marinova, Aalborg University, Denmark Institutional Impacts on Firm Internationalization addresses various aspects of the investigated phenomenon, providing an insight in the role of the varieties of capitalism on the globalization of business activities worldwide. Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. Convergence versus Divergence: Testing Varieties of Capitalism Perspective on the Globalization of Business Practices; Andrei Kuznetsov and Marcus Jacob * 3. Institutional Determinants of Outward Foreign Direct Investment from Emerging Economies: A Home Country Perspective; Mohamed Amal and Bruno Thiago Tomio * 4. Effects of Government Economic Policy on Outward Foreign Direct Investment: Experience from China and the EU1; Witold Wilinski and Xiaoxin Li * 5. Foreign Direct Investment Growth in China: Implications for Politics, the Economy and Culture; Attila Yaprak and Yingtao Xiao * 6. Should Governments Support Outward FDI?: The Case of Poland; Marian Gorynia, Jan Nowak, Piotr Trapczyński and Radosław Wolniak * 7. Innovation in Emerging Economies: The Spillover Effects of Foreign Direct Investment and Institutions in Russia; Natalya Smith and Ekaterina Thomas * 8. The Role of Home Governments in Outward Foreign Direct Investment; Svetla Marinova, John Child and Marin Marinov * 9. Structural Model of Institutional Environment Influence on International Entrepreneurship in Emerging Economies; Daria Volchek, Sami Saarenketo and Ari Jantunen * 10. The Effects of Country and Industry Factors on the Competitive Advantage of European Construction Firms Operating in Russia; Andrei Panibratov * 11. Understanding Failure in International Retailing: An Institutional Framework for Future Investigation; Alphonse Aklamanu December 2014 UK December 2014 US 376pp 26 figures, 40 b/w tables Hardback £77.00 / $120.00 / CN$138.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137446336

9781137429582

9781137446336

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS International Business and Political Economy

Location of International Business Activities

Victoria Miroshnik, Tokyo International University, Japan, Dipak Basu, Nagasaki University, Japan

Integrating Ideas from Research in International Business, Strategic Management and Economic Geography

International Business and Political Economy is divided up into three sections. The first deals with the problem of the World economy and the most important issues affecting the World economy. The second analyses problems mainly affecting the developed countries. The third analyses the issues in the developing countries particularly in the BRIC countries. Contents: 1. World Issues * 2. Issues in the Developed World * 3. Issues in the Developing World March 2015 UK March 2015 US 256pp 13 b/w tables, 15 figures Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137474858

9781137474858

Knowledge, Networks and Power The Uppsala School of International Business Edited by Ulf Holm, Uppsala University, Sweden, Mats Forsgren, Uppsala University, Sweden, Jan Johanson, Uppsala University, Sweden Knowledge, Networks and Power presents more than four decades of research in international business at the Department of Business Studies, Uppsala University. Gradually, this research has been recognized as ‘The Uppsala School’. The work in Uppsala over the years reflects a broad palette of issues and approaches. Contents: PART I: INTRODUCTION * Knowledge, Networks And Power – The Uppsala School Of International Business; * Mats Forsgren, Jan Johanson And Ulf Holm * PART II: THE INTERNATIONALIZATION PROCESS OF THE FIRM * 1. Experiential Knowledge And Cost In The Internationalization Process; * Eriksson K., Johanson J., Majkgård A. and Sharma D * 2. A Note On The Criticisms Against The Internationalization Process Model; * Hadjikhani A. * 3. The Concept Of Learning In The Uppsala Internationalization Process: A Critical Review; Forsgren, M. * 4. Internationalisation In Industrial Systems – A Network Approach; Johanson J. and Mattsson L.G. * 5. Business Networks And Cooperation In International Business Relationships; Blankenburg Holm, Eriksson and Johanson * 6. The Uppsala Internationalization Process Model Revisited: From Liability Of Foreignness To Liability Of Outsidership; Johanson J. and Vahlne J-E. * 7. Network Knowledge And Business-Relationship Value In The Foreign Market; Hohenthal J., Johanson J. and Johanson M. * 8. Division Headquarters Go Abroad – A Step In The Internationalization Of The Multinational-Corporation; Forsgren M., Holm U. And Johanson J. * PART III: THE MULTINATIONAL CORPORATION * 9. Headquarters Knowledge Of Subsidiary Network Contexts In The Multinational Corporation; Holm U., Johanson J. and Thilenius P. * 10. Rationality Vs Ignorance: The Role Of MNE Headquarters In Subsidiaries’ Innovation Processes; Ciabuschi F., Forsgren M. and Martin Martín O. * 11. Internal Embeddedness, Headquarters Involvement, And Innovation Importance In Multinational Enterprises; Ciabuschi F., Dellestrand H. and Martín Martin O. * 12. The Strategic Impact Of External Networks - Subsidiary Performance And Competence Development In The Multinational Corporation; Andersson U., Forsgren M., and Holm U. * 13. Competence Development Through Business Relationships Or Competitive Environment?: Subsidiary Impact On MNC Competitive Advantage; Holm U., Holmström C. and Sharma D. * 14. Cultural Distance Or Cultural Positions? Analysing The Effect Of Culture On The HQ-Subsidiary Relationship; Drogendijk, R. and Holm, U., International Business Review, (2012),pp. 383-396. * 15. Balancing Subsidiary Influence In The Federative MNC: A Business Network View; * Andersson A., Forsgren M. and Holm, U. * 16. Quo Vadis? The Entry Into New Technologies In Advanced Foreign Subsidiaries Of The Multinational Enterprise; Blomkvist K., Kappen P. and Zander I. * 17. Hymer’s Analysis Of The Multinational Organization: Power Retention And The Demise Of The Federative; MNE. Yamin, M. and Forsgren, M. May 2015 UK May 2015 US 416pp 27 figures, 37 b/w tables Hardback £77.00 / $120.00 / CN$138.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137508805

9781137508805

Edited by John Cantwell, Rutgers University, USA, Academy of International Business, Rutgers University, USA This collection brings together articles from the Journal of International Business Studies concerning Location and International Business activities. Contents: Introduction; John Cantwell * 1. MNEs as BorderCrossing Multi-Location Enterprises: The Role of Discontinuities in Geographic Space; Sioerd Beugelsdijk and Ram Mudambi * 2. Location and the Multinational Enterprise: a Neglected Factor?; John H. Dunning * 3. The Economic Geography of the Internet Age; Edward E. Leamer and Michael Storper * 4. International Entrepreneurship and Geographic Location: an Empirical Examination of New Venture Internationalization; Stephnmie A. Fernhaber, Btree Anitra Gilbert and Patricia P. McDougall * 5. Global Cities and Multinational Enterprise Location Strategy; Anthony Goerzen, Christian Geisler Asmussen and Bo Bernhard Nielsen * 6. The Hassal Factor: an Explanation for Managerial Locational Shunning; Andreas Schotter and Paul W. Beamish * 7. Regulatory Environments and the Location Decision: Evidence from the Early Foreign Market Entries of New-technology-based Firms; Régis Coruderoy and Gordon Murray * 8. Location and the Multinational Enterprise; John Cantwell November 2014 UK November 2014 US 296pp 27 b/w tables, 14 figures Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137472304

9781137472304

Making Markets More Inclusive Lessons from CARE and the Future of Sustainability in Agricultural Value Chain Development Kevin McKague, Ross School of Business, University of Michigan, USA, Muhammad Siddiquee, CARE Bangladesh “With insight and clarity, Making Markets More Inclusive brings to life the challenges, successes, and lessons learned from the complex but rewarding task of enhancing value chains for the benefit of smallholder farmers. Required reading for anyone interested in market-based approaches to development.” - Tamara Abed, Senior Director, Social Enterprises, Bangladesh Rural Advancement Committee Making Markets More Inclusive bridges the management literature with work on agricultural value chains in developing and emerging economies. Contents: PART I: MAKING VALUE CHAINS MORE INCLUSIVE * 1. Strengthening the Dairy Value Chain in Bangladesh * 2. Value Chain Development * 3. Value Chain Selection and Mapping * 4. Value Chain Intervention Strategies * PART II: FIVE KEY OBJECTIVES OF VALUE CHAIN DEVELOPMENT * 5. Productivity and Producer Groups * 6. Increasing Access to Inputs * 7. Increasing Access to Markets * 8. Strengthening Value Chain Relationships * 9. Improving the Enabling Environment * PART III: CROSS-CUTTING THEMES * 10. Gender * 11. Lead Firms * 12. Microfranchising * 13. Monitoring, Evaluation and Learning * 14. Scale * PART IV: THE FUTURE OF VALUE CHAIN DEVELOPMENT * 15. Moving Forward * Appendix: Quantitative and Qualitative Data Sources and Analysis July 2014 UK July 2014 US 264pp 27 b/w illustrations, 5 b/w tables, 18 figures, 14 illustrations Hardback £41.00 / $65.00 / CN$75.00 9781137382917 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137382917

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS Managing FDI for Development in ResourceRich States

Maritime Economics A Macroeconomic Approach

The Caribbean Experience

Elias Karakitsos, Global Economic Research, Lambros Varnavides, Royal Bank of Scotland

Lou Anne Barclay, Mona School of Business and Management, The University of the West Indies, Jamaica

Maritime Economics analyses shipping markets and their interdependence. This ground-breaking text develops a new macroeconomic approach to maritime economics and provides the reader with a more comprehensive understanding of the way modern shipping markets function.

Managing FDI for Development in Resource-Rice States is a timely study in light of the resurgence of resource nationalism that is currently occurring in several resource-rich, developing countries. It moves away from the traditional explanations for the disappointing economic performance of resource-rich, developing countries, notably those advanced by key researchers. Contents: Introduction * 1. The Importance of Institutional Efficiency to Resource-driven, FDI-facilitated Development * 2. Introducing the Resource-rich, Caribbean Countries * 3. The Aluminium Value Chain * 4. Upgrading in the Aluminium Value Chain and Resource-driven, FDIfacilitated Development * 5. The Changing Fortunes of a Strategic Industry: The Bauxite Industry of Jamaica * 6. Policy Fluctuations in the Resource Sector of a Small, Developing Country: The Case of the Bauxite Industry of Guyana * 7. Dependent Underdevelopment? The Aluminium MNEs and the Bauxite Industry of Suriname * 8. Embedded Autonomy and the Industrial Policy Process in the Twenty-first Century: Developing an Aluminium Industry in Trinidad and Tobago * 9. Resource-driven, FDI-facilitated development in CARICOM: Myth or Reality? * 10. Conclusion April 2015 UK April 2015 US 256pp 21 figures, 19 b/w tables Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137516084

9781137516084

Managing Organizations in the United Arab Emirates Dynamic Characteristics and Key Economic Developments Martin Spraggon, American University of Sharjah, UAE, Virginia Bodolica, American University of Sharjah, UAE “The United Arab Emirates (UAE) is one of the most dynamic and intriguing economies of the world. This book provides an excellent account of the underlying forces behind the UAE diversification strategy. The authors have done an excellent job capturing the UAE business environment in a compelling and fluent style. Those who are looking for a broad understanding of what it’s like to run a business in the UAE won’t be disappointed.” - Pedro Videla, Professor of Economics, IESE Business School, University of Navarra, Spain Managing Organizations in the United Arab Emirates seeks to familiarize readers with the nature of doing business and managing organizations in the Middle East by bringing together case studies on United Arab Emirate (UAE) organizations, one of the most dynamic and rapidly growing economies in the world. Contents: 1. Dynamic Characteristics of the UAE * 2. Managing Small Firms * Case 1: The Awakening of the ‘Sleeping Partner’ at U-Brad * Case 2: Future Internet: On a Continuous Path for Achieving a ‘Vision beyond Expectations’ * 3. Venturing in Entrepreneurial Undertakings * Case 3: In Search of Luxurious Slippers: The Birth of Edmini, An Entrepreneurial Venture in the UAE (A) * Case 4: In Search of Luxurious Slippers: The Attempted Launches of Edmini in the UAE (B) * 4. Addressing Family Business Challenges * Case 5: Succession Management Challenges: The Case of a Family Business in the UAE * Case 6: Zayed Al Hussaini Group: The Road Ahead for the Family Business in the UAE * 5. Future Developmental Prospects of the UAE July 2014 UK July 2014 US 220pp 9 tables, 4 figures Hardback £70.00 / $100.00 / CN$115.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137409195

9781137409195

Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. The Theoretical Foundations of the Freight Market * 3. The Shipyard, Scrap and Secondhand Markets * 4. The Efficiency of Shipping Markets * 5. Business Cycles * 6. The Theory of Shipping Cycles * 7. The Market Structure of Shipping and Ship Finance * 8. The Financialisation of Shipping Markets * 9. The Interaction of Business and Shipping Cycles in Practice * 10. Investment Strategy * Bibliography June 2014 UK June 2014 US 386pp 17 b/w tables, 53 figures, 7 illustrations Hardback £45.00 / $70.00 / CN$80.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137441171

9781137441171

Minimum Wages, Collective Bargaining and Economic Development in Asia and Europe A Labour Perspective Edited by Maarten van Klaveren, Amsterdam Institute for Advanced labour Studies, the Netherlands, Denis Gregory, Ruskin College, University of Oxford, UK, Thorsten Schulten, Wirtschafts- und Sozialwissenschaftliches Institut (WSI), Germany Minimum Wages, Collective Bargaining and Economic Development in Asia and Europe offers a labour perspective on wage-setting institutions, collective bargaining and economic development. Sixteen country chapters, eight on Asia and eight on Europe, focus in particular on the role and effectiveness of minimum wages in the context of national trends in income inequality, economic development, and social security. Contents: 1. Asia: A Comparative Perspective * 2. China * 3. Vietnam * 4. Korea * 5. Japan * 6. Pakistan * 7. India * 8. Indonesia * 9. Thailand * 10. Europe: A Comparative Perspective * 11. France * 12. Italy * 13. Germany * 14. The Netherlands * 15. The Nordic Countries * 16. Central And Eastern Europe * 17. The United Kingdom * 18. The Russian Federation * Statistical Appendix: Comparative Statistics May 2015 UK May 2015 US 384pp 36 b/w tables, 57 figures Hardback £80.00 / $120.00 / CN$138.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137512406

9781137512406

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS The Multinational Enterprise and the Emergence of the Global Factory

Transnational Corporations and Transnational Governance The Cost of Crossing borders in the Global Economy

Peter J. Buckley, University of Leeds, UK The Multinational Enterprise and the Emergence of the Global Factory brings together research papers authored by Peter J. Buckley, focusing on three of the most important empirical and theoretical issues in the global economy: the rise of the ‘global factory’; the growth of FDI from emerging economies; recent developments in the theory of IB.

Edited by Sarianna Lundan, University of Bremen, Germany Transnational Corporations and Transnational Governance examines the different kinds of distancerelated barriers related to cross-border investment. Different forms of governance, whether inside the firm or as part of its network of external relationships, have the aim of reducing uncertainty and creating a more predictable environment.

Contents: PART I: INTERNALISATION THEORY AND THE GLOBAL FACTORY * PART II: FDI FROM EMERGING COUNTRIES * PART III: SPATIAL AND INSTITUTIONAL ANALYSIS OF MNES * PART IV: POLICY ANALYSIS

November 2014 UK November 2014 US 424pp 31 figures, 43 b/w tables Hardback £75.00 / $120.00 / CN$138.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137402363

9781137402363

Contents: PART I: BEHAVIOURAL ASSUMPTIONS IN THE THEORY OF THE TNC* PART II: THE FOOTPRINT OF THE TNC: THE ROLE OF BORDERS AND DISTANCE * PART III: MANAGING CROSS-BORDER INTERDEPENDENCIES * PART IV: TNCS AS INSTITUTIONAL ENTREPRENEURS December 2014 UK December 2014 US 424pp 34 b/w tables, 13 figures Hardback £77.00 / $120.00 / CN$138.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137467676

9781137467676

The Rise of the New East Business Strategies for Success in a World of Increasing Complexity Ben Simpfendorfer, Founder and Managing Director of Silk Road Associates, Hong Kong “The Rise of the New East presents insightful and thought-provoking views of the business opportunities and challenges in the vast markets of Asia. The book provides compelling evidence, using fascinating and fun real-world stories from the author’s wide experience in Asia. Key reading for anyone who wants to understand the changing dynamics in the markets of the East.” - Frank Newman, former Deputy Secretary of the U.S. Treasury Department, former CEO of Bankers Trust, and former CEO of Shenzhen Development Bank, China Taking the reader on a tour of the fast changing East, Simpfendorfer urges the business world to respond by planning for the unexpected. Now that the East has secured its role as a powerful player on the world stage, The Rise of the New East provides simple business strategies for dealing with an increasingly complex global environment. Contents: 1. The Rise of the East’s Middle Class * 2. The End of “Made in China” * 3. Tapping into the Muslim Market * 4. Bollywood Stars and Indonesian Punk Rock * 5. China Goes Global, Again * 6. Small Trucks and Big Planes * 7. The East’s Uncertain Urban Future * 8. A Water and Energy Nexus * 9. Conclusion June 2014 UK June 2014 US 240pp Hardback £14.99 / $26.00 / CN$30.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137370051

International Business in Latin America Innovation, Geography and Internationalization Edited by William Newburry, Florida International University, USA, Maria Alejandra Gonzalez-Perez, Universidad EAFIT, Colombia This volume in the Academy of International Business Latin America Chapter (AIB-LAT) series presents research findings and theoretical developments in international business, with special emphasis on innovation, geography and internationalization in Latin America. Contributions are based on the best papers from the fourth annual AIB-LAT conference. Contents: 1. International Business in Latin America, and Latin Americans in International Business: Insights from AIB-LAT * 2. Doing Research and Publishing on Latin America * 3. Local Business and International Business: Innovation as a Key Component of the International Strategy of Colombian Firms * 4. International Entrepreneurship in Latin America: Lessons from Theory and Practice * 5. Migrant Transnational Entrepreneurship in Colombia * 6. Entrepreneurs’ Responses to Crime-entrepreneurs in Mexico * 7. Cultural Heritage, Institutional Entrepreneurship, and Latin American SME Multinationalization: A Comparative Analysis of Peruvian Diaspora and Repatriate Gastronomy * 8. Internationalization of Video Game Studios from Emerging Markets: A Colombian Case Study * 9. Strategic Positioning and Characteristics of Domestic and International Firms: A Study in the Brazilian Software Industry * 10. The Development of Absorptive Capacity in Brazilian and Foreign Franchise Networks: A Multimethod Study

AIB Latin America February 2015 UK February 2015 US 224pp 13 figures, 25 b/w tables Hardback £75.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137409102

9781137409102

9781137370051

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS Multinationals in Latin America

Humanistic Perspectives on International Business and Management

Case Studies Edited by Leonardo Liberman, Universidad de los Andes, Chile, Sergio Garcilazo, Universidad Panamericana, Mexico, Eva Stal, Faculdades Metropolitanas Unidas (FMU), Brazil

Edited by Nathaniel Lupton, Fordham University, USA, Michael Pirson, Graduate School of Business, Fordham University, New York, USA

Multinationals in Latin America deals with cases about the impact of, and interaction between, the different Latin American cultural, economic, legal, and political settings on activities, strategies, structures and decision-making processes of MNCs. The cases focus on business processes, settings and organizational behavior in Latin America.

In Humanistic Perspectives on International Business and Management, the authors provide space to global perspectives on how we can rethink and reposition international business and management practice to be a part of the solution to our global problems. These contributions provide impetus for further research, practice and pedagogy development.

Contents: Case 1: Analyzing the Business Opportunity to Internationalize in an Emerging Economy * Case 2: Beauty Competition in Central America: Zermat v. Avon * Case 3: TOTVS Frachises in Latin America: Innovation and Internationalization * Case 4: Braskem: The Creation of a Global-Scale Petrochemical Company * Case 5: Resolving Disputes in Different Cultures: The Diplomatic Way * Case 6: A Chef’s Dream * Case 7: Hospital Pablo Uribe: Soulful Health Care Services from Colombia to the World * Teaching Notes * TN Case 1 * TN Case 2 * TN Case 3 * TN Case 4 * TN Case 5 * TN Case 6 * TN Case 7 * TN Case 8

AIB Latin America December 2014 UK December 2014 US 232pp 17 b/w tables, 35 figures Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137024091

9781137024091

The Rise of Multinationals from Emerging Economies Achieving a New Balance Edited by Palitha Konara, University of Huddersfield, UK, Yoo Jung Ha, The York Management School, University of York, UK, Frank McDonald, University of Liverpool School of Management, UK, Yingqi Wei, Leeds University Business School, UK The 41st Annual Conference of the Academy of International Business UK and Ireland Chapter was held at The University of York in April 2014. This book contains records of keynote speeches and special session on key topics, as well as selection of some of the best papers presented at the conference. Contents: Introduction: The Rise of Multinationals from Emerging Economies: Achieving a New Balance * PART I: KEYNOTES AND PANEL SESSIONS * Part I: Keynotes and Panel Sessions * 1. Keynotes * 2. Implications for International Business of Separatist Movements: The Case of Scottish Independence * 3. Geography and History Matter: A Record of the Panel Session on International Business and Economic Geography Perspectives on the Spatial and Historical Development of Multinational Enterprises * PART II: RISE OF EMNES * 4. Institutions and Investments by Emerging Economy Multinationals in Developed Economies: Solar PV Firms and the Role of Political Authorities in Germany * 5. Neither Western not Indian: HRM Policy in an Indian Multinational * 6. Against All Odds! A Strategic Analysis of the Failures of Three State-owned Firms * PART III: DMNES PERFORMANCE/SURVIVAL IN EMERGING ECONOMIES * 7. Subsidiary Survival of Multinational Enterprises in China: An Analysis of Nordic firms * 8. Control Position Strategy, Cultural Distance, Conflict Resolution Strategies and Performance of International Joint Ventures * 9. Determinants of Foreign Firms’ Collective Action in Emerging Economies: Evidence from India * PART IV: COMING IN AND GOING OUT: DYNAMIC INTERACTION BETWEEN FOREIGN AND LOCAL FIRMS * 10. Human Capital and Conflict Management in the Entrepreneur-Venture Capitalist Relationship: The Entrepreneurs’ Perspective * 11. International Joint Ventures and Dynamic Co-learning between MNEs and Local Firms * 12. Industry Factors Influencing International New Ventures’ Internationalisation Processes * 13. Do Foreign Ownership Modes Matter for FDI Spillovers?

Academy of International Business (UKI) Series March 2015 UK March 2015 US 320pp 22 figures, 22 b/w tables Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$132.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137473103

9781137473103

Humanism in Business Series October 2014 UK October 2014 US 304pp 11 b/w tables, 12 figures Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137471611

9781137471611

Globalization and the Inequality Trap An Ethnography of Philippine Capitalism Mari Iizuka, Doshisha Business School, Doshisha University, Japan Does globalization mean the continued spread of inequality in societies around the world? Kondo’s vivid before-and-after portrait of the ‘inequality trap’ capitalism at a traditional Philippine corporation as it is taken over by a major multinational, shows that while globalization liberates at one level, it may itself become the trap at another. Contents: PART I: THE PHILIPPINE PUZZLE * 1. Introduction * 2. From Inequality Trap Capitalism to Migration Trap Capitalism * 3. A Worker in the Trap: From Father to Son * 4. Formal Structure - The Surface * PART II: MANAGING IN THE TRAP * 5. Informal Structure – The Reality * 6. Counter-forces against Inequality: The Union and Guerrillas * PART III: THE GLOBALIZATION PARADOX * 7. The MNC as Liberator * 8. Globalization: From One Trap to Another?

The Palgrave Macmillan Asian Business Series February 2015 UK February 2015 US 256pp 9 b/w tables, 14 figures Hardback £70.00 / $115.00 / CN$132.00 Canadian Rights www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9780230358560

9780230358560

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS The New Chinese Traveler

South Africa’s BPO Service Advantage

Business Opportunities from the Chinese Travel Revolution

Becoming Strategic in the Global Marketplace

Gary Bowerman, Scribes of the Orient Ltd, Asia-based ‘Gary Bowerman offers a wide range of insightful snapshots illustrating the multi-faceted reality of China’s outbound tourism, which has already changed the rules of global tourism and will continue to do so in the coming years.’ -Prof. Dr. Wolfgang Georg Arlt, Director, China Outbound Tourism Research Institute (COTRI) ‘Every tourism board in the world must court the Chinese tourist dollar in the coming years. Bowerman explains why in stunning fashion.’ -Sam Chambers, Editor, Asia Cruise News The New Chinese Traveler explains the emerging trends and developments of Chinese outbound travel, alongside the motivations, desires and expectations of Chinese travelers themselves. Packed with interviews, this book will help businesses create products and services that meet the rapidly evolving and diversifying requirements of techsavvy Chinese travelers. Contents: 1. Beyond the Middle Kingdom: The Makings of a Travel Revolution * 2. Building A Brand New Industry: From ADS to the New Tourism Law * 3. Going Global: China’s New Travel Class Spreads its Wings * 4. Magnetised by Macau: Creating a Global Tourism Phenomenon * 5. The Purchasing Prerogative: Hong Kong and Shopping Tourism * 6. Sun, Sea & Shopping: China Goes to the Beach * 7. Lights, Camera, Action: Chinese Tourism on TV and Film * 8. All Around the World: Tourism Marketers Target China * 9. A Place to Stay: Checking in With Chinese Travellers * 10. Taking Flight: China’s Aviation Revolution *and more....

Palgrave Pocket Consultants September 2014 UK September 2014 US 256pp 4 figures Paperback £14.99 / $24.00 / CN$27.50 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137397287

9781137397287

Since 2007, South Africa has been one of the world’s upcoming Business Process Outsourcing (BPO) offshore destinations. This book is based on the authors’ most recent research into high performance BPO globally and new research streams specifically on South Africa. Contents: 1.The Global BPO Market: South Africa In Context * 2. Country Attractiveness – International Comparisons * 3. South Africa BPO: Performance and Prospects 2011-2018 * 4. In Their Own Words * 5. South Africa BPO Case Studies: An Overview * 6. Case One: British Gas Selects WNS South Africa for Call Centre Services * 7. Case Two: From Down Under To Over Yonder - iiNet and Merchants * 8. Cases Three and Four : Launch Pads and Landing Strips - Full Circle Navigates Two Newcomers to South Africa’s BPO Industry * 9. Case Five: Talk Talk and CCI Transform a Supplier Into a Partner * 10. Case Six: Radiant Law Rethinks Legal Services * 11. Case Seven: The Value of South Africa’s Shared Services * 12. Lessons And Conclusions * Appendix A * Appendix B

Technology, Work and Globalization February 2015 UK February 2015 US 224pp 8 b/w tables, 15 figures Hardback £70.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137474049

9781137474049

Global Business Transcendence International Perspectives Across Developed and Emerging Economies Edited by Anshu Arora, Savannah State University, USA, John R. McIntyre, Georgia Institute of Technology, USA

Determinants of FDI Flows within Emerging Economies A Case Study of Poland Arkadiusz Mironko, Executive Director for Graduate Programs at the Anderson Graduate School of Management at the University of California, Riverside, USA This study provides a detailed examination of foreign direct investment (FDI) in Poland and explores the impact this has on foreign investment policy. It analyzes and identifies location patterns of FDI and strives to determine the supporting motives behind location choices of foreign companies. Contents: 1. Location Choice and Clustering of Foreign Subsidiaries on the Economic Sustainability and Competitiveness of the Host Regions * 2. Heterogeneity of Economic Space: Introduction of the Problem * 3. Local Strengths and Foreign Firms’ Location Choice: the Research Design, Data and Methodology * 4. Concentration of Foreign Firms in Poland based on Industrial Specialization and Country of Origin Criteria: the Results and Summary of the Evidence * 5. The Results of the Analysis of Location Choices by Industry Leading Firms Investing in Poland on the Location Choices of Small and Medium Size Foreign Investors * 6. Final Analysis of FDI Patterns Across Regions in Poland and Policy Recommendations * 7. Afterword * 8. Appendices * 9. Bibliography

Studies in Economic Transition May 2014 UK May 2014 US 326pp 54 b/w tables, 3 figures Hardback £70.00 / $115.00 / CN$132.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137372154

Leslie P. Willcocks, London School of Economics, London, UK, Mary C. Lacity, University of Missouri, St. Louis, USA, Andrew Craig, Independent, UK

Global Business Transcendence argues that country’s borders are becoming less important from a trade perspective. We are thus quickly approaching a single global economy. Contents: Global Business Transcendence: In Search of Paradigmatic Breakthrough and Policy-Relevance; John R. McIntyre * 1. Domestic Violence in College Students: The Effects of Male Dominance and Substance Abuse; Vida Marshall and Suman Niranjan * 2. Role of Institutions in Economic Transition: Case of Russia; Andrey Yukhanaev, Satish Sharma, and Anatoly Borodin * 3. Organizations and Markets: Entrepreneurship and Capital Delivery Mechanisms in Developing Countries; David A. Bell * 4. China and India - Can they support the shift in the Global Automobile Industry?; Mahesh Raisinghani, Anshu Saxena Arora, Reginald Leseane, Jun Wu and Jackie Meeks * 5. Association Between Sourcing Issues and Logistics Performance Variables in Apparel Exports: An Empirical Analysis of Sourcing Intermediaries; Anupama Gupta and Pinaki Dasgupta * 6. Comparative Study of Indian and German Food Supply Chain: A Case Study of Tomato Supply Chain; Rajneesh Mahajan, Ludwig Theuvsen, Suresh Garg, and P. B. Sharma * 7. Employability Skills For Engineering Graduates in Software Products and Services’ Companies: An Empirical Analysis; R. Chithra and M. Banumati

International Marketing and Management Research April 2014 UK April 2014 US 160pp 9 figures, 15 b/w tables Hardback £45.00 / $67.50 / CN$78.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137412584

9781137412584

9781137372154

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS Middle Eastern and African Perspectives on the Development of Public Relations

Prospects and Challenges of Free Trade Agreements

Other Voices

Unlocking Business Opportunities in Gulf Co-Operation Council (GCC) Markets

Edited by Tom Watson, Bournemouth Media School, UK The National Perspectives on the Development of Public Relations: Other Voices series is the first to offer an authentic world-wide view of the history of public relations. It will feature six books, five of which will cover continental and regional groups. This third book in the series focuses on the Middle East and Africa. Contents: Introduction; Tom Watson * 1. The Arabian States of the Gulf; Badran A. Badran * 2. Botswana, Zambia and Zimbabwe; Ray Mawerera * 3. Egypt; Khayrat Ayyad and Ahmed Farouk * 4. Israel; Clila Magen * 5. Kenya; Dane Kiambi * 6. The Kingdom of Saudi Arabia; Nawaf Abdelhay-Altamimi * 7. Nigeria; Ismail Adegboyega Ibraheem * 8. South Africa; Chris Skinner and Dalien Rene Benecke * 9. Turkey; Melike Aktaş Yamanoğlu, B. Pınar Özdemir and G. Senem Gençtürk Hızal * 10. Uganda; Barbra Natifu

Doren Chadee, Deakin University, Australia, Banjo Roxas, Deakin University, Australia, Tim Rogmans, Zayed University, UAE Prospects and Challenges of Free Trade Agreements assesses the effectiveness of free trade agreements (FTAs) in unlocking international business opportunities in member states of the Gulf Cooperation Council (GCC). It takes an institutional perspective in explaining the existence and effects of non-tariff barriers and how FTAs can address these barriers to attract foreign investors. Contents: 1. Background And Context Of The Study * 2. The Political Economy Of Free Trade * 3. GCC Market Scope And Competitiveness * 4. GCC-Australian Trade And Investment Trends And Patterns * 5. Challenges And Opportunities For Australian Businesses In GCC * 6. Australian-GCC FTA: International Business Prospects And Limitations

National Perspectives on the Development of Public Relations November 2014 UK November 2014 US 146pp Hardback £45.00 / $67.50 / CN$78.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137404275

9781137404275

Latin American and Caribbean Perspectives on the Development of Public Relations Other Voices Edited by Tom Watson, Bournemouth Media School, UK The National Perspectives on the Development of Public Relations: Other Voices series is the first to offer an authentic world-wide view of the history of public relations. It will feature six books, five of which will cover continental and regional groups. This book in the series focuses on Latin America and the Caribbean. Contents: 1. Introduction; Tom Watson * 2. Argentina; Carolina Andrea Carbone and Manuel Montaner Rodríguez * 3. Brazil; Paulo Nassar, Luiz-Alberto de Farias and Mateus Furlanetto * 4. The Caribbean; Carroll Edwards * 5. Central America; Carmen Mayela Fallas * 6. Colombia; Luis Horacio Botero Montoya, María Alejandra Jiménez Ospina and Nora Elena Botero Escobar * 7. Mexico; Jorge Alberto Hidalgo Toledo and Carlos Bonilla Gutiérrez * 8. Peru; Amybel Sánchez de Walther

National Perspectives on the Development of Public Relations December 2014 UK December 2014 US 116pp Hardback £45.00 / $67.50 / CN$78.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137404305

9781137404305

November 2014 UK November 2014 US 152pp 33 b/w tables, 13 figures Hardback £45.00 / $67.50 / CN$78.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137479860

9781137479860

Journal of International Business Studies John Cantwell, Rutgers University, USA The Journal of International Business Studies publishes papers that contribute to the theoretical basis of business and management studies. The Journal’s broad scope and developmental editorial policies create accessible, thought-provoking content for the general academic business community.

ISSN: 472506 / EISSN:14786990 For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/jibs

IT FOR BUSINESS IT FOR BUSINESS

Predictive Analytics, Data Mining and Big Data Myths, Misconceptions and Methods Steven Finlay, HML, UK ‘A welcome addition to the literature on data driven decision making. Finlay’s book gives a commendably non-technical discussion of the business issues associated with embedding analytics into an organisation and how data, big and small, can be used to support better decision making. It is peppered with case studies from the author’s experience and is a great source of insight for technicians and business people alike.’ -Paul Russell, Director of Analytics, Experian UK&I ‘A fully immersive introduction to the world of predictive analytics and its application to Big (and small) Data. Full of interesting stories and case studies, it provides a fascinating real world perspective of these technologies and how best to apply them. A must read for managers and data scientists alike.’ -Ioannis Stamatopoulos, Director for Moody’s Enterprise Risk Solutions and Services, RiskMatrix

Journal of Information Technology Teaching Cases Leslie Willcocks, The London School of Economics and Political Science, UK, Chris Sauer, University of Oxford, UK Featuring current, peer-reviewed case materials, Journal of Information Technology Teaching Cases is an essential resource for academics, scholars and instructors who want real examples on which to base teaching on contemporary information and communications technology themes. It is included with subscription to Journal of Information Technology.

EISSN: 20438869 For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/jittc

This in-depth guide provides managers with a solid understanding of data and data trends, the opportunities that it can offer to businesses, and the dangers of these technologies. Written in an accessible style, Steven Finlay provides a contextual roadmap for developing solutions that deliver benefits to organizations. Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. Using Predictive Models * 3. Analytics, Organization and Culture * 4. The Value of Data * 5. Ethics and Legislation * 6. Types of Predictive Models * 7. The Predictive Analytics Process * 8. How to Build a Predictive Model * 9. Text Mining and Social Network Analysis * 10. Hardware, Software and All That Jazz

Business in the Digital Economy July 2014 UK July 2014 US 260pp 9 b/w tables, 23 figures Hardback £29.99 / $45.00 / CN$52.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137379276

Follow Palgrave Macmillan on Facebook®. ‘Like’ our Facebook® page to get the latest news, reviews and event invites.

for the latest news, events and competitions

www.facebook.com/PalgraveMacmillan

www.twitter.com/PalgraveBiz

@PalgraveBiz

9781137379276

Journal of Information Technology Leslie Willcocks, London School of Economics and Political Science, UK, Chris Sauer, Green Templeton College, University of Oxford, UK Journal of Information Technology publishes highquality research, critical reviews and opinions on the organisational, social and management issues associated with significant information-based technologies. It is read by academics, advanced students, reflective practitioners, and those seeking an update on current experience and future prospects.

ISSN: 2683962 / EISSN:14664437 For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/jit

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

MANAGEMENT AND LEADERSHIP Business Feel

MANAGEMENT AND LEADERSHIP

Leading Paradigm Shifts in Organisations

Another State of Mind

2nd edition

Perspectives from Wisdom Traditions on Management and Business Edited by Robert J. Blomme, Nyenrode Business Universiteit, the Netherlands, Bertine van Hoof, Nyenrode Business University, the Netherlands ‘Without being religious, Another State of Mind brings together practices, principles and perspectives from various philosophical, spiritual and religious traditions and connects them meaningfully to muchneeded wisdom in doing business in the complex twenty-first century world. This book is a great contribution to the wisdom literature.’ – Prasad Kaipa, author of the international bestseller From Smart to Wise By returning to the source and the source texts, this book deepens the understanding of certain important ideas and notions which affect our present thinking. In Another State of Mind, the authors go back in history to answer the question: How can one act wisely in the spirit of the present age? Contents: PART I: INTRODUCTION * PART II: WITH THE RIGHT STATE OF MIND * PART III: LEADERSHIP FROM WITHIN * PART IV: ENGAGEMENT AND INNOVATION * PART V: CREATING THE RIGHT CONDITIONS: COMMUNITY, LEARNING AND DEVELOPMENT * PART VI: CROSS CULTURAL PERSPECTIVES ON MANAGEMENT * PART VII: FINAL THOUGHTS December 2014 UK December 2014 US 384pp 18 figures, 2 b/w tables Hardback £77.00 / $120.00 / CN$138.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137425805

9781137425805

Steven Segal, Macquarie Graduate School of Management, Australia Through the use of examples of eminent CEOs, Business Feel outlines a variety of skills involved in the development of business feel. This new edition builds upon the ideas explored by the author in Business Feels (2004), featuring new material on leadership development and philosophy. Contents: Introduction: Business Feel and Leadership Philosophy * 1 Leaders as Philosophers * 2. Models for Questioning While Leading * 3. Why Philosophy in Leadership Studies? * 4. Leadership Philosophy in the Context of the Tradition of Philosophy * 5. Authenticity in the Philosophies of Jack Welch and Martin Heidegger * 6. The Role of Frustration in Developing Leadership Vision * 7. From Intuition through Doubt to Vision in Jack Welch and Martin Heidegger * 8. Fear and Existential Anxiety as the Basis of Vision at Intel * 9. The Practical Basis for Developing a Philosophy of Leadership * 10. Stress as the Basis for Leadership Philosophy * 11. Philosophical Journeys of Leaders October 2014 UK October 2014 US 168pp 29 b/w illustrations Hardback £67.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9780230242791

9780230242791

Changing Employee Behavior A Practical Guide for Managers Nik Kinley, YSC Ltd, UK, Shlomo Ben-Hur, IMD, Switzerland

Building High-Performance, High-Trust Organizations Decentralization 2.0 Gerrit Broekstra, Nyenrode Business University, the Netherlands Some vanguard companies have evolved to a higher level of decentralization originating in the enabling-and-autonomy paradigm. A new kind of deep leadership is practiced by these spirit-driven organizations. This book brings together theory and case studies to cover historical origins and developments of both types of decentralization. Contents: Prologue * 1. Complexity is a Consequence of Living in a Sandpile World * 2. Only Variety Absorbs Complexity * 3. Top-down Decentralization and the Folly of Power * First Story: The Pennsylvania Railroad Company * 4. Going Against the Grain: Aborted Bottom-up Decentralization * Second Story: The Durham Coal Miners * 5. Common-sense Decentralization by Working with Human Nature Not Against It * Third Story: Svenska Handelsbanken * 6. Deep Leadership Creates the Social Glue Keeping High-variety Organizations Together * Epilogue July 2014 UK July 2014 US 232pp 4 figures, 3 b/w tables Hardback £70.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137414700

9781137414700

An accessible and comprehensive toolkit for change that managers can use to drive and improve the performance of their staff. Contents: 1. How to Help Change Happen * 2. Four Ways to Think About Change * 3. Intrinsic Motivation: The Science of Commitment * 4. Extrinsic Motivation: Using Rewards and Punishment * 5. Ability * 6. Psychological Capital: Believing you can Succeed * 7. Psychological Capital: Will Power and Resilience * 8. How to Build, Break and Change Habits * 9. Gamification * 10. Nudging * 11. Becoming an Architect of Change * Appendix 1: Key Questions to Ask Yourself * Appendix 2: MAPS Profiler Tool * Appendix 3: MAPS Profiler Graph March 2015 UK April 2015 US 224pp 22 figures Hardback £22.99 / $35.00 / CN$40.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137449542

9781137449542

MANAGEMENT AND LEADERSHIP Destined to Lead

The Development of Managerial Culture

Executive Coaching and Lessons for Leadership Development

A Comparative Study of Australia and Canada

Karol M. Wasylyshyn, Leadership Development Forum, USA “With Destined to Lead, Karol Wasylyshyn turns the rainbow of art/science/theory/practice into a laser of insight and wonder. A seminal work!” Frank Smith, Former Vice President of Organization Development, Revlon “Wasylyshyn, a true master in the field of executive development and an exquisite story-teller, takes us into actual coaching cases that reveal her stunning originality, humanity, and profound skill in accelerating the success of top business leaders. A must-read for any leader — and those who aspire to get there. I wouldn’t be where I am without her.” Pierre Brondeau, Chairman and CEO, FMC In a field that’s crowded with how-to coaching books and academic tomes on organization/leadership behavior, Destined to Lead breaks away from the crowd with its specificity and candor on how real cases unfolded in the hands in one of the world’s most respected pioneers of executive coaching. Contents: 1. The Relentless Champion * 2. Destined to Lead * 3. The Recovering Perfectionist * 4. The Duality Within * 5. The Demon Slayer: Conquering a Dark Side of Difference * 6. A Mid-Life Reinvention * 7. Fighting the Force of Old Habits * 8. The Reluctant President * 9. The Reluctant President Revisited * 10. On Making the Transition from Executive Coach to Trusted Advisor * 11 . The Case Studies: A Comparison of Client/Trusted Advisor Perspectives * Coda: As to the Future.... September 2014 UK August 2014 US 288pp 31 Illustrations Hardback £24.99 / $45.00 / CN$52.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137357762

9781137357762

Developing Christian Servant Leadership Faith-based Character Growth at Work Gary E. Roberts, Regent University, USA Developing Christian Servant Leadership provides a Christian faith-based perspective on servant leader character development in the workplace and argues that leadership requires passionate and authentic biblical integration. Contents: 1. Definition of Christian Servant Leader Character * 2. Servant Followership *3. Building Servant Leader Character * 4. Spiritual Disciplines * 5. Faith * 6. Spiritual Virtues * 7. God’s Definition of Success * 8. Building Workplaces of Integrity * 9. Overcoming Life Obstacles * 10. Pride *11. Overcoming Strongholds * 12. Courage and Overcoming Fear * 13. Workplace Apologetics * 14. Prayers: Overcoming Doubts * 15. Prayers: Overcoming Fear and Anxiety * 16. Prayers: Overcoming Adversity * 17. Reflections on Servant Leader Character, Moving into the Future April 2015 UK April 2015 US 256pp Hardback £70.00 / $110.00 / CN$127.00 Canadian Rights www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137489630

9781137489630

Arthur J. Wolak, CMI Chat Media, Inc, Canada The Development of Managerial Culture examines the differences in underlying values and cultural distinctions in managerial cultures in Australia and Canada.It offers commentary on differences in attitudes to managerial culture and industrial relations through a comparison of national character development to provide context and insight for readers Contents: Introduction * 1. Culture and Values * 2. National Character * 3. Class and Identity * 4. Australia’s Irish Factor * 5. Australian vs Canadian Managerial Styles * 6. Labor Power * 7. Australian and Canadian Managerial Culture: A Summary

November 2014 UK November 2014 US 336pp 1 figure, 7 b/w tables Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$132.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137475619

9781137475619

Doing More with Less 2nd edition Measuring, Analyzing and Improving Performance in the Not-ForProfit and Government Sectors 2nd edition Bernard Marr, Advanced Performance Institute, James Creelman ‘An intriguing book...Someone should give George Osborne a copy.’ - Allister Heath, City A.M “This book is a great piece of work which is right for our times. It is an excellent guide for everyone involved in strategy development and delivery in the new era of financial constraints.” -Robert W. Black, First Auditor General For Scotland (2000-2012) “This is an excellent reference for those in the public sector who are responsible for good performance management. As a consumer of public sector services, I will be the ultimate beneficiary of this work.” -Dr David P. Norton, Co-Developer of the Balanced Scorecard; Director, Palladium Group Written in an accessible and practical style, Doing More With Less 2nd edition addresses the efficiency drive using models, tools, and ideas more commonly found in the corporate world. This fully updated edition also includes case studies from Audit Scotland, Belfast City Council, FBI, NHS, Ministry of Works (Bahrain), and many more. Contents: Introduction * 1. Both Efficient And Effective, The New Public Sector Performance Agenda * 2. Balanced Scorecards, The Journey From Measurement To Strategic Performance Management * 3. Using Lean Thinking To Improve Strategic Performance * 4. Designing Strategy Maps To Agree Strategic Priorities * 5. Agreeing High Level Strategic Outcome Targets And Key Performance Indicators * 6. Selecting Strategic Initiatives: * 7. Aligning Financial Management With Strategic Goals * 8. Keeping Your Eyes On The Ball: Reporting And Reviewing Performance * 9. Building A Culture Focused On Strategic Performance Management * Conclusion And Key Strategic Performance Questions October 2014 UK November 2014 US 272pp 61 figures Hardback £29.99 / $45.00 / CN$52.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137437792

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

9781137437792

MANAGEMENT AND LEADERSHIP Dynamic Systems Modelling and Optimal Control

Gender, Authenticity and Leadership

Applications in Management Science: Volume 2

Rita Gardiner, The University of Western Ontario, Canada

Dipak Basu, Nagasaki University, Japan, Victoria Miroshnik, Tokyo International University, Japan

Gender, Authenticity and Leadership examines the conceptual underpinnings of authentic leadership to discover why so little attention has been paid to gender. The author explores the failure to interrogate the complexities surrounding the concept of authenticity, especially as it relates to the diversity of lived experience.

Dynamic Systems Modelling and Optimal Control explores the applications of oil field development, energy system modelling, resource modelling, time varying control of dynamic system of national economy, and investment planning. Contents: Introduction * 1. Optimal Control of Dynamic Systems * 2. Optimal Planning with Exhaustible Resource * 3. Management of Oil Field Development * 4. Control of Energy System * 5. Control System for Investment Planning * 6. National Economic Management with Stochastic Optimal Control: Simulations Over History * 7. Anticipations and Time Varying Modeling in Adaptive Control System * 8. Dynamics of Information and Resource Management * Conclusion April 2015 UK April 2015 US 176pp 32 b/w tables, 30 figures Hardback £70.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137508935

Thinking with Arendt

Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. Authentic Leadership * 3. Gendered Expectations * 4. Enlightened Virtue * 5. Authenticity, Ethics and Leadership * 6. Troubling Method * 7. Telling Tales Out of School * 8. Themes * 9. Concluding Remarks February 2015 UK February 2015 US 208pp 2 figures, 1 b/w table Hardback £70.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137460431

9781137460431

9781137508935

The Global Future of Higher Education and the Academic Profession

Now available in paperback

Gandhi and Leadership

The BRICs and the United States

New Horizons in Exemplary Leadership

Edited by Philip G. Altbach, Boston College, USA, Gregory Androushchak, Higher School of Economics, Russia, Yaroslav Kuzminov, Higher School of Economics, Russia, Maria Yudkevich, National Research University Higher School of Economics, Russia, Liz Reisberg, Reisberg & Associates, USA “Policymakers and ... those interested in global issues in higher education, including scholars in international and comparative higher education, will find a wealth of interesting facts and comparisons in this volume.” - Higher Education

Satinder Dhiman, School of Business, Woodbury University, USA ‘Here, in this truly defining book, ‘The Mahatma’s’ teachings once again come alive–this time to inspire the very best in our 21st century leaders. Skillfully weaving together history, biography, and anecdotes, Dr. Dhiman offers practical steps and advice for applying the spiritual and moral principles that brilliantly defined Gandhi’s leadership. In a global marketplace too often plagued by greed, corruption, and arrogance, this book offers a much needed vision of business leadership based on steadfast truth, non-violence, humility, and selfless service. I sincerely hope that the wisdom offered in this unique book will be widely embraced by leaders throughout the world.’ - Michael Carroll, COO, Global Coaching Alliance, and author of The Mindful Leader (2007) In Gandhi and Leadership, Professor Dhiman explores the moral and spiritual philosophical foundations and context of Gandhi’s approach to leadership. The book focuses on seven Gandhian values that are most relevant in the contemporary workplace. Contents: 1. Prolegomena: A Foreword by Arun Gandhi * 2. Gandhi: One-man Boundary Force * 3. Hero’s Life Journey: Defining Moments of Life and Leadership * 4. Gandhi’s Heroes: Landmarks on a Hero’s Journey * 5. Bhagavad Gītā: Gandhi’s Moral and Spiritual Anchorage * 6. Gandhi: A Value-Based Leader Par Excellence * 7. Non-Violence: A Matchless Weapon * 8. Satyāgraha: An Higher Approach to Ethics * 9. Self-Discipline: The Making of an Exemplary Leader * 10. Seven Deadly Sins of Humanity: Overcoming Inner Demons * 11. Epilogue: Summing Up the Legacy of the Mahatma June 2015 UK June 2015 US 288pp 1 Illustration Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$127.00 Canadian Rights www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137492333

9781137492333

Now in paperback, this is the first book to critically analyze the future of higher education systems in the four BRIC countries - Brazil, Russia, India and China - and the USA, analyzing academic salaries, contracts and working conditions and how national policy will affect the academic profession in each context. Contents: 1. The Prospects for the BRICs: The New Academic Superpowers?; P. Altbach * 2. Higher Education, the Academic Profession, and Economic Development in Brazil; S. Schwartzman * 3. Changing Realities: Russian Higher Education and the Academic Profession; G. Androushchak, Y. Kuzminov & M. Yudkevich * 4. India: Streamlining the Academic Profession for a Knowledge Economy; N. Jayaram * 5. The Chinese Academic Profession: New Realities; M. Wanhua and W. Jianbo * 6. The Changing American Academic Profession; M. Finkelstein and K. Iglesias February 2015 UK February 2015 US 224pp Paperback £24.99 / $40.00 / CN$46.00 Canadian Rights www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137493613

9781137493613

MANAGEMENT AND LEADERSHIP How Family Firms Differ

The Independent Director

Structure, Strategy, Governance and Performance

The Non-Executive Director’s Guide to Effective Board Presence

Sumon Bhaumik, University of Sheffield, UK, Ralitza Dimova, University of Manchester, UK In How Family Firms Differ, the authors explore important aspects of family firms, drawing on the existing literature and their own research on these firms. Contents: 1. Family Firms * 2. Agency Problems and Familiness * 3. Strategic Implications of Familiness * 4. Family Involvement and Firm Performance * 5. Familiness in Future Research

November 2014 UK November 2014 US 136pp 11 figures, 15 b/w tables Hardback £67.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9780230347441

9780230347441

The Impact of Diversity on Global Leadership Performance LEAD³ Sylvana Storey, Independent, UK “As the world leader in the beauty business and a forerunner in Diversity, it was key for L’Oreal to contribute to one of the 1st academic studies defining the impact of Diversity on global leadership performance. The LEAD³ model developed by Dr. Sylvana Storey offers a brand new and unique perspective on how leaders of global organizations can be more efficient in implementing diversity strategies and actions. Besides, it is definitely a step forward in making Diversity management a behavioral and business imperative for effective leadership.” - Jean-Claude Le Grand – Director of International HR Development and Corporate Diversity Director at L’Oréal ‘Dr. Sylvana Storey has done us all a service - not only the business community, but also all who interact with it - in elucidating the impact of diversity on global leadership performance. Her central tenet that organisations must re-shape their leadership and diversity efforts is undeniable and compelling’ - Sir Shridath Ramphal – Director, Commonwealth Secretary-General,1975 – 1990

Gerry Brown, Novaquest Capital Management, UK Non-executive directors play a very important role in modern business. Providing a rare emphasis on ‘soft skills’, culture and relationship building, this comprehensive guide offers a unique insight into what it’s actually like to be a non-executive director, backed up by global case studies, research and interviews. Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. The Executive Experience * 3. Case studies * Datrontech plc * Quintiles Transnational * Vantec Corporation * Keller plc * CH Jones Ltd * Forth Ports plc * U-POL Ltd * Michael Gerson Ltd * Biocompatibles plc * NFT Ltd * NovaQuest Capital * 4. Themes * Boards * Ownership * Strategy * Globalisation * Risk * Advisors * Executive Teams * Independent Directors * 5. Conclusion * 6. Building a Portfolio March 2015 UK April 2015 US 328pp 61 tables Hardback £29.99 / $50.00 / CN$57.50 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137480538

9781137480538

The Influence of Islamic Values on Management Practice Gillian Forster, Northumbria University, UK The Influence of Islamic Values on Management Practice is a cultural study examining how Islamic values influence management practice. Using Morocco as a case study, and with academic research and actual business managers working in this context, the book explores and explains how national characteristics, including Islam, shape management practice. Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. Morocco As A Social And Cultural Context For Management Practice * 3. Islamic Values * 4. A Profile Of Management – Morocco In The Broader Pan-Arab Context * 5. Management Practice in Morocco * 6. Lifting the Veil * 7. A New Synthesis for Management Practice in Morocco * 8. Conclusions And Contribution To Knowledge November 2014 UK November 2014 US 240pp 19 figures Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137335111

9781137335111

The Impact of Diversity on Global Leadership Performance examines the cognitive, social and behavioural skills that leaders need to have within their capability portfolio and how this can be applied to drive a diversity agenda in their organizations. The book presents LEAD³ - an analytical tool that offers an integrated change management process to build leadership and diversity capability. Contents: PART I: LEADERSHIP AND DIVERSITY IN A GLOBALISED WORLD * Introduction: A Changing Landscape * 1: The Global Leaders Role * 2: Diversity Refreshed and Updated * PART II: THE RESERACH FINDINGS * Introduction * 3: Findings - Leadership * 4: Findings – Diversity * 5: Findings – Organizational Factors * 6: Pulling it together – What Lies Beneath * PART III: THE TOOL – LEAD³ * Introduction: LEAD³ * 7: LEAD³ in Depth * 8: Operationalising LEAD³ * PART IV: THE BIG PICTURE * 9: Impact, Value and Spirit of LEAD³ July 2014 UK July 2014 US 240pp 23 figures, 14 b/w tables Hardback £70.00 / $115.00 / CN$132.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137426697

9781137426697

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

MANAGEMENT AND LEADERSHIP Intellectual Property Rights Management

Leadership and Mindful Behavior

Rookies, Dealers and Strategists

Action, Wakefulness, and Business

Lars Alkaersig, Techincal University of Denmark, Denmark, Karin Beukel, Institut for Fødevare- og Ressourceøkonomi, Denmark, Toke Reichstein, Copenhagen Business School, Denmark Intellectual Property Rights Management explores how the entire toolbox of intellectual property (IP) protection and management are successfully combined and how firms generate value from IP. It provides a framework of archetypes which firms will be able to self-identify with and which will allow companies to focus on the IP and IP Management issues most relevant to them. Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. IP Archetypes – Rookies, Strategists, Dealers and Strategic Dealers * 3. The IP Rookie * 4. The IP Dealer * 5. The IP Strategist * 6. The IP Strategic Dealer * 7. IP Strategy * 8. Markets for IP * 9. IP Archetypes and Demographics * 10. IP and Economic Performance * Exercises February 2015 UK February 2015 US 208pp 23 b/w tables, 29 figures Hardback £62.50 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137469526

9781137469526

Joan Marques, School of Business, Woodbury University, USA Aimed at business students preparing to enter the workforce, Leadership and Mindful Behavior provides readers with guidelines for effective and perceptive leadership. Some of the aspects to be reviewed will be the importance of both soft and hard skills; the concepts of sleepwalking and wakefulness; mental models, respect, change, and compassion. Contents: 1. An Expanded View of Leadership * 2. The Problem of ‘Sleepwalking’ * 3. The Value of Respect * 4. Engaging in Self-Reflection: A Deeper Look Within * 5. Mental Models and Reality * 6. The Changing Nature of Our Dreams * 7. Continuous Evolution as a Human Trait * 8. The Value of Broadening Our Mindset * 9. Why Soft Skills are Critical * 10. Maintaining Wakeful Leadership October 2014 UK October 2014 US 216pp 14 b/w illustrations Hardback £70.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137405609

Leadership and Collaboration

Leading Spiritually

Further developments for Interprofessional Education

Ten Effective Approaches to Workplace Spirituality

9781137405609

Edited by Dawn Forman, Curtin University, Australia, Marion Jones, Auckland University of Technology, New Zealand, Jill Thistlethwaite, University of Queensland, Australia

Edited by Joan Marques, School of Business, Woodbury University, USA, Satinder Dhiman, School of Business, Woodbury University, USA

Leadership and Collaboration provides international examples of how leadership of interprofessional education and practice has developed in various countries and examines how interprofessional education and collaborative practice can make a difference to the care of the patient, client and community.

Leading Spiritually reviews workplace spirituality from revered streams such as Buddhism, Hinduism, and Judaism, but also from a stance of personal reflection, self-leadership, and powerful interpersonal relationships.

Contents: 1. Introduction; Dawn Forman * PART I: FRAMING LEADERSHIP IN INTERPROFESSIONAL EDUCATION * 2. Leadership Frameworks for Interprofessional Learning; Alan Dow, Nital Appelbaum and Deborah DiazGranados (USA) * 3. Interprofessional Education from Pilot to Formal Curriculum; Wiwik Kusumawati and Salmah Orbayinah (Indonesia) * 4. Foundation of the Japan Association for Interprofessional Education (JAIPE); Hideaki E. Takahashi, Hideomi Watanabe and Masanobu Kinoshita (Japan) * PART II: COLLABORATIVE DEVELOPMENTS * 5. Collaborative Leadership within Interprofessional Practice; Carole Orchard and Margot Rykhoff (Canada) * 6. Learner Leadership: a Change Agent for UK Interprofessional Learning; Kate Cuthbert, Geoff Glover and Dawn Forman (UK) * 7. Training COPC and Leadership Development at Ghent University, Belgium; Lynn Ryssaert, Sofie Dhaese, Inge Van de Caveye, Sarah Bogaert and Jan De Maeseneer (Belgium) * 8. Utilizing Curriculum Renewal as a Way of Leading Cultural Change in Australian Health Professional Education; Roger Dunston, Dawn Forman, Lynda Matthews, Pam Nicol, Rosalie Pockett, Gary Rogers, Carole Steketee and Jill Thistlethwaite (Australia) * 9. Assessment of Interprofessional Teamwork – an International Perspective; Jill Thistlethwaite (Australia) * 10. Collaborative Leadership for the Transformation of Health Systems; Rosemary Brander, Maura MacPhee, Emmanuelle Careau, Maria Tassone, Sarita Verma, Margo Paterson and Susan Berry (Canada) * PART III: INNOVATION IN PRACTICE * 11. Building Interprofessional Leadership in a Clinical Setting; Duncan Reid, Marion Jones and Daniel O’Brien (New Zealand) * 12. Health LEADS Australia and Interprofessional Education; Monica Moran, Carole Steketee and Kirsty Marles (Australia) * 13. Developing Pharmacist Leaders – Interprofessional Education at Work; Avril Lee, Dale Sheehan and Pat Alley (New Zealand) * 14. Shaping Interprofessional Education – Educators in Action; Payal Bansal, Rashmi Vyas, Pramila Menon, Seema Patrikar and Arun Jamkar (India) * 15. Leadership into the Future; Jill Thistlethwaite and Marion Jones April 2015 UK April 2015 US 240pp 13 figures, 13 b/w tables Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137432070

9781137432070

Contents: 1. Wakeful at Work; Joan Marques * 2. The Ethical and Spiritual Philosophy of the Bhagavad Gītā; Satinder Dhiman * 3. Spirituality at Work; M. Eileen Higgins * 4. Three Dimensional Leaders; Birute Regine * 5. Inviting Buddha to Work; Joan Marques * 6. The Relationship of the Bases of Competence Skills to Workplace Spirituality; Frederick Evers * 7. A Saint’s Clarion Call to Humankind; Satinder Dhiman * 8: Evolution as a Spiritual Journey; Richard Barrett * 9. Wisdom of a Leader; Keiko Krahnke, Sharon Clinebell, and Isaac Wanasika * 10. Influences of Religion on Spirituality in the Workplace; Jerry Biberman and Joan Marques December 2014 UK December 2014 US 204pp 5 b/w tables, 3 figures Hardback £66.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137455628

9781137455628

MANAGEMENT AND LEADERSHIP Learning Leadership in a Changing World

The Management Shift

Virtue and Effective Leadership in the 21st Century

How to Harness the Power of People and Transform Your Organization For Sustainable Success

Mark W. McCloskey, Bethel University Learning Leadership in a Changing World provides direction and support in the form of the 4R Model of Leadership—a theoretically sound, conceptually straightforward, and educationally powerful framework. Contents: PART I: THE TWENTY-FIRST CENTURY LEADERSHIP CONTEXT * 1. Two Leadership Myths * 2. The Mess * 3. Myths Meet Mess * PART II: NEXT PRACTICES AND ANCIENT ASSETS * 4. Next Practices: Part I * 5. Next Practices: Part II * 6. Next Practices: Part III * 7. Ancient Assets for the Twenty-first Century * PART III: THE 4R MODEL: RELATIONSHIPS * 8. The 4R Model of Leadership * 9. Dynamic Determination * 10. Intellectual Flexibility * 11. Courageous Character * 12. Emotional Maturity * 13. Collaborative Quotient * PART IV: THE 4R MODEL: ROLES * 14. The Direction Setter Role * 15. The Ambassador Role * 16. The Learner Role * 17. The Coach Role * 18. The Steward Role * PART V: THE 4R MODEL: RESPONSIBILITIES * 19. Vision Casting * 20. Strategy Making * 21. Aligning * 22. Encouraging * PART VI: THE 4R MODEL: RESULTS * 23. Results * 24. Results and Relationships December 2014 UK December 2014 US 296pp 13 b/w illustrations, 1 graph, 6 b/w tables Hardback £72.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 9781137476326 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137476326

Management Control and Uncertainty Edited by David T. Otley, University of Lancaster, UK, Kim Soin, University of Exeter, UK, Management Control Association Management Control and Uncertainty recognizes that all control takes place under conditions of uncertainty: it does now, and it always has done. In this edited collection, the contributing authors examine different aspects of management control systems in the modern world whilst paying more explicit attention to the ubiquitous nature of uncertainty. Contents: 1. Introduction; David T. Otley and Kim Soin * 2. Contributions of Clive Emmanuel; Martine Cools * 3. Management Control Research: A Review of Current Developments; Roland Spekle and Anne-Marie Kruis * 4. From Make-or-buy to Co-ordinating Collaboration; Henri Dekker and Shannon Anderson * 5. Researching the Human Side of Management Control: Using Survey-Based Methods; Sally Widener * 6. Management Control and Uncertainty; David Otley * 7. Managing Through Uncertainty; Mike Bourne * 8. Uncertainty as a Determinant of Performance Measurement and Compensation Systems; Julia Mundy + Abernethy * 9. Controlling Creativity: Paradox or Necessity; Jan Pfister * 10. Managing Management Controls; Sophie Tessier * 11. Feel the Risk; Elaine Harris * 12. Risk Management in UK Universities; Kim Soin + Huber + Wheatley * 13. Management Control and Uncertainty in Electricity; Liz Warren * 14. How Can Management Control Research Facilitate the Management of Uncertainty?; Olivier Saulpic and Phillipe Zarlowski * 15. Cultural Theory and MA; Philip and Alexander Linsley * 16. The Existential Perversity of Management Accounting and Control; Lowe and de Loo * 17. Middle-Range Thinking and Management Control Systems; Jane Broadbent and Richard Laughlin November 2014 UK November 2014 US 312pp 9 figures, 6 b/w tables Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137392107

9781137392107

Vlatka Hlupic, University of Westminster, UK ‘This is an inspiring book. Dr Hlupic makes a compelling case for radical changes in how large companies work, and she charts a very clear course for a new type of leadership that seeks to harness the talents and commitment of all employees.’ -Julian Birkinshaw, Professor of Strategy and Entrepreneurship, London Business School “Vlatka Hupic’s The Management Shift is a rich exploration of the way in which the corporate landscape is increasingly emphasizing people and purpose—and not just profit. As such, it’s not only useful; it’s quite hopeful.’ -Rick Wartzman, Executive Director of the Drucker Institute; columnist for Time.com A new tried and tested model for leadership to help managers improve engagement, remove barriers to innovation and uncover the hidden strengths of every company’s greatest asset: their workforce. Contents: 1. It is Time Now for The Management Shift * 2. The Need for a New Type of Leadership * 3. Insights From the Leading Management Thinkers: From the WHY and WHAT to the HOW * 4. The Emergent Leadership Model: From the Stagnating to the Unbounded culture * 5. The 6 Box Leadership Model: An Organizational Body Scan * 6. The 6 Box Leadership Model in Action: Practical Examples * 7. ‘The Management Shift’ is Achievable Now: A Call for Action * Appendices October 2014 UK November 2014 US 284pp 61 b/w tables, 8 figures Hardback £29.99 / $45.00 / CN$52.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137352941

9781137352941

Managing the Football World Cup Edited by Stephen Frawley, UTS Business School, University of Technology, Australia, Daryl Adair, UTS Business School, University of Technology, Australia Managing the Football World Cup explores areas often overlooked by project management and business studies researchers. Therefore considering the global impact of the Football World Cup it is time for a detailed examination of the planning, organization, management, implementation and related commercial features of this mega-sport event. Contents: 1. Managing the World Cup: Managerial Dimensions; Stephen Frawley and Daryl Adair * 2. Managing World Cup Legacy; John Horne * 3. Using New Media to Engage Consumers at the Football World Cup; Adam Karg and Daniel Lock * 4. Broadcasting the World Cup; Harry Arne Solberg and Chris Gratton * 5. Ambush Marketing and the Football World Cup; Simon Chadwick, Ran Liu and Des Thwaites * 6. The Challenge of Utilising World Cup Venues; Holger Preuss, Harry Arne Solberg and Jens Alm * 7. World Cup Stadium Development and Sustainability; Les Street, Stephen Frawley and Sarah Cobourn * 8. Beyond the Stadium: Football World Cup Fan Fests and Global Live Sites; Simone Eisenhauer, Daryl Adair and Tracy Taylor * 9. Managing Transport at the Football World Cup; Eva Kassens-Noor * 10. Managing Security at the World Cup; Kristine Toohey and Tracy Taylor * 11. An Evaluation of the FIFA Governance Reform Process of 2011-2013; Roger Pielke, Jr. * 12. Managing the World Cup: Future Research; Stephen Frawley and Daryl Adair December 2014 UK December 2014 US 264pp 20 b/w tables, 10 figures Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137373663

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

9781137373663

MANAGEMENT AND LEADERSHIP Managing Religion: The Management of Christian Religious and Faith-Based Organizations

Multi-rational Management Mastering Conflicting Demands in a Pluralistic Environment Edited by Kuno Schedler, University of St. Gallen, Switzerland, Johannes Rüegg-Stürm, University of St. Gallen, Switzerland

Volume 1: Internal Relationships Malcolm Torry, Heythrop College, University of London, UK This two-volume work explores the management of religious and faith-based organizations. Each chapter offers a discussion of the earliest Christian organizations based on New Testament evidence; a study of managing faith-based organizations; and an exploration of secular management theory in relation to the management of faith-based organizations. Contents: 1. The Christian Religion is its Organizations * 2. Secular Management Theory * 3. Managing Story and Culture * 4. Managing Members and Volunteers * 5. Managing Strategy * 6. Managing Groups * 7. Managing Governance * 8. Managing Christian Clergy September 2014 UK September 2014 US 304pp 7 figures, 6 b/w tables Hardback £70.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9780230347946

9780230347946

9781137444400

The New Influencing Toolkit Capabilities for Communicating with Influence

Volume 2: External Relationships Malcolm Torry, Heythrop College, University of London, UK This two-volume work explores the management of religious and faith-based organizations. Each chapter offers a discussion of the earliest Christian organizations based on New Testament evidence; a study of managing faith-based organizations; and an exploration of secular management theory in relation to the management of faith-based organizations. Contents: 9. Managing Denominations * 10. Managing Faithbased and Mission Organizations * 11. Managing Ecumenical and Multifaith Activity * 12. Managing Relationships with Secular Institutions * 13. Managing the Pursuit of Welfare and Social Justice * 14. Managing in New and Changing Communities * 15. Today’s Challenges

Contents: 1. Introduction; Kuno Schedler and Johannes Rüegg-Stürm * 2. Rationality – The Notion, its Genesis and its Effects; Kuno Schedler and Johannes Rüegg-Stürm * 3. Multirationality and Pluralistic Organisations; Kuno Schedler and Johannes Rüegg-Stürm * 4. Multirational Management in Hospitals; Harald Tuckermann * 5. Multirational Management in Tourism; Christian Laesser and Pietro Beritelli * 6. Multiple Rationalities in Regional Development; Roland Scherer and Kristina Zumbusch * 7. Multirational Management in Public Administration; Kuno Schedler and Angela Eicher * 8. Multirational Management in Technology Companies; Daniel Bartl and Simon Grand * 9. Multirational Management in Regional Public Transport; Mirco Gross and Lukas Summermatter * 10. Strategies for Dealing with Multiple Rationalities; Kuno Schedler and Johannes Rüegg-Stürm * 11. Consequences for Practice and Science; Kuno Schedler and Johannes Rüegg-Stürm October 2014 UK October 2014 US 232pp 3 b/w tables, 23 figures Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137444400

Managing Religion: The Management of Christian Religious and Faith-Based Organizations

September 2014 UK September 2014 US 296pp 4 figures Hardback £70.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137439260

Multi-rational Management explains the concept of multirational management and illustrates it with many practical examples. It has primarily been written for ‘reflective practitioners’, i.e. those executives who continually think about their organisation and their own roles in that organisation.

9781137439260

Tim Baker, WINNERS-AT-WORK Pty Ltd, Australia Without influence, managers are ineffective. In today’s workplace, managers need to influence up, down and increasingly, sideways as organizations become less hierarchical. This book is expertly designed to diagnose and develop managerial influence, focusing on four key strategies: investigating, calculating, motivating and collaborating. Contents: 1. Managing with Power and Influence * 2. Influencing Capabilities Framework * 3. Influencing Capabilities Profile * 4. Interpreting Your Results * 5. The Investigator * 6. The Calculator * 7. The Motivator * 8. The Collaborator

February 2015 UK March 2015 US 246pp 8 b/w tables, 3 figures, 24 tables Hardback £22.99 / $36.00 / CN$41.50 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137470140

9781137470140

MANAGEMENT AND LEADERSHIP New Managerialism in Education Commercialization, Carelessness and Gender

Now available in paperback

Kathleen Lynch, University College Dublin, Ireland, Bernie Grummell, National University of Ireland, Republic of Ireland, Dympna Devine, University College Dublin, Republic of Ireland “The enormous value of the book is that it brings together and demonstrates the close and complex relationships between neoliberalism, managerialism, gender, carelessness and inequity. It is a salutary, sad and stirring read.” - Stephen Ball, Critical Social Policy New Managerialism in Education, now in paperback, examines the impact of neo-liberal reform on the traditional caring ethos of public services such as education, exploring how these reforms influence the appointment and experiences of senior management across the education sector. Contents: Introduction * PART I: GOVERNANCE IN IRISH EDUCATION * 1. New Managerialism as a Political Project: The Irish Case * 2. The Culture of Governance in Irish Education * PART II: APPOINTING SENIOR MANAGERS * 3. Research Preface: The Case Studies * 4. Homosociability, Local Logics and Authenticity in the Appointments Process * 5. Assessing Applicants: The Care Rules * PART III: BEING A SENIOR MANAGER * 6. Leading Educators: The Emotional Work of Managing Identities * 7. Crafting the Elastic Self: Gendered Experiences * 8. The Careless Rules of the Game: Pregnancy, Child Care and Management * PART IV: LIVING AND FRAMING MARKETIZATION * 9. New Managerialism, Carelessness and Gender * 10. Framing Educational Agendas for Managers: The Role of the News Media January 2015 UK January 2019 US 280pp 3 b/w tables, 1 figure Paperback £24.99 / $45.00 / CN$50.00 Canadian Rights www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137489944

9781137489944

A Critical Historical Survey Matthias Beck, Queen’s University Management School, UK, Sara Melo, Queen’s University Management School, UK Quality Management and Managerialism in Healthcare creates a comprehensive and systematic international survey of various perspectives on healthcare quality management together with some of their most pertinent critiques. It reviews the factors which have underpinned the managerialist trajectory of healthcare management over the past decades. Contents: 1. Managerialism: A Historical Overview * 2. Risk in Medicine: Early Developments to the 1980s * 3. Quality Management in Health care * 4. Models of Patient Safety and Critique * 5. Evidence-based Medicine * 6. Managerialism in Healthcare: Future Avenues November 2014 UK November 2014 US 232pp 8 figures Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137351982

9781137351982

Systemic Change Management The Five Capabilities for Improving Enterprises

Performing Governance Partnerships, Culture and New Labour Helen Dickinson, Melbourne School of Government, University of Melbourne, Australia Performing Governance sets out a new framework to assess the performance of partnerships and examines what these actually deliver. This is applied to three areas of New Labour’s welfare policy; child safeguarding, urban regeneration and the modernisation of health and social care. This book contributes to understanding governance under New Labour. Contents: 1. Introduction * PART I: SETTING OUT THE FRAMEWORK * 2. Governance and Why It Matters * 3. New Labour, Modernisation and Partnership * 4. Performing Partnership * PART II: CASE STUDIES * 5. Child Safeguarding * 6. Urban Regeneration * 7. Modernisation of Health and Social Care * 8. Concluding Discussion June 2014 UK June 2014 US 224pp 15 b/w tables, 2 figures Hardback £65.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137024039

Quality Management and Managerialism in Healthcare

George L. Roth, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, USA, Anthony J. DiBella, National Defense University, USA ‘We finally have a book that does not oversimplify complex change in the increasingly complex world of today and tomorrow. The five enterprise capabilities described with detailed case material show how individual, group, and cultural attitudes and skills are at the heart of successful growth and change.’ - Edgar H. Schein, Professor Emeritus, MIT, USA, and author of Humble Inquiry (2013) Weaving together prescriptions with a series of cases, Systemic Change Management describes the value and how-to of a systemic or enterprise approach to organizational change. Each capability presented here promotes change, but when used together create synergies that magnify their individual impact within and between collaborating organizations. Contents: PART I: THE CHALLENGES IN EXCELLENCE * 1. Systemic Change * 2. Excellence Made Possible * PART II: THE FIVE CAPABILITIES FOR SYSTEMIC CHANGE * The Five Capabilities for Systemic Change * 3. Promoting Enterprise Awareness * 4. Enterprise Systems * 5. Installing Innovation Sets * 6. Momentum Power * 7. Balancing Push and Pull Change * 8. Culture Alignment * 9. Seeking Growth * 10. A New Accord * 11. Distributing Leadership * 12. Competitive Excellence * PART III: THE WAY FORWARD * 13. A Shift in Focus * 14. Keeping On April 2015 UK April 2015 US 256pp 35 b/w illustrations, 14 b/w tables Hardback £35.40 / $65.00 / CN$74.00 Canadian Rights www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137412010

9781137412010

9781137024039

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

MANAGEMENT AND LEADERSHIP Women Directors

Human Foundations of Management

The Italian Way and Beyond

Understanding the Homo Humanus

Paola Profeta, Università Bocconi, Italy, Livia Amidani Aliberti, Independent, UK, Alessandra Casarico, Università Bocconi, Italy, Marilisa D’Amico, State University of Milan, Italy, Anna Puccio, Independent

Domènec Melé, IESE Business School, University of Navarra, Spain, César González Cantón, CUNEF, Complutense University of Madrid, Spain Human Foundations of Management explores the human foundation of management and economic activity in a way that is accessible to readers. The structure and contents of this book examines those aspects of the human being which are relevant to management and economic activities.

Women Directors analyzes the Italian law on gender quotas in boards as a vital opportunity for the country and a key international case. It provides a broad perspective of the new Italian experience, which has the potential of influencing the way of addressing gender issues worldwide. Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. The International Scenario on Gender Gaps * 3. Quotas in Boards: Evidence from the Literature * 4. Gender Quotas in Boards across Countries * 5. The law 120/2011 * 6. Key Actions and Actors leading to the Law Implementation * 7. First Evidence * 8. A comparative Evaluation of the Italian Experience * 9. Key Learnings from Italy to Other Countries * 10. What is Next? August 2014 UK August 2014 US 232pp 26 figures, 25 b/w tables, 10 line drawings Hardback £62.50 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 9781137427465 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137427465

Contents: Introduction * PART I: THE IDEA OF THE HUMAN BEING * PART II: FUNDAMENTALS OF A PHILOSOPHY OF THE PERSON *

IESE Business Collection December 2014 UK December 2014 US 280pp Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9780230368934

Managing eHealth

The Executive Guide to Corporate Restructuring

From Vision to Reality Edited by Magdalene Rosenmöller, IESE Business School, Spain, Diane Whitehouse, The Castlegate Consultancy, UK, Petra Wilson, Public Sector Healthcare (Europe) Internet Business Solutions Group, Cisco Systems, Belgium

Francisco J. López Lubián, IE Business School, Spain In recent years the continuity of many firms has been achieved by restructuring, a task which takes up a great deal of senior management’s time. Written for busy managers and executives, this book is a practical guide to the process of restructuring, covering both debt and operational restructures. Contents: 1. Restructuring: A General Overview * 2. Steps in Restructuring * 3. Operating Restructuring * 4. Financial Restructuring * 5. Valuation in Distress * 6. Some Examples of Restructuring (I) * 7. Some Examples of Restructuring (II) * 8. Life after Restructuring * 9. Summary and Conclusions

IE Business Publishing June 2014 UK July 2014 US 184pp 3 figures, 56 b/w tables Hardback £29.99 / $50.00 / CN$57.50 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137389350

9781137389350

Follow Palgrave Macmillan on Facebook®. ‘Like’ our Facebook® page to get the latest news, reviews and event invites.

for the latest news, events and competitions

www.facebook.com/PalgraveMacmillan

www.twitter.com/PalgraveBiz

9780230368934

@PalgraveBiz

Managing eHealth constitutes an excellent source of information for gaining a better understanding of information technologies in healthcare; for reviewing how healthcare will change as a consequence; and how to manage these changes in order to realise eHealth’s full potential in creating value for patients, professionals and the system as a whole. Contents: 1. eHealth – From Vision to Reality; Diane Whitehouse, Petra Wilson and Magdalene Rosenmöller * PART I: POLITICS - POLICY AND INSTITUTIONS * 2. On the Creation of AIM And Its First Six Years; Niels Rossing * 3. European eHealth agenda, 1990-2010; Ilias Iakovidis * 4. From Governments to Governance: an Emerging Paradigm in eHealth; Joan Dzenowagis * 5. New Directions in eHealth Governance in Europe; Zoi Kolitsi and Michèle Thonnet * 6. Shaping eHealth through Legal actions; Petra Wilson * PART II: PEOPLE - PROFESSIONALS, PATIENTS AND CONSUMERS * 7. Physicians’ Perspectives on eHealth; Birgit Beger and Michael Wilks * 8. Nursing’s Pivotal Role in eHealth: a Brief, Selective History; Nicholas R. Hardiker * 9. The Emerging Role of the Health Informatician as a Key Player on eHealth; Jean Roberts * 10. A Quick Scan of Patients’ Relationships with eHealth; Diane Whitehouse * 11. Dynamic Quality Control for a Changing Internet; Célia Boyer and Mayoni Ranasinghe * 12. Social Networks for Health – a Personal Snapshot; Denise Silber * PART III: PRACTICE - NEW WAYS OF WORKING AND OTHER CHALLENGES * 13. The role of eHealth in supporting care coordination; Nick Goodwin and Albert Alonso * 14. The eHealth Contribution to Person-Centred Care; Dipak Kalra, Jörg Artmann, Veli Stroetmann, and Niels Boye * 15. HIT -The Leadership Role of Hospitals; Antoine Geissbuhler, Josep M. Piqué and Magdalene Rosenmöller * 16. Recent US Experience with Health ICT; Don Eugene Detmer * 17. Reshaping Health in a World of Mobile Phones; Patricia Mechael, Ada Kwan, Avrille Hanzel and Chelsea Hedquist * 18. eHealth in Drug Discovery and Disease Research; Mats Sundgren * 19. The European Virtual Physiological Human Initiative; Vanessa Diaz-Zuccarini, Rainer Thiel, Veli Stroetmann * 20. Making the Economic Case for eHealth;Tom Jones

IESE Business Collection August 2014 UK August 2014 US 312pp 16 figures, 2 b/w tables, 21 b/w line drawings Hardback £70.00 / $115.00 / CN$132.00 9781137379429 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137379429

MANAGEMENT AND LEADERSHIP Conceptions of Leadership

Leadership in Colonial Africa

Enduring Ideas and Emerging Insights

Disruption of Traditional Frameworks and Patterns

Edited by George R. Goethals, Jepson School of Leadership Studies, University of Richmond, USA, Scott T. Allison, University of Richmond, USA, Roderick M. Kramer, Stanford University, USA, David M. Messick, Northwestern University, USA An exploration of both classic and contemporary conceptions of leadership, focusing on social psychological approaches to central questions such as the way people think about leaders and leadership, the personality attributes of leaders, power and influence, trust, and the qualities that sustain positive relationships between leaders and followers. Contents: PART I: CONCEPTIONS OF LEADERSHIP * PART II: LEADERSHIP PROCESSES

Jepson Studies in Leadership December 2014 UK December 2014 US 264pp 5 b/w tables Hardback £72.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Paperback £22.00 / $35.00 / CN$40.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137472014 www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137472021

9781137472014 9781137472021

Edited by Baba G. Jallow, Creighton University, USA Leadership in Colonial Africa highlights colonial disruptions of traditional leadership patterns in Africa and how African leaders, traditional and nationalist, reacted to these disruptions. Contents: Preface * 1. The Case for African Leadership Studies and Leadership in Colonial Africa: an Introduction; Baba G. Jallow * 2. Chiefs and Protectorate Administration in Colonial Gambia, 1894 – 1965; Hassoum Ceesay * 3. Linking Anti-colonialism and Human Rights: The Activism and Advocacy of Nnamdi Azikiwe; Bonny Ibhawoh * 4. The Diplomatic Achievements of Amilcar Cabral: A Case Study of Effective Leadership in a Small African State; David Fistein * 5. The Warrior and the Wizard: The Leadership Legacies of Josiah Tongogara and Robert Mugabe during Zimbabwe’s Liberation Struggle; Nyasha M. GuramatunhuCooper * 6. Voortrekker or State-Builder? John Vorster and the Challenges of Leadership in the Apartheid State; Jamie Miller * 7. Leadership and Liberation: Southern African reflections; Chris Saunders * 8. W. E. B. Du Bois: Pan-African Leadership for Democracy and Peace; Phillip Luke Sinitiere

Palgrave Studies in African Leadership December 2014 UK December 2014 US 204pp Hardback £72.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137477958

Neuroscience for Leadership Harnessing the Brain Gain Advantage Tara Swart, The Unlimited Mind, UK, Kitty Chisholm, Aspiration to Opportunity, t/a Boardwalk Leadership, UK, Paul Brown, Vietnam Veterans of America Foundation, Vietnam ‘Thoroughly-researched and finely-written, the real brilliance of Neuroscience for Leadership is how it links scientific brain network research with solid advice on decision-making, employee motivation, and organizational growth! Perceptive and brilliant!’ - Marshall Goldsmith, author or editor of 34 books including the global bestsellers MOJO and What Got You Here Won’t Get You There Leadership can be learned: new evidence from neuroscience clearly points to ways that leaders can significantly improve how they engage with and motivate others. This book provides leaders and managers with an accessible guide to practical, effective actions, based on neuroscience. Contents: Section 1: What are we here for? * Introduction * An overview * 1. Evolution, capitalism, emerging markets – and love Intro to wetware, Bring on the love, Understanding emotions (minus the decisions bit) and chemicals * 2. Brains, bodies, businesses: a systems approach (alternative title reflecting the systems approach and also that we will need to lay out our neuroscience stall early on as the basis for what comes afterwards) * 3. Leadership Models for the Age of the Brain (our take on leadership and what insights neuroscience gives us) * Section 2: Making Sense of Relationships * 4. Testosterone and trouble (probably in expanding this section it will also extend to risk and relationships and risk and entrepreneurship as these will be hard to separate out) * 5. The Soft Stuff is so Hard (including the social aspects/ benefits of brain development and function, communications, story telling, trust, cooperation, altruism) * 6. Diversity and Decisions (gender and other forms of diversity, difficult decisions, difficult/different reactions, managing fora for decisions, boards, meetings etc) * 7. Changing yourself, changing others (attention, flexibility, reflection, will power, emotional regulation, self management, enabling others to change, goals) * Section 3: Follow my Leader: Leaders who create sustainable success * 8. Elite Performance (brain fitness, expertise, Flow, sustainability, emotions qua the limbic leader) * 9. Confidence and Stress: keeping the balance (include entrepreneurs, managers, leaders and the differences??) * and more...

The Neuroscience of Business January 2015 UK February 2015 US 256pp 43 tables, 8 figures Hardback £22.99 / $36.00 / CN$41.50 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137466853

9781137477958

Leadership in Postcolonial Africa Trends Transformed by Independence Edited by Baba G. Jallow, Creighton University, USA Leadership in Post-Colonial Africa examines the leadership concepts and lessons that emerged during and after the attainment of independence with insightful studies of Africa’s first female presidents, gangster elitism, Nelson Mandela, and beyond. Contents: Table Of Contents * 1. Leadership In Post-Colonial Africa: An Introduction; Baba G. Jallow * 2. Hastings Kamuzu Banda: How The Cold War Sustained Bad Leadership In Malawi, 1964 – 1994; Paul Chiudza Banda * 3. Ahmed Sékou Touré: The Tyrant Hero; Muhammed Kamil * 4. The Quest To Reform The African State: The Case Of William R. Tolbert Jr. Of Liberia And Jerry Rawlings Of Ghana; Maavi Norman * 5. ‘The Bishop Is Governor Here’: Bishop Nicholas Djomo And Catholic Leadership In The Democratic Republic Of The Congo; Jay Carney * 6. ‘I Will Be A Humming Bird’: Radical Leadership Lessons From Professor Wangari Maathai; Faith Ngunjiri * 7. Nelson Mandela: Leadership And Reconciliation In South Africa; Daniel Lieberfeld * 8. Power Distance, Patriarchy And The Cult Of Liberia’s First Female President; Robtel Pailey * 9. Female Presidents In Africa: New Norms In Leadership Or Reflection Of Current Practice; Dorcas Ettang * 10. Leading Through A Medicinal Plant: African Women’s ‘Transforming Servant Leadership’ In Portland, Oregon; Evelyne Ello Hart * 11. From Election To Selection: Democracy, Leadership And Development In Nigeria; Edlyne E. Anugwom * 12. Academic Leadership In Africa; Joseph Ayee

Palgrave Studies in African Leadership December 2014 UK December 2014 US 240pp Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137478115

9781137478115

9781137466853

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

MANAGEMENT AND LEADERSHIP Academic Inbreeding and Mobility in Higher Education Global Perspectives Edited by Maria Yudkevich, National Research University Higher School of Economics, Russia, Philip G. Altbach, Boston College, USA, Laura E. Rumbley, Boston College, USA Academic inbreeding - appointing one’s own graduates for academic positions - is a controversial but surprisingly common practice internationally. This book is the first comparative analysis of the phenomenon - the causes, implications, and future of inbreeding. Contents: 1. Academic Inbreeding: Local Challenge, Global Problem; Philip G. Altbach, Maria Yudkevich, and Laura E. Rumbley * 2. Academic Inbreeding: State of the Literature; Olga Gorelova and Maria Yudkevich * 3. Academic Inbreeding in the Argentine University: A Systemic and Organizational Analysis; Marcelo Rabossi * 4. Faculty Inbreeding in China: Status, Causes and Results; Hong Shen, Zhiping Xu, and Bingbing Zhang * 5. Inbreeding in Japanese Higher Education: Inching Towards Openness in a Globalized Context; Akiyoshi Yonezawa * 6. Academic Immobility and Inbreeding in Russian Universities; Elizaveta Sivak and Maria Yudkevich * 7. Slovenia: The Slow Decline of Academic Inbreeding; Manja Klemenčič and Pavel Zgaga * 8. Academic Inbreeding: The South African Case; Saleem Badat * 9. Academic Inbreeding in Spanish Universities: Perverse Effects in a Global Context; José-Ginés Mora * 10. Academic Inbreeding in Ukraine; Ilona Sologoub and Tom Coupé

Palgrave Studies in Global Higher Education January 2015 UK January 2015 US 280pp 27 figures, 19 b/w tables Hardback £65.00 / $100.00 / CN$115.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137461247

9781137461247

Historical Perspectives on Organizations, Artefacts and Practices Edited by Francois-Xavier de Vaujany, Universite Paris-Dauphine, France, Nathalie Mitev, London School of Economics, UK, Pierre Laniray, Université Paris Dauphine, France, Emmanuelle Vaast, McGill University, Canada Materiality and Time explores how time is materialized and performed in organizations; examines how organizations and organizational members are constituted by and constitutive of material artefacts; and reflects on what a historical perspective on these materializations can bring to the study of organizations. Contents: PART I: MATERIALIZING TIME AND HISTORY IN ORGANIZATIONS: WHAT IS AT STAKE? * PART II: TEMPORAL DYNAMICS OF ARTIFACTS AND MATERIALITY IN ORGANIZATIONS: THE IMPORTANCE OF MATERIAL TRACES * PART III: STRETCHING OUT TIME AND MATERIALITY IN ORGANIZATIONS: FROM PRESENTISM TO LONGUE DURÉE

Technology, Work and Globalization

Ecomuseums, Community Governance, Social Accountability Michela Magliacani, Associate Professor in Business Administration at the Department of Economics and Management, University of Pavia, Italy Managing Cultural Heritage explores managerial and governance issues within the cultural heritage sector, with particular regard to the ecomuseum. Moreover, a social accountability model is supplied to ecomuseums in order to be accountable towards its shareholder, the local community. Contents: 1. Introduction: How to Manage Cultural Heritage in Times of Crisis * 2.The Ecomuseum Under a Managerial Perspective * 3.The Governance Framework in the Ecomuseum Context * 4. The Ecomuseum Practices: an International Overview * 5. The Tuscan Experience * 6. Which accountability for the Ecomuseum: A “Community” Governance Scorecard Model * 7. Closing Remarks

December 2014 UK December 2014 US 150pp 9 b/w tables, 15 figures Hardback £45.00 / $67.50 / CN$78.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137481535

9781137481535

Radical Decision Making

Materiality and Time

September 2014 UK September 2014 US 264pp 11 figures, 8 b/w tables Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137432100

Managing Cultural Heritage

9781137432100

Leading Strategic Change in Complex Organizations Domagoj Hruška, University of Zagreb, Croatia Radical Decision Making offers a controversial new framework to the conventional strategic change management conversation. While many approaches provide a discussion on a singular level, Dr. Hruška blends theory and research of decision making and social interaction to develop a consistent framework of strategic change. Contents: Contents * Introduction * 1. The Radical Decision * 2. Leading Complex Organizations * 3. Building Mental Models for Effective Leadership * 4. Driving Radical Change * 5. The Loadstar * 6. Taking a Radical Decision * 7. Rhetoric of Radical Change

December 2014 UK December 2014 US 160pp 5 b/w illustrations Hardback £45.00 / $67.50 / CN$78.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137492302

9781137492302

MARKETING All Thumbs

MARKETING

Mobile Marketing that Works

Advertising to Children New Directions, New Media Edited by Mark Blades, University of Sheffield, UK, Caroline Oates, University of Sheffield, UK, Fran Blumberg, Fordham University, USA, Barrie Gunter, University of Leicester, UK This important source for students, researchers, advertisers and parents reviews the debates and presents new research about advertising to children. Chapters cover food and alcohol advertising, the effects of product placement and new media advertising, and the role of parents and teachers in helping children to learn more about advertising. Contents: 1. Introduction; Barrie Gunter, Caroline Oates, Fran Blumberg and Mark Blades * 2. Do Very Young Children Understand Persuasive Intent in Advertisements?; Moondore Ali and Mark Blades * 3. The Development of Children’s Scepticism about Advertising; Maria T. Chu, Mark Blades and Jane Herbert * 4. Commercial Food Promotion to Children; Emma J. Boyland, Joanne A. Harrold, Tim C. Kirkham and Jason C.G. Halford * 5. Alcohol Advertising and Young People; Barrie Gunter * 6. Advertising to Children in China; Kara Chan * 7. Parents’ Beliefs about, and Attitudes to, Marketing to Children; Caroline Oates, Nicki Newman and Athanasia Tziortzi * 8. The Family’s Role in Children’s Interpretation of Advertising; Moniek Buijzen * 9. Linkages between Media Literacy and Children’s and Adolescents’ Susceptibility to Advertising; Fran C. Blumberg, Lauren A. Frankle, Brian Kelley and Jessica M. Williams * 10. Under the Radar: How Embedded Commercial Messages in TV and the New Media Influence Children without their Conscious Awareness; Laura Owen, Charlie Lewis and Susan Auty * 11. Young Children’s Ability to Identify Advertisements on Television, on Web Pages and on Search Engine Web Pages; Shiying Li, Megan Pickering, Moondore Ali, Mark Blades and Caroline Oates * 12. The Influence of Advergames on Children’s Consumer Choices and Behaviour; Amanda E. Staiano and Sandra L. Calvert * 13. Conclusions; Caroline Oates, Fran Blumberg, Barrie Gunter and Mark Blades August 2014 UK August 2014 US 272pp 10 b/w tables, 8 b/w photos Hardback £65.00 / $105.00 / CN$115.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9780230252028

Mobile devices are now in the hands of nearly half of the world’s population. However, 80% of mobile marketing either doesn’t work and has a high abandon rate, or doesn’t fit into a brand’s overall strategy. Aimed at businesses of all sizes, this practical guide shows owners and marketers how to develop a campaign that gets results. September 2014 UK August 2014 US 224pp 15 b/w illustrations Hardback £16.99 / $26.00 / CN$30.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137279279

9781137279279

Consumer Brand Relationships 9780230252028

Meaning, Measuring, Managing Edited by Marc Fetscherin, Rollins College, USA, Tobias Heilmann, University of Zurich, Switzerland

Agency Starting a Creative Firm in the Age of Digital Marketing Rick Webb, Quotidian Ventures, USA ‘Agency is full of incredibly valuable insights and advice for startups of all kinds, delivered with candor, humor, and wisdom.’ - Allison Arden, VP Publisher, Advertising Age, and author of The Book of Doing Agency is for young startups and entrepreneurs in the advertising, marketing, and digital services space. It’s an A-to-Z guide for young advertising firms, full of advice that ranges from getting funding to how to value the company and sell it to how to hire your first employee. Contents: PART I: CULTURE AND VISION * PART II: THE WORK * PART III: NEW BUSINESS * PART IV: THE PEOPLE * PART V: MONEY * PART VI: OPERATIONS * PART VII: WHAT’S NEXT? February 2015 UK January 2015 US 352pp Hardback £15.99 / $30.00 / CN$34.50 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137279866

Michael Dru Kelley, Unconventional Partners, USA “Finally a marketing manual that puts theory into practice! Whether you manage or market a national brand or run a local business, Kelley offers a wealth of actionable ideas and best practices to stimulate your plan of attack in today’s mobile-centric marketplace.” - Kevin Reilly, Former Entertainment Chairman of the Fox Broadcasting Company “I loved the book! Going from the 2nd screen to the action screen will change your business while using mobile marketing.” - Michael Bowling, Fortune 20 Telecommunications Executive “Michael Kelley’s thoughtful, fast paced hands (I mean thumbs) on guide to getting mobile right is a must read for anyone with a need to connect with real people in 2014 and beyond!” - Stanley Hubbard, CEO, The REELZChannel

9781137279866

Consumer Brand Relationships further advances the understanding of consumers’ relationships with brands. The book discusses what brand relationship means and how to measure and manage brand relationships by compiling eleven chapters written by leading experts to provide an important contribution to a better understanding of brand relationships. Contents: Introduction: Brand Relationships Rule; Marc Fetscherin And Tobias Heilmann * PART I: LOVE AND BRAND RELATIONSHIPS * 1. The Role Of Brand Love In Consumer Brand Relationships; Noel Albert And Dwight Merunka * 2. Will You Defend Your Loved Brand? Brand Defense Superseding Advocacy; Mansoor Javed, Sanjit Roy, And Bano Mansoor * 3. Evolution Of Luxury Brand Love Intensity Over Time; Gachoucha Kretz * PART II: PERSONALITY AND SOCIAL GROUPS AND BRAND RELATIONSHIPS * 4. The Role Of Product Type And Personality In Brand Love Relationships; Ronald Voorn, Sabrina Hegner, And Ad Pruyn * 5. The Personality Of Brand Lovers: An Examination In Fashion Branding; Philipp Rauschnabel, Aaron Ahuvia, Björn Ivens, And Alexander Leischnig * 6. The Role Of Brands When Children Share Snack Time With Peers; Valérie Hémar-Nicolas, Mathilde Gollety, Coralie Damay, And Pascale Ezan * 7. Characteristics Of Consumers’ Brand Relationships With Hockey Teams; Samil Aledin * PART III: MEASURING AND MANAGING BRAND RELATIONSHIPS * 8. A New Consumer Brand Relationships Framework Based On A Grounded Theory Approach; Sreejesh S. And Subhadip Roy * 9. Creating Brand Equity And Brand Relationships In The Commodity Market; Antônio Santos Jr., Cid Gonçalves Filho, Euler Alves Brandão, And Gustavo Quiroga Souki * 10. Find Love: Discovering And Sustaining The Brand-Bond; Ryan Barker And Jeffrey Peacock * 11. Measuring And Managing Brand Love: The BERA Platform; Ryan Barker And Jeffrey Peacock May 2015 UK May 2015 US 272pp 47 b/w tables, 26 figures Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137427106

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

9781137427106

MARKETING Consumer Casualties

Digital Relevance

Exploring the Economics of Habit, Information, and Uncertainty in Japan

Developing Marketing Content and Strategies that Drive Results

Junmin Wan, Fukuoka University, Japan “A superb empirical attempt to analyze consumers’ addictions to smoking and gambling with a ‘natural experiment’ approach. The book contains rich and important implications for public policy, such as cigarette tax, disclosure of cigarette contents, and gambling regulations.” - Kazuo Ogawa, Professor, Institute of Social and Economic Research, Osaka University, Japan Junmin Wan takes a two prong approach to analysing this pressure in Japan in his new volume Consumer Casualties. He first clarifies the consumer preference for habit to identify useful approaches toward solving a number of economic issues, such as gambling and other addictive practices. Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. Rational Addiction with an Optimal Inventory: Theory and Evidence from Japanese Daily and Monthly Purchases * 3. Response to Health Information: Theory and Evidence from Cigarette Consumption and Intake of Nicotine and Tar in Japan * 4. Responses of Consumers to the Mandatory Disclosure of information: Evidence from Japanese Inter-brand Cigarette Sales * 5. Is Gambling Addictive? Evidence from Pachinko Participation, Quitting, and Re-Initiating * 6. Are Gambling and Smoking Complementary? Direct Tests from Japanese Individual Data * 7. Tax Revenue in China and the Incentive to Declare Taxes: The Lottery Receipt Experiment * 8. Is the Life-Cycle Model or Ono’s Model Most Suitable for the Japanese?: Analysis by Time-Series Data and Surveys of Lottery Purchase and Large-Prize Winners 90 * 9. Conclusions November 2014 UK November 2014 US 208pp 51 b/w tables, 29 figures Hardback £65.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137387240

9781137387240

Ardath Albee, Professional, USA ‘Indispensable! Digital Relevance is the new standard for digital marketers. It’s thorough, practical, and hype-free. Highly recommended!’ - Jay Baer, New York Times best-selling author of Youtility ‘Ardath Albee has a unique talent for blowing away the hype and hyperbole that plagues digital marketing. Digital Relevance is an important book because it’s a bright, clear call to specific action. It’s packed with authority and practical strategies and told with energy and attitude.’ - Doug Kessler, Creative Director and Co-Founder, Velocity Digital Relevance teaches readers the knowledge, strategies, and skills needed to create content, instantly engage customers, and compel them to action by sharing ideas so seamlessly matched to each audience’s context that they can’t help but take next steps toward purchase. Contents: PART I: STRATEGY - BUILDING THE FOUNDATION * PART II: DYNAMIC EXECUTION - PUT STRATEGY IN PLAY January 2015 UK January 2015 US 256pp Hardback £19.99 / $30.00 / CN$34.50 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137452801

9781137452801

Engaging Customers Using Big Data How Marketing Analytics Are Transforming Business Arvind Sathi, IBM, USA

Data Mining for Managers How to Use Data (Big and Small) to Solve Business Challenges Richard Boire, Independent Scholar, Canada ‘Boire provides a straightforward and disciplined overview of the practice of data mining. Whether you are dealing with large or small data sets, tomorrow’s business leaders will be the ones that extract the most value from their customer information. Boire leverages his extensive experience as a practitioner to help the reader take a measured approach while providing a unique view of data mining.’ - Bryan Pearson, President and Chief Executive Officer, LoyaltyOne Big Data is a growing business trend, but there little advice available on how to use it practically. Written by a data mining expert with over 30 years of experience, this book uses case studies to help marketers, brand managers and IT professionals understand how to capture and measure data for marketing purposes. Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. Growth of Data Mining and the Data Miner * 3. Using Data Mining for CRM Evaluation * 4. The Data Mining Process * 5. Identification of the Business Problem or Challenge * 6. Creation of the Analytical File * 7. Creation of the Analytical File and Pivot Table * 8. Using External Data Sources * 9. Data Storage and Security * 10. Privacy Concerns Regarding the Use of Data * 11. Types and Quality of Data * 12. Segmentation * 13. Applying Data Mining Techniques * 14. GAINS CHARTS * 15. Using RFM as one Targeting Option * 16. The use of Multivariate Analysis Techniques * 17. Using data mining for identifying actions vs. targeted segments/lists * 18. Tracking and Measuring * 19. Implementation and Tracking * 20. Developing an Overall Segmentation Strategy * and more.... October 2014 UK October 2014 US 256pp Hardback £26.99 / $50.00 / CN$57.50 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137406170

9781137406170

Data is transforming how and where we market to our customers. Using a series of case studies from pioneers, this book will describe how each marketing function is undergoing fundamental changes, and provides practical guidance about how companies can learn the tools and techniques to take advantage of marketing analytics. Contents: PART I: INTRODUCTION * PART II: DISRUPTIVE FORCES * PART III: PIONEERS * PART IV: PROPOSITION 1 - BIG DATA MEANS A LOT MORE OBSERVATIONS * PART V: PROPOSITION 2 - AUTOMATION AND SOCIAL MEDIA * PART VI: PROPOSITION 3 - PERSONALIZED MARKETING * PART VII: TECHNOLOGICAL ENABLERS * PART VIII: SKILLS REQUIREMENTS - DATA SCIENTISTS AND DATA ENGINEERS * PART IX: WHERE ARE WE HEADED? July 2014 UK July 2014 US 240pp 13 figures Hardback £19.99 / $30.00 / CN$34.50 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137386182

9781137386182

MARKETING Marketing to the 90s Generation

The Mindful Marketer

Global Data on Society, Consumption, and Identity

How to Stay Present and Profitable in a Data-Driven World

Anders Parment, Stockholm University, Sweden Marketing to the 90s Generation is based on original research conducted by sociologists and psychologists on generational cohorts, how they come about, what defines them and what it means to society, its institutions and companies. Contents: 1. The 90s Generation * 2. Introduction to Generational Studies * 3. The 90s Generation and Society * 4. The Market Environment * 5. The Cultural Environment * 6. Generation Y as Consumers and Coworkers

December 2014 UK December 2014 US 208pp 46 figures, 3 b/w tables Hardback £34.50 / $55.00 / CN$62.99 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137444295

9781137444295

‘In this fast-paced, high powered, tech driven economy, mindfulness is a competitive advantage. In The Mindful Marketer, Lisa Nirell helps you align hearts, minds, and actions. This is the secret sauce to connecting with customers.’ - Guy Kawasaki, Chief evangelist of Canva, former chief evangelist of Apple ‘Read this book, love it, do what needs doing, and then secretly hide the best and most important lessons you learn here in other people’s ‘numbers’ marketing…Be the secret revolution.’ - Chris Brogan, New York Times bestselling author and publisher ‘Reading The Mindful Marketer will not only assure a more effective, relevant, and inspired marketing organization in the future; it will also set the groundwork for a more creative and successful present. Brilliant!’ - Marshall Goldsmith, author of The New York Times global bestseller What Got You Here Won’t Get You There As marketing leaders look for ways to evolve from order takers to market makers, Nirell shows managers the more contextual, intuitive and innovative dimensions of marketing. The Mindful Marketer provides marketers with a powerful nexus between data-fueled analytic thinking and creative, immensely human approaches to marketing.

Measuring Customer Experience How to Develop and Execute the Most Profitable Customer Experience Strategies Philipp Klaus, Dr. Phil Klaus & Associates Consulting, UK ‘Phil knows what it takes to win. And that is exactly what Measuring Customer Experience provides to managers who want their companies to win through building strong relationships with customers.’ -Timothy Keiningham, PhD, Global Chief Strategy Officer and Executive Vice President, Ipsos Loyalty; Bestselling Author of The Wallet Allocation Rule and Why Loyalty Matters Now, more than ever, customer experience plays a pivotal role in the success and longevity of a company. Based on rigorous scientific tools and global data, this book offers a simple but thorough guide on how to master the challenges of the market, and how to deliver superior performance through effective customer experience management. Contents: 1. CX: the origins and importance for your business * 2. CX strategies and management practices * 3. The 5 dimensions of CX management * 4. The 3 types of CX management practice * 5. Linking practices to profitability * 6. Your CX management balance sheet: where are you and where do you want to be? How to get from A (current state) to B – a step-by-step approach. * 7. The devil is in the details - only what get measured gets managed * 8. Best practice versus next practice * 9. Concluding thoughts December 2014 UK January 2015 US 180pp 6 figures, 12 b/w tables Hardback £24.99 / $40.00 / CN$46.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137375452

Lisa Nirell, EnergizeGrowth® LLC, USA

October 2014 UK September 2014 US 240pp Hardback £18.99 / $28.00 / CN$32.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137386298

9781137386298

Online Marketing and Big Data Exploration Ian Chaston, University of Auckland, New Zealand Understanding new strategic approaches is provided by examining how the online world is being exploited by organisations in sectors of a modern economy such retailing, healthcare and the public sector in terms of creating new forms of competitive advantage as a consequence of the advent of mobile technology and online social networks. Contents: 1. The Online World * 2. Big Data and Analytics * 3. Opportunities * 4. Technology * 5. Capabilities * 6. i-Strategy * 7. Marketing Mix * 8. Websites * 9. Social Media * 10. Blog, Tweets and Apps * 11. Online Retailing * 12. Online Service Firms * 13. Public Sector Online * 14. Online Governance * 15. Future Innovation Opportunities February 2015 UK February 2015 US 296pp 29 figures Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137488947

9781137488947

9781137375452

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

MARKETING Place Branding through Phases of the Image

Taking Down Goliath

Balancing Image and Substance

Digital Marketing Strategies for Beating Competitors with 100 Times Your Spending Power

Staci M. Zavattaro, Mississippi State University, USA “Zavattaro’s book makes a useful and well written contribution to the on-going issue of the link between identity/reality and image; substance and communication. Above all, the philosophical and public administration perspectives are welcome and should be digested by students, academics and particularly practitioners.” - Robert Govers, Independent Place Branding Advisor; Joint Editor, Place Branding and Public Diplomacy In Place Branding through Phases of the Image, Zavattaro explains how city promotional strategies can take the place of corporate governance structures through phases of the image. Contents: 1. Utilizing Philosophy in Place Branding * 2. Laying the Foundations * 3. Putting it All Together: The Framework * 4. Examples in Practice * 5. Implications of the Framework * 6. A Guide for Managers August 2014 UK August 2014 US 204pp 8 photographs, 3 b/w tables, 2 figures Hardback £62.50 / $100.00 / CN$115.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137394439

9781137394439

Kevin Ryan, Professional, Rob “Spider” Graham, Professional 'What makes this book invaluable is its unrelenting focus on the ‘why’ (not just the ‘how’) of digital marketing. That, and inspiring interviews with reallife Davids who have leveraged digital tools to make a real difference in their careers, their businesses and their lives make this plain-English book downright inspirational!' - Rebecca Lieb, Industry Analyst, The Altimeter Group and author of Content Marketing ‘My job is helping the Fortune 1000 survive the digital revolution, and that just got harder! This book doesn’t just tell you what to do to compete effectively as a little guy. It walks you through the process—providing clear and effective instruction.’ - Stefan Tornquist, Vice President, Research Econsultancy Advances in software, auction-based media, analytics, and big data have made it possible for the average marketer to compete with marketers with 100 times the spending power. Taking Down Goliath profiles the ways in which digital marketing can level the playing field, if you know how to use it. December 2014 UK November 2014 US 256pp Hardback £19.99 / $30.00 / CN$34.50 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137444202

Running across Europe

9781137444202

The Rise and Size of one of the Largest Sport Markets Edited by Jeroen Scheerder, University of Leuven, Belgium, Koen Breedveld, Radboud University, the Netherlands Analysing in-depth data from 11 European countries, this collection explores the rise of the European running market, the reasons and motives for running, and the most important players in the field. The volume sets out policy challenges and marketing possibilities and addresses issues of participation, cost and health. Contents: 1. Who is Doing a Run with the Running Boom? The Growth and Governance of one of Europe’s most Popular Sport Activities; Jeroen Scheerder, Koen Breedveld and Julie Borgers * 2. Belgium (Flanders): Trends and Governance in Running; Julie Borgers, Steven Vos and Jeroen Scheerder * 3. Denmark: Running for the sake of Running? A Profile and Segmentation of Runners; Peter Forsberg * 4. England: the Governance and History of Running, the Decision to Run, and Trends in Running Participation; Andrew Spiers, Spencer Harris, Angela Charlton and Peter Smale * 5. Finland: from Elite Running to Mass Running Events; Hanna Vehmas and Jukka Lahti * 6. Germany: Running Participation, Motivation and Images; Kirstin Hallmann, Christoph Breuer and Sören Dallmeyer * 7. Greece: Mass Running, a New Trend from Ancient Times?; Leonidas Petridis * 8. Hungary: the Popularisation and Expansion of Amateur Running Culture; Szilvia Perényi * 9. The Netherlands: Rising Participation Rates, Shifting Segments; Paul Hover, Harold van der Werff and Koen Breedveld * 10. Slovenia: the Case of Ljubljana Marathon Participants; Mojca Doupona Topič and Samo Rauter * 11. Spain: a Sociological Analysis of the Evolution and Characteristics of Running; Ramon Llopig-Goig and Anna Vilanova * 12. Running across Europe: the Way Forward; Koen Breedveld, Jeroen Scheerder and Julie Borgers January 2015 UK January 2015 US 240pp 46 b/w tables, 74 figures Hardback £65.00 / $100.00 / CN$115.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137446367

9781137446367

Tourism Management, Marketing, and Development Volume I: The Importance of Networks and ICTs Edited by Marcello M. Mariani, University of Bologna, Italy, Rodolfo Baggio, Bocconi University, Italy, Dimitrios Buhalis, Bournemouth University, UK, Christian Longhi, French National Centre for Scientific Research (CNRS) and the University of Nice Sophia Antipolis, France Tourism Management, Marketing, and Development revolves around the implementation of ICT applications in the tourism sector: technology is engendering a major shift both in the performance of individuals and companies involved in the tourism sector and having an impact on the way individuals consume services and enjoy experiences in space and time. Contents: PART I: ICT AND TOURISM * PART II: TOURISM SYSTEMS AND NETWORKS September 2014 UK September 2014 US 276pp 13 b/w tables, 18 figures Hardback £72.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137368652

9781137368652

MARKETING Trendology

Why People (Don’t) Buy

Building an Advantage Through Data-Driven Real-Time Marketing

The Go and Stop Signals for Consumers

Chris Kerns, Author, USA ‘Real-time marketing isn’t about competing for the moment. It’s about winning in every moment. This book demonstrates how creativity, serendipity, and data will help you build a winning foundation, team, and strategy to thrive in a real-time world.’ - Brian Solis, Digital Analyst, Anthropologist, and author of What’s the Future of Business? (WTF) In this, the first data-driven guide to real time marketing, Chris Kerns outlines the value of RTM via a comprehensive social data performance analysis. He lays out best practices for measuring RTM, injects a data-driven mindset into every step of its methodology, and shows how marketers can grow RTM into a daily win for brands across the globe. Contents: Introduction * Chapter 1: Relevance is Trending Up * Chapter 2: Understanding Brands on Twitter * Chapter 3: RTM Performance for Big, Known Events * Chapter 4: RTM Performance for Unknown Events and Daily Trends * Chapter 5: Laying a Data-Driven Foundation for Real-Time * Chapter 6: Aiming for Real-Time Success * Chapter 7: The DataDriven RTM Process * Chapter 8: The Future of RTM * Chapter 9: Conclusion November 2014 UK November 2014 US 256pp Hardback £19.99 / $30.00 / CN$34.50 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137479556

9781137479556

Full of practical diagrams and maps, as well as international case studies, this book offers a unique and extensively-tested ‘GO-STOP Signal Framework’, which allows managers to better understand why consumers are not buying their products and what can be done to put this right. Contents: 1. THE 100 CALORIES PARADOX * The GO-STOP Signal Framework * 2. JC PENNEY: THE FAIR AND SQUARE STRATEGY * Removing Price Promotions Can Strengthen the STOP signal * 3. TATA NANO: THE CHEAPEST CAR * Low Price Can Weaken the GO Signal * 4. HEDGEHOGS AND FOXES * Mispredicting Consumer Behavior * 5. UNDER-PRICED NYC RESTAURANTS * When Does Low Price Weaken the GO Signal? * 6. DID CREDIT CARDS MAKE AMERICA FAT? * Unintended Consequences of Technology * 7. IS $451,563 SMALLER THAN $450,000? * Heuristic Inferences * 8. PAYING FOR MEDICINES AND TICKLE-ME ELMO * Unfairness Cues Strengthen the STOP Signal * 9. WHY PAYING PEOPLE TO DONATE BLOOD DOESN’T PAY * Monetary Incentives Can Weaken the GO Signal * 10. BEHAVIORAL AUDIT FOR STRATEGIC DECISIONS * Measuring GO AND STOP signals May 2015 UK June 2015 US 232pp 8 b/w tables, 22 figures, 11 b/w line drawings Hardback £21.99 / $35.00 / CN$40.00 9781137466679 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137466679

Advertising Confluence Transitioning Marketing Communications into Social Movements

Why Marketing to Women Doesn’t Work Using Market Segmentation to Understand Consumer Needs Jenny Darroch, Peter F. Drucker and Masatoshi Ito, Graduate School of Management, USA ‘Industries that continue to market to women in the traditional manner are headed for failure. As such, Jenny’s book is a timely and relevant piece. Her insightful recommendations and thoughtful research make for a compelling read and serve as a guideline for improved marketing practice - to both genders.’ -Krista Lee Berger, Senior Marketing Manager, Fortune 500 Company Why Marketing to Women Doesn't Work addresses the challenges and subtleties behind marketing to women and confronts the idea that gender alone can be used as an indicator to target your market. Darroch provides practical insights into market segmentation and recommends a new approach that focuses on targeting human needs, not gender, in order to reach female customers. Contents: 1. Introduction * PART I: DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MEN AND WOMEN * 2. Demographic Differences Between Men and Women * 3. Psychographic and Behavioral Differences Between Men and Women * PART II: MARKET SEGMENTATION THEORY AND PRACTICE * 4. An Introduction To Market Segmentation Theory and Practice * 5. Understanding Our Products * 6. Understanding Our Customers * 7. The Bridge * 8. Ansoff’s Growth Matrix – In Detail * 9. The Problems-SolutionsTM Framework * PART III: MARKETING TO WOMEN * 10. How to More Effectively Market to Women * 11. Masculine and Feminine * 12. Conclusions July 2014 UK July 2014 US 254pp 41 b/w tables, 30 figures Hardback £22.99 / $35.00 / CN$40.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137358165

Amitav Chakravarti, London School of Economics, UK, Manoj Thomas, Cornell University, USA

Edited by Anshu Arora, Savannah State University, USA, Sabine Bacouël-Jentjens, ISC Paris Business School, France Advertising Confluence offers a unique blend of both traditional and contemporary social media thinking about advertising and integrated brand promotions from both the developed and emerging world. Contents: Foreword; John R McIntyre * 1. From Lipophilia to Lipophobia: The Role of Moral Entrepreneurs; Anne-Sophie Bacouel and Sabine Bacouel-Jentjens * 2. Creative Advertising Appeals on Global Cultural Spectrum; John Hudson and Anshu S. Arora * 3. Polysemy in Advertising: A Study of the Effects of Advertising Messages on Decision Making; William Chasteen and Shalonda Bradford * 4. Does the Country-of-Origin Matter for Cosmetics? The ‘Made In France’ Argument; Manon Rebufet, Leila Loussaief, and Sabine Bacouel-Jentjens * 5. Brand Diffusions and Brand Naming Strategies; Eric Billinger and Amit Arora * 6. Say It without Saying It: How Consumers Interpret ‘Tropes’ in Advertising and Its Impact on Campaign Success; Jamin Gordon and Jun Wu * 7. How ‘True’ are Stereotypes? The Role of Stereotypes in Advertising; Grace Curry, Ulysses J. Brown, III, Jun Wu, and Anshu S. Arora * 8. The Value of Social Networks in the World of Advertising; April Harris and Reginald Leseane * Afterword; Lisa Yount

International Marketing and Management Research December 2014 UK December 2014 US 112pp 15 b/w illustrations, 20 b/w tables Hardback £45.00 / $67.50 / CN$78.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137492241

9781137492241

9781137358165

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

MARKETING Marketing Big Oil

Journal of Direct, Data and Digital Marketing Practice

Brand Lessons from the World’s Largest Companies Mark L. Robinson, Capitol Hill Communications LLC, USA ‘With Robinson’s background in oil, and his extensive travels around the world, this book offers a balanced view of an industry which has traditionally focused on engineering obstacles and price gyrations rather than endearing themselves to the consumer.’ Christopher G. Nicholson, Founder, Deloitte Global Energy and Resources, USA Marketing Big Oil begins with an historical perspective looking at how Big Oil came to be and then analyzes the marketing and corporate branding programs of these oil titans to demonstrate what does and doesn’t work, showing us how even the largest companies sometimes fail to get their message across. Contents: PART I: FROM STANDARD OIL TO BIG OIL * 1. Big Oil and the Love-Hate Relationship * 2. The Oil Refining Era: 1863 – 1869 * 3. The Standard Oil Empire Reigns Supreme: 1870 – 1900 * 4. The End of One Oil Empire and the Beginning of Another:1905 – 1911 * 5. The Arrogant and Aloof Oil Company * PART II: MANAGING THE BRAND CRISIS * 6. How BP Destroyed a Corporate Brand * 7. The Exxon Valdez: A Failure in Brand Crisis Leadership * 8. Shell versus Greenpeace and Brent Spar * 9. The Tarnished BP Brand: From Texas City to Price Fixing * 10. Chevron vs. Ecuador: How a Strong Brand Defends Itself * 11. A ‘Shell’ Game for Investors * PART III: MARKETING STRATEGIES AND BRAND BUILDING * 12. Marketing and Advertising Innovation at Mobil Oil * 13. The Brand Disconnect Between BP and ‘Beyond Petroleum’ * 14. Chevron and the Evolution of Human Energy * 15. Brand Building at Shell Oil * PART IV: BIG OIL AND THE ERA OF CONSUMER ENGAGEMENT * 16. Building Loyalty: Improving the Retail Fueling Experience * 17. Communicating With the Masses: Big Oil and Social Media * PART V: CONCLUDING REMARKS

July 2014 UK July 2014 US 132pp 8 b/w tables Hardback £45.00 / $67.50 / CN$78.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137389169

David Reed, The IDM, UK The official Journal of the Institute for Direct and Digital Marketing, this is an indispensable resource for senior marketing managers seeking awareness of new marketing concepts, strategies and applications from around the world.

EISSN: 17460174 For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/dddmp

Journal of Financial Services Marketing Tina Harrison, The University of Edinburgh Business School, UK Journal of Financial Services Marketing has become one of the world’s leading forums for the latest thinking, techniques and developments in marketing financial services. This journal has established itself as a key bridge between applied academic research and commercial best practice, globally.

9781137389169

Corporate Reputation Review Charles Fombrun, Reputation Institute, New York University, USA, Cees B. M. van Riel, Erasmus University, the Netherlands An intelligent and stimulating mix of industry surveys, leading-edge thinking, robust research and latest and best practice to address the key questions of how corporate reputations impact on a company’s performance and its value; how corporate reputation can be measured; and how it can be managed.

ISSN: 13630539 / EISSN:14791846 For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/fsm

Journal of Marketing Analytics Tom Breur, VP Data Analytics, Boston MA and Bruce Weinberg, Isenberg School of Management, University of Massachusetts, Amherst, USA The Journal of Marketing Analytics brings together applied research and practice papers on topics like targeting, segmentation, big data, customer loyalty and lifecycle management, cross-selling, CRM, data quality management, multi-channel marketing, and marketing strategy.

ISSN: 13633589 / EISSN:14791889 For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/crr ISSN: 20503318 / EISSN:20503326 For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/jma

OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT Cluster-Based Industrial Development:

OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

The Handbook of Global Outsourcing and Offshoring 3rd edition 3rd edition Ilan Oshri, Loughborough University, UK, Julia Kotlarsky, Aston University, UK, Leslie P. Willcocks, London School of Economics, London, UK Praise for the first two editions: “Written by outstanding academics wellrecognized for their expertise on the topic, this long-awaited book is a must have to anybody embarking on the process of global sourcing or seeking to enhance their existing knowledge. It provides a comprehensive conceptual overview of three crucial aspects of global sourcing – strategy, governance, and daily management – supplemented by well-researched case study and lively examples.” – Professor Natalia Levina, NYU Stern School of Business “In a truly globalized world, customers are looking not just at delivery excellence from service providers, but also at global execution capabilities. Outsourcing providers need to look beyond standardized services to include innovation and transformation capabilities. This requires providers to focus on the customer’s business, understand the issues and then provide solutions. This book provides a very good customer-centric view of how providers need to approach the market.” – Girish Ramachandran, President - Global Head/ Strategic Business and Head: Middle East and Africa, Tata Consultancy Services Ltd “Outsourcing and offshoring are commonplace terms, but they’re often poorly understood and inexpertly practiced. Yet there is much ‘out’ left in ‘sourcing,’ and even more ‘off’ ahead of us in ‘shoring.’ This book is an intelligent user’s manual – essential reading for those starting out as well as those who find they may have strayed off course.” – Dr John Hindle, Senior Manager, Global Marketing, Accenture “’Out of sight but not out of mind’ could well be the motto of this book. It is a must read for those studying the global phenomenon and those in managing outsourcing relationships. The frustrations and rising costs experienced by many can and need to be avoided and this book goes a long way in providing insights drawn from real-world experience in reducing the risks.” – Professor Robert D. Galliers, Bentley College “Sourcing optimization is a key strategic lever being deployed by global corporations as they adapt to the challenging business and economic climate. Sourcing practitioners will find this book a useful guide in terms of avoiding the common pitfalls that impact the success of such initiatives. The examples used are free of jargon, drawn from real-life situations and easy to relate to.” – Srikanth Iyengar, Associate Vice President, Global Head of Business Development, SGS, Infosys Technologies Limited Now in its third edition, this is the only outsourcing and offshoring book to offer a broad but coherent guide to the strategy, operations and management of ITO and BPO outsourcing and offshoring, from how to source new relationships to managing business processes in a national and global context. Contents: Introduction * PART I: MAKING A SOURCING DECISION * 1. Overview of the Global Sourcing Marketplace * 2. Sourcing Models: What and When to Outsource or Offshore * 3. Country Attractiveness for Outsourcing and Captive Centres * 4. The Attractiveness of Western Countries for Outsourcing Services * PART II: BUILDING SOURCING COMPETENCIES * 5. Supplier Core Capabilities and Strategies for Sustainability and Growth * 6. Leveraging Knowledge and Expertise * 7. The Client Perspective: Vendor Selection Strategy, Retained Management Capabilities * PART III: MANAGING SOURCING RELATIONSHIPS * 8. Legal Issues in Outsourcing and Offshoring * 9. The IT Outsourcing Life Cycle and the Transition Phase * 10. Governance of Outsourcing Projects * 11. Managing Globally Distributed Teams * 12. High Performance BPO * 13. Shared Service Centres * 14 . Cloud Computing * 15. Innovation Through Sourcing * Teaching Case – Norwich Union and IBM January 2015 UK February 2015 US 320pp 36 figures, 35 b/w tables Hardback £32.00 / $50.00 / CN$57.50 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137437426

KAIZEN Management for MSE Growth in Developing Countries Tetsushi Sonobe, Foundation for Advanced Studies on International Development and Professor, National Graduate Institute of Policy Studies, Japan, Keijiro Otsuka, National Graduate Institute for Policy Studies, Tokyo, Japan Cluster-Based Industrial Development attempts to provide an effective strategy for industrial development based on the KAIZEN management training experiments conducted in Ghana, Kenya, Ethiopia, Vietnam, and Tanzania. We focus on micro and small enterprises (MSEs) in industrial clusters, because clusters consisting of MSEs are ubiquitous and have high potential to grow. Contents: 1. Introduction * PART I: MANAGEMENT, INNOVATIONS, AND ENTERPRISE GROWTH * 2. Innovation and Cluster Development * 3. Management and Innovations * PART II: IMPACTS OF MANAGEMENT TRAINING * 4. The Large but Varying Effects of Basic Management Training in a Metalworking Cluster in Kumasi, Ghana * 5. Improved Performance of Small but Trained Firms in a Metalworking Cluster in Nairobi, Kenya * 6. Effects of Classroom and Onsite Training in a Metalworking Cluster in Addis Ababa, Ethiopia * 7. Increasing Interests in Management Training in a Knitwear Village in Hatay, Vietnam * 8. Spillover Effects of Management Training in a Garment Cluster in Dar es Salaam, Tanzania * 9. Management Training for Micro Entrepreneurs in a Garment Cluster in Addis Ababa, Ethiopia * PART III: TOWARDS A STRATEGY FOR MSE DEVELOPMENT * 10. New Industrial Policy: KAIZEN Management Training as a Key to Cluster-Based Development November 2014 UK November 2014 US 288pp 59 b/w tables, 16 figures Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$132.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137384690

9781137384690

Dynamic Systems in Management Science Design, Estimation and Control; Volume 1 Alexis Lazaridis, Retired, Greece Dynamic Systems in Management Science explores the important gaps in the existing literature on operations research and management science by providing new and operational methods which are tested in practical environment and a variety of new applications. Contents: PART I * 1. Prerequisites For Contemporary Econometrics And Systems Modelling * PART II * 2. The Classical Linear Model. Specific Computations * 3. Dummy Or Control Variables And Additional Tests * PART III * 4. Basic Assumptions Of System Models: Further Considerations * 5. Extension Of The Usual System Models * PART IV * 6. Advanced Time Series Modelling * 7. Health Service Modelling And Multiple-Equations Models * PART V * 8. Simultaneous Equation Models And Dynamic Systems * 9. Optimal Control Of Linear Dynamic Systems * 10. Optimal Control Of Dynamic Systems With Random Parameters April 2015 UK April 2015 US 224pp 32 figures, 55 b/w tables, 14 graphs Hardback £75.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137508904

9781137508904

9781137437426

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT Developments in Strategic and Public Management

Maritime Economics & Logistics Hercules E Haralambides, Center for Maritime Economics and Logistics, Erasmus University Rotterdam, the Netherlands

Studies in the US and Europe Edited by Paul Joyce, Birmingham City Business School, Birmingham City University, UK, John Bryson, Hubert H. Humphreys School of Public Affairs, University of Minnesota, USA, Marc Holzer, School of Public Affairs and Administration, Rutgers University, USA Through contemporary case studies of strategic management at work in the US and Europe, this collection shows that it can no longer be seen as a discipline for long term decisions but has become a central feature of the public sector. Individual chapters offer insights into strategic management capabilities at the national and sub-national level. Contents: PART I: STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT PROCESSES AND INTEGRATION WITH MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS * PART II: STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT – INNOVATION AND REFORM * PART III: CITY GOVERNMENTS * PART IV: NETWORKS AND STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT

Maritime Economics & Logistics is a quarterly scientific journal committed to the rigorous methodological analysis of global supply chains; that is, ocean transportation, ports, marine terminals and maritime logistics.

ISSN: 14792931 / EISSN:1479294X For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/mel

Governance and Public Management October 2014 UK October 2014 US 328pp 9 figures, 24 b/w tables Hardback £68.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137336965

Agent-based Modeling and Simulation Edited by Simon Taylor, Department of Computer Science, Brunel University, UK OR covers a wide range of topics and areas, significantly agent-based modelling and simulation which is the focus of this book. Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. Tutorial on Agent-based Modelling and Simulation * 3. Some Insights into the Emergence of Agent-based Modelling * 4. Discrete-event Simulation is Alive and Kicking! * 5. An Application of Agent-based Simulation to the Management of Hospital-acquired Infection * 6. An Agentbased Simulation Approach for the New Product Diffusion of a Novel Biomass Fuel * 7. Agent-based Modelling and Simulation of Urban Evacuation: Relative Effectiveness of Simultaneous and Staged Evacuation Strategies * 8. Towards the Development of a Simulator for Investigating the Impact of People Management Practices on Retail Performance * 9. A Multi-agent Simulation of the Pharmaceutical Supply Chain * 10. Workflow Scheduling Using Multi-agent Systems in a Dynamically Changing Environment * 11. Credit Risk: An Agent-based Model of Post-credit Decision Actions and Credit Losses in Banks * 12. The Hybrid War Model: A Complex Adaptive Model of Complex Urban Conflict * 13. The Development of New Infantry Tactics During the Early Eighteenth Century: A Computer Simulation Approach to Modern Military History * 14. A Generic Testing Framework for Agent-based Simulation Models * 15. Successful Approaches for Teaching Agent-based Simulation

OR Essentials August 2014 UK August 2014 US 336pp 78 figures, 30 b/w tables, 10 b/w line drawings Hardback £75.00 / $120.00 / CN$138.00 9781137453624 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137453624

Follow Palgrave Macmillan on Facebook®. ‘Like’ our Facebook® page to get the latest news, reviews and event invites.

for the latest news, events and competitions

www.facebook.com/PalgraveMacmillan

www.twitter.com/PalgraveBiz

@PalgraveBiz

ORGANIZATION STUDIES Core-Periphery Relations and Organization Studies

ORGANIZATION STUDIES

Beyond Inclusion Worklife Interconnectedness, Energy, and Resilience in Organizations J. Goosby Smith, Pepperdine University, USA, Josie Bell Lindsay, Bell & Lindsay, Inc. “In Beyond Inclusion, J. Goosby Smith and Josie Bell Lindsay draw on years of experience and extensive conversations to offer a road map for making diversity meaningful, and for transforming best intentions into best practices. You’d be hardpressed to find a more thoughtful or compassionate prescription for creating truly inclusive organizations.” - President Bill Clinton, USA “Smith and Lindsay offer a highly practical examination of workplace inclusion that presses past convention and offers a compelling new standard. Unwilling to view inclusion as merely a goal, they illustrate how it can be a driving force for organizations. Those interested in maximizing contributions from employees at all levels and being part of an organization with real staying power should read this book.” - James J. Dunne III, Senior Managing Principal, Sandler O’Neill + Partners, L.P. "I was moved. How do we achieve the value inherent in one-ness within our own circles of life, in an age where self-responsibility and self-actualization is all the rage? Combining the logic of the author’s extensive research and the spirit that flows from the mind-opening Ubuntu paradigm, Smith and Lindsay present a practical, highly motivating course. The call is often for diversity, yet it is true inclusion that transforms the puzzle pieces into the portrait.” Thomas A. Waltermire, CEO, Team Northeast Ohio Beyond Inclusion adopts a holistic and systems view of the organization, presents a behavioral model of organizational inclusion based upon research with thousands of employees, and discusses elements of organizational design that need to be adjusted to create, nurture, and sustain an inclusive culture. Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. Ubuntu * 3. The Research * 4. Connection * 5. Intrapersonal Inclusion * 6. Communication * 7. Mentoring and Coaching * 8. Care * 9. Fairness and Trust * 10. Visibility and Reward * 11. External Stakeholders * 12. Ubuntu in Action August 2014 UK August 2014 US 232pp 11 figures, 2 b/w tables Hardback £31.50 / $50.00 / CN$57.50 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137385413

9781137385413

Clout Finding and Using Power at Work Eric Bolland, Viterbo College, USA Clout will be the first comprehensive examination of the role of clout in explaining organizational decision making. Contents: Preface * 1. A Framework for Clout * 2. Evidence from the Trenches and Uncovering Power * 3. The Eight Bases of Power * 4. Front Line Views on Power * 5. Executives on Power * 6. Problematic, Disruptive Power and Ethics * 7. Your Path to Power * 8. Conclusions * 9. Future of Power * Index

Edited by Robert Westwood, Newcastle business School, Australia, Gavin Jack, Graduate School of Management, La Trobe University, Australia, Farzad Khan, Karachi School for Business and Leadership, Pakistan, Michal Frenkel, The Hebrew University of Jerusalem, Israel Core-Periphery Relations and Organization Studies draws together postcolonial and indigenous thinking through the conceptual lens of core-periphery relations to advance debate in organization studies. A particular aim of this book is to broaden, deepen and critically reassert a postcolonial imagination in this domain. Contents: 1. Situating Core-Peripheral Knowledge in Management and Organisation Studies; Robert Westwood, Gavin Jack, Farzad Rafi Khan and Michal Frenkel * 2. Can the Periphery Write Back? Periphery-to-Center Knowledge Flows in Multinationals based in Developing and Emerging Economies; Michal Frenkel * 3. De-centering Management and Organisation Studies: On the Eccentricity of US-based Management and Organisation Theory and Practice; Robert Westwood * 4. Recontextualizing the new Institutional Conception of the State to the Turkish Case; Sükrü Özen * 5. The Historical Trajectory of a Peripheral National Business System; Maria Kapsali and Rea Prouska * 6. Governing the Global Periphery: Socio-economic Development in Service of the Global Core; Sammy K. Bonsu * 7. Transforming the Institutional Logic of the Centre through Indigenous Wisdom; Maria Humphries and Amy Klemm Verbos * 8. ‘He Apiti Hono, He Tātai Hono’: Ancestral Leadership, Cyclical Learning and the Eternal Continuity of Leadership; Dara Kelly, Brad Jackson and Manuka Henare * 9. Voices that Matter: Speaking up for the ‘Indigenous’ in Business Education; Diane Ruwhiu * 10. Sorry, the Network Society has already been Invented: Why Management Education needs Indigenous Input; Bob Hodge * 11. Conclusion: Carrying Across the Line; Robert Westwood, Gavin Jack, Farzad Rafi Khan and Michal Frenkel August 2014 UK August 2014 US 272pp 5 b/w tables, 2 b/w illustrations, 1 figure Hardback £70.00 / $115.00 / CN$132.00 9781137309044 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137309044

Corporate Culture in Multinational Companies A Japanese Perspective Victoria Miroshnik, Tokyo International University, Japan, Dipak Basu, Nagasaki University, Japan Corporate Culture in Multinational Companies explores the value component of corporate culture of companies and their relationship with production efficiency and personal values of the employee. The authors combine both qualitative analysis of the experiences of leaders of these organizations and the most advanced quantitative analysis regarding the corporate performances. Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. Corporate Culture: Concepts and Issues * 3. Japanese Management System: Macro- and MicroLevel Perspectives * 4. Role of Corporate Culture in Production Efficiency * 5. Role of Corporate Culture: ‘The 40 Samurais’ * 6. Role of Corporate Culture in a Major Japanese MNCs: Shogun One * 7. Role of Corporate Culture in a Major Japanese MNCs: Shogun Two * 8. International Experiences of Corporate Culture of Major Japanese MNCs * 9. Corporate Culture at Highest Level: Governance * 10. Analysis of Corporate Culture In Japanese Management Model * 11. Conclusion October 2014 UK October 2014 US 224pp 3 figures, 50 b/w tables Hardback £67.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137447647

9781137447647

August 2014 UK August 2014 US 252pp 2 line drawings, 1 colour illustration, 5 charts Hardback £41.00 / $65.00 / CN$69.00 9781137350589 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137350589

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

ORGANIZATION STUDIES Dialogue in Organizations Developing Relational Leadership

Industrial and Organizational Psychology Help the Vulnerable

Megan Reitz, Ashridge Business School, UK

Serving the Underserved

In politics, business and society, ‘better’ leadership and dialogue are seen as antidotes to the paradoxical issues of the modern world. This book illustrates how the compulsion for ‘busyness’, the assumptions about who leaders are and the adherence to implicitly-held cultural norms threaten the possibility of effective dialogue in organizations. Contents: INTRODUCTION * 1. RELATIONAL LEADERSHIP AND DIALOGUE: A GAP IN KNOWLEDGE * 2. RELATIONAL LEADERSHIP AND DIALOGUE: APPLYING AN ACTION RESEARCH APPROACH * 3. PRESENCE: THE TYRRANY OF ‘BUSYNESS’ AND ITS AFFECT ON RELATIONAL LEADERSHIP AND DIALOGUE * 4. RULES OF THE GAME AND FAÇADE: ‘Being’ rather than ‘seeming’ * 5. POWER AND JUDGEMENTS: Leader-follower mutuality * 6. DIALOGUE: Sensing relational encounter amidst complexity * 7. TOWARDS A THEORY OF LEADER-FOLLOWER ENCOUNTER * 8. RELATIONAL LEADERSHIP AND DIALOGUE: A PERSONAL REFLECTION * 9. REFERENCES March 2015 UK March 2015 US 272pp 22 b/w tables, 27 figures Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$138.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137489104

9781137489104

The Growth of Chinese Electronics Firms Globalization and Organizations Koichiro Kimura, Inter-disciplinary Studies Center, Institute of Developing Economies (IDE), Japan The Growth of Chinese Electronics Firms outlines the way firms grow in China at an organizational level. Kimura uses China’s electronics industry as a case study for measuring technology-fuelled growth and provides a way to understand diversified the growth process systematically. Contents: Introduction * 1. Survey and Framework * 2. Outlook * 3. Technology Gap * 4. Diversification Mechanism * 5. Model * 6. Challenge for Overseas Expansion * Conclusions

Edited by Walter Reichman, Retired, USA Industrial and Organizational Psychology Help the Vulnerable documents a new direction for industrial and organizational psychology. The chapters are written by psychologists who have used the methods, procedures and theories of industrial and organizational psychology to help the vulnerable people of the world. Contents: 1. Industrial and Organizational Psychology Encounters the World; Walter Reichman * 2. Challenges of the Ultimate Messengers; Telma Viale * 3. International Development and I-O Psychology in Sub-Sahara Africa: Perspectives From Local and Expatriate Standpoints;Inusah Abdul-Nasiru and Alexander Gloss * 4. Developing Young Leaders in Kenya’s Rift Valley; Sarah Stawiski and Jennifer Martineau * 5. A Multi-Disciplinary Approach to Solving Global Problems: The Case of Psychological Collaboration on a Girls Empowerment Program; Mary O’Neill Berry, Judy Kuriansky and Martin A. Butler * 6. Entrepreneurship Training in Developing Countries; Kim Marie Bischoff, Michael M. Gielnik and Michael Frese * 7. Dual Salaries and Worker Wellbeing in Papua New Guinea; Leo Marai * 8. Exploring Haiti from an Organizational Perspective: Lessons Learned Along the Way; Jeffrey Godbout * 9. Servants of Empowerment; Stuart C. Carr, Eilish McAuliffe and Malcolm MacLachlan * 10. Designing Learning Systems for Poverty Reduction in Least Developed Countries; Raymond Saner and Lichia Liu * 11. Increasing Resilience Among People Who Are Homeless; Bina Kandola * 12. In the Wake of Disaster- Facilitating Business Recovery; Vicki V. Vandaveer and Tracey E. Rizzuto * 13. Service Learning in Developing Nations; Daniel Sachau, Carol Lynn Courtney, Richard Olson, Scott Fee and Julene Nolan * 14. I-O and Community Service Involvement: Students Helping Locally; Kristie Campana June 2014 UK June 2014 US 288pp 11 figures, 5 b/w tables Hardback £70.00 / $115.00 / CN$132.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137327727

9781137327727

Organization Design and Engineering Co-existence, Co-operation or Integration

October 2014 UK October 2014 US 196pp 18 b/w tables, 15 figures Hardback £65.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137391407

Edited by Rodrigo Magalhães, Kuwait-Maastricht Business School in Kuwait, Kuwait 9781137391407

The key aim of the volume of original papers on the theory and practice of ODE featured in Organization Design and Engineering is to contribute towards overcoming the academic challenges stated above. A secondary aim is to launch the debate about ODE, including whether or not the debate itself is warranted. Contents: Introduction * PART I: STRATEGIZING ODE * 1. Organization Design and Engineering for Dynamic Fit: Toward Analytic Principles, Methods and Tools * 2. Structural Couplings of Organizational Design and Organizational Engineering * 3. An Explanatory Framework of the Dynamics of ODE founded upon Service, Identity and IT Infrastructure * PART II: MODELING ODE * 4. The Unifying Role of Enterprise Engineering * 5. Using Ontologies for Integrated Knowledge Management in Organizational Design and Engineering * 6. Organizational Self-Awareness: a Matter of Value * PART III: IMPLEMENTING ODE * 7. A Framework for Evidence-based and Inductive Design * 8. Exploring the Potential of the Axiomatic Approach for Organizational Design * PART IV: EDUCATING FOR ODE * 9. Preparing Future IST Professionals for ODE: an Examination of Courses in IST Degree Programmes December 2014 UK December 2014 US 296pp 16 b/w tables, 39 b/w tables Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137351562

9781137351562

ORGANIZATION STUDIES Patrons, Curators, Inventors and Thieves The Storytelling Contest of the Cultural Industries in the Digital Age Jonathan Wheeldon, Freelance Consultant, UK ‘A superb book. This is one of the best analytical accounts by an insider of the cultural industries. Actually no: one of the best analytical accounts by ANYONE of the cultural industries.’ - David Hesmondhalgh, Professor of Media and Music Industries, Institute of Communications Studies, University of Leeds ‘In this important and beautifully written book, an industry insider brings experience and research to bear on understanding corporations in the age of digitization. Wheeldon’s understanding is itself cultural, and his lessons have wide application for how we manage and consume cultural products in future.’ - Martin Parker, Professor of Culture and Organization, School of Management, University of Leicester Jonathan Wheeldon offers a rare and unusually reflective insider account of the transformational challenges of the music industry, and the cultural industries in general, over the past 15 years. He also makes a potentially valuable contribution to loosening the industrial-political deadlock in the debate over copyright reform. Contents: Introduction * PART I: MY VERSION OF EVENTS * 1. A Personal Perspective * 2. Innovation or Bust – a Short History of Recorded Music * PART II: STAKEHOLDER VOICES * 3. Value Shift * 4. Custodial Tensions * 5. Hindsight * PART III: A STORYTELLING CONTEST * 6. The Analysis of Discourse * 7. Strategy as Storytelling * 8. Identification of Key Constructs * 9. A Narrative World * 10. The Inventor’s Tale * 11. Power and Ideology * PART IV: THE PIRATE’S TALE: REFORM OF COPYRIGHT AND THE FUTURE * 12. Pirates, Property and Privatization * 13. Enclosing the Commons of the Mind * 14. The 300 Year War of Copyright * 15. My Version of Events: the Future * Bibliography * Notes September 2014 UK September 2014 US 280pp Hardback £60.00 / $95.00 / CN$110.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9780230249431

The Poetic Organization Alexandra Pitsis, University of Technology Sydney, Australia “Alexandra Pitsis has written a wonderful book that is remarkable both for its ambition and creativity. Skillfully weaving together philosophy, social science, and literary theory, she opens us to the implicit poetics of organizations as well as giving us a new means through which to research the lived realities of social existence. A great achievement.” Carl Rhodes, Professor of Management, University of Leicester, UK The Poetic Organization explores the inherent aspects of organization that revolve around poetic processes. This book is a commentary on poetic elements in organization that are critical to developmental areas of organizations, yet poetics are rarely given the attention deserved. Contents: PART I: THEORETICAL FRAMEWORK * 1. Introduction * 2. A Trajectory of Poetics in Organization * 3. Examining the Fictive as a Methodological Stance * 4 Research Practices, Key Terms and Descriptors * PART II: EXPLORING THE POETIC IN COACH ENGAGEMENTS * 5. Description and Analysis, Poetic Profiles * 6. Interpretations Emerging from Data * 7. Interviews and Workshops * 8. Jack and the Scripts for R and R Coaching * PART III: DISCUSSION, CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE ISSUES * 9. Discussion * 10. Conclusions and Future Issues October 2014 UK October 2014 US 216pp Hardback £67.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137398710

9781137398710

Strategic Followership 9780230249431

How followers Impact Organizational Effectiveness David B. Zoogah, Morgan State University, USA In this ground-breaking work, Zoogah explores this type of followership and illustrates the various ways it can happen.

Phenomenology of the Embodied Organization Wendelin Küpers, Karlshochschule International University, Germany Drawing on contemporary debates and responding to an analytic lacuna in organization and management studies and calls from organizational practice, Phenomenology of the Embodied Organization explores the fundamental and integral role of the body and embodiment in organizational life-worlds.

Contents: PART I * 0. Introduction * 1. Theoretical Perspectives of Strategic Behavior * 2. Followership * PART II * 3. Strategic Followership * 4. Restorative Followership * 5. Transcendent Followership * PART III * 6. Neuro-followership * 7. Virtuous Followership * 8. Managerial Implications November 2014 UK November 2014 US 248pp 19 b/w illustrations, 11 b/w tables Hardback £62.50 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137356215

9781137356215

Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. Understanding Phenomenology * 3. Advanced Phenomenology And Relational Ontology Of Merleau-Ponty * 4. Organisation As An Embodied Life-World Of Practice * 5. Phenomenological Understanding Of Practice * 6. Embodied Intentionality In Organisation * 7. Intercorporeality Of Social Bodies Embodied Intersubjectivities In Organisation * 8. Responsiveness As Embodied Modality In Organisations * 9. Embodied Agency And ‘Bodies At Work’ In Organisations * 10. Embodied ‘Inter-Practice’ In Organisations * 11. Embodied Habits, In-, De-, And Re- Habitualisation And Improvisation * 12. Chiasmic Organising * 13. Implications December 2014 UK December 2014 US 392pp 5 figures, 1 b/w table Hardback £77.00 / $120.00 / CN$138.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137460530

9781137460530

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

ORGANIZATION STUDIES

QUANTITATIVE METHODS AND...

Working Time, Knowledge Work and PostIndustrial Society Unpredictable Work Aileen O’Carroll, National University of Ireland Maynooth, Ireland “This is a remarkably nuanced and lively account of how time is experienced and negotiated today, particularly in a working world increasingly caught between autonomy and unpredicatability. If you are interested in time, work, technology, post-industrial economies or just great sociology - read this book.” - Sean O’Riain, National University of Ireland Maynooth, Republic of Ireland We are living in the age of imagination and communication. This book, about the new ways time is experienced and organised in post-industrial workplaces, argues that the key feature of working time within knowledge, and other workplaces, is unpredictability, creating a culture that seeks to insert acceptance of unpredictability as a new ‘standard’. Contents: 1. Unpredictability: The Effects of a New Working Time Culture * 2. The Long Hours Myth * 3. The Unpredictable Clock: The Time of Knowledge Work * 4. Spaghetti Time * 5. Constrained Autonomy and Disrupted Bargains * 6. Nomads * 7. Time, Work-Discipline and Unpredictability February 2015 UK February 2015 US 200pp Hardback £60.00 / $95.00 / CN$110.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9780230282971

9780230282971

The Psychosocial and Organization Studies Affect at Work Edited by Kate Kenny, Queen’s University Management School, UK, Marianna Fotaki, University of Warwick, Warwick Business School, UK Leading authors within organization studies and also from broader social science disciplines present the state of the art in the rapidly developing field of psychosocial approaches to organization studies and critical management studies. Contents: Interview: Ian Parker on the Psychosocial, Psychoanalysis and Critical Psychology in Conversation with Marianna Fotaki * 1. Introduction; Kate Kenny and Marianna Fotaki * SECTION I: THE PSYCHOSOCIAL IN ORGAIZATIONS: THEORETICAL IDEAS * 2. Debt Society: Psychosocial Aspects of the (Greek) Crisis; Yannis Stavrakakis * 3. Re-theorizing Organizational Creativity through a Psychosocial Lens: Introducing the Radical Imagination of Cornelius Castoriadis; Aris Komporozos-Athanasiou and Marianna Fotaki * 4. Disclosing Affect: A Freudian Inquiry into Organizational Storytelling; Yiannis Gabriel * 5. Freedom through Work: The Psychosocial, Affect and Work; Parisa Dashtipour * SECTION II: RESEARCHING THE PSYCHOSOCIAL IN ORGANIZATIONS: METHODOLOGICAL ISSUES * 6. It is Difficult to Think in the Slammer: A Social Photo-Matrix in a Penal Institution; Burkard Sievers * 7. From Research Reflexivity to Research Affectivity: Ethnographic Research in Organizations; Kate Kenny and Sarah Gilmore * 8. Narrative, Fantasy, and Mourning: A Critical Exploration of Life & Loss in Assisted Living Environments; Jason Glynos, Karen West, Barbara Hagger and Rachel Shaw * 9. The Doctor/Manager Relationship as a Psychosocial Encounter: A Scene of Fantasy and Domination?; Nancy Harding and Hugh Lee * 10. Community, Communitarianism and Displacement Anxiety; Lynn Froggett

Studies in the Psychosocial October 2014 UK October 2014 US 288pp 6 figures, 2 b/w tables Hardback £63.00 / $95.00 / CN$110.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137347848

9781137347848

QUANTITATIVE METHODS AND OPERATIONAL RESEARCH

Analyzing Event Statistics in Corporate Finance Methodologies, Evidences, and Critiques Jau-Lian Jeng, Azusa Pacific University, USA Analyzing Event Statistics in Corporate Finance provides new alternative methodologies to increase accuracy when performing statistical tests within corporate finance. Contents: PART I: EVENT STUDY METHODOLGY I * 1. Data Collection in Long-run or Short-run Format? * 2. Model Specifications for Normal (or Expected) Returns * 3. Cumulative Abnormal Returns or Structural Change Tests? * PART II: EVENT STUDY METHODOLOGY II * 4. Recursive Estimation for Normal (or Expected) Returns * 5. Time Will Tell! A Method with Occupation Time Statistics

February 2015 UK February 2015 US 208pp 3 b/w tables Hardback £68.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137397171

9781137397171

Quantitative Trading with R Understanding Mathematical and Computational Tools from a Quant’s Perspective Harry Georgakopoulos, Loyola University, USA ‘Through the lens of an expert practitioner, Harry provides a treatise on how to develop a robust quantitative trading strategy using ‘R’. This is the first book written that has covered the ability of ‘R’ software to provide the infrastructure for an algorithmic trading system. Harry has written an instant classic that the professional and novice will find inherently useful. There is an inordinate amount of working ‘R’ code that the reader can deploy instantly or lever to develop more exotic functions and scripts. With this book, there is no need for expensive software development or a MATLAB license. Download the R software and you can begin building profitable strategies immediately. Harry has spawned an entire new generation of hedge fund managers with this seminal work.’ - Ed Zarek, Quantitative Options Trader, Chicago Volatility Group Quantitative Finance with R offers a winning strategy for devising expertly-crafted and workable trading models using the R open source programming language, providing readers with a step-by-step approach to understanding complex quantitative finance problems and building functional computer code. Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. What Do Traders Do? * 3. What Tools Do Traders Use? * 4. A Sample Trading Strategy * 5. Tools That We Need to Implement a Trading Strategy * 6. What is R? (History and Basic Instructions) * 7. Datatypes in R * 8. Functions in R * 9. Linear Algebra * 10. Statistics * 11. Probability * 12. What is Risk * 13. Where to Get Financial Data * 14. How to Analyze Financial Data * 15. Time Series Analysis * 16. Regression Analysis * 17. Monte Carlo Analysis * 18. Formulating a Strategy * and more.... February 2015 UK January 2015 US 292pp 119 Illustrations Hardback £39.99 / $70.00 / CN$81.00 Canadian Rights www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137354075

9781137354075

QUANTITATIVE METHODS AND OPERATIONAL RESEARCH European Journal of Information Systems Frantz Rowe, University of Nantes, France , Pär Ågerfalk, Uppsala University, Sweden , Dov Te’eni, Tel Aviv University, Israel The European Journal of Information Systems provides a distinctive European perspective on the theory and practice of information systems for a global audience. Including high quality research, case studies and reflective articles, EJIS gives a critical view on technology, development, implementation, strategy, management and policy.

ISSN: 0960085X / EISSN:14769344 For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/ejis

Health Systems

Journal of the Operational Research Society Thomas Archibald and Jonathan Crook, University of Edinburgh, UK Journal of the Operational Research Society has been published for over 60 years and is the world’s longestestablished OR journal. It looks at real applications of OR with high-quality articles from a wide variety of environments (eg. government, health, sport) and technical approaches (eg. decision support systems, expert systems, heuristics).

ISSN: 01605682 / EISSN:14769360 For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/jors

Journal of Revenue & Pricing Management

Sally Brailsford, University of Southampton, UK, Paul Harper, Cardiff University, UK, Cynthia LeRouge, Saint Louis University, USA, Fay Cobb Payton, North Carolina State University, USA Health Systems is an interdisciplinary journal promoting the idea that all aspects of health can be viewed from a systems perspective. The philosophy of the journal is that health and healthcare systems are characterized by complexity and interconnectedness and so aims to provide a forum that brings different viewpoints together.

ISSN: 20476965 / EISSN: 20476973 For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/hs

Ian Yeoman, University of Victoria, New Zealand The Journal of Revenue & Pricing Management serves the tremendous growth in research and practices of revenue management and pricing. The journal publishes new and original ideas on research, policy, and management.

ISSN: 14766930 / EISSN: 1477657X For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/rpm

International Abstracts in Operations Research K. Preston White, Jr., University of Virginia, USA International Abstracts in Operations Research is the premier bibliographic and search tool for the world’s OR/MS literature. It holds more than 64,000 abstracts from over 1200 OR/MS journal titles and is updated weekly – making it a uniquely comprehensive and upto-date research resource.

ISSN: 0020580X / EISSN:147693352 For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/iaor

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

QUANTITATIVE METHODS AND... Journal of Simulation John Fowler, Arizona State University, USA, Loo Hay Lee, National University of Singapore, Simon J.E. Taylor, Brunel University, UK Journal of Simulation provides a single source of accessible research and practice in the fast-developing field of discrete-event simulation. From manufacturing to defence, from healthcare to general commerce, its scope is broad - in both established and emerging areas of research.

ISSN: 17477778 / EISSN:17477786 For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/jos

Knowledge Management Research & Practice Giovanni Schiuma, Università della Basilicata, Italy A single accessible source of high-quality articles on all aspects of managing knowledge, focusing not only on the organisational level, but on all levels from the individual to the nation or profession. The journal was the first knowledge management journal to gain an impact factor in the 2010 Journal Citation Reports.

ISSN: 1477 8238 / EISSN:14778246 For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/kmrp

RISK MANAGEMENT, SECURITY... RISK MANAGEMENT, SECURITY AND CRIME PREVENTION

The Handbook of Security 2nd edition Edited by Martin Gill, Perpetuity Research and Consultancy International, UK “Martin Gill has fully updated and expanded his hugely successful Handbook of Security. This new edition brings together first-rate scholars to cover the history and nature of security, the nature of different offences and security practices in different sectors, as well as issues of management and regulation. A must-have for anyone working in this field.” - Tim Newburn, London School of Economics, UK “In introducing this new edition of his highly successful Handbook, Martin Gill writes that ‘studying security is an exciting place to be’. The book’s contents amply bear out his view. They show that ‘security studies’, which was once dominated by security professionals, is now becoming a self-conscious and self-critical academic discipline. The growing importance of Security in everyday life, and its engagement with cybercrime, terrorism and crimes of globalisation, hold much interest for criminologists, political scientists and other students of today’s world.” - Ronald V Clarke, University Professor, School of Criminal Justice, Rutgers University, USA “Security as an idea, a concern and a pursuit has dramatically reshaped, and is reshaping, social life everywhere. As it does it is transforming governance, government, and as the authors of this Handbook make clear, scholarship across a wide range of disciplines. This Second Edition of the Handbook of Security is both welcome and timely.” - Clifford Shearing, University of Cape Town, South Africa and Griffith University, Australia The substantially revised second edition of the Handbook of Security provides the most comprehensive analysis of scholarly security debates and issues to date. Including contributions from some of the world’s leading scholars it critiques the way security is provided and managed. Contents: 1. Introduction; Martin Gill * PART I: DISCIPLINES AND SECURITY * 2. History of Security; Bruce George and Steve Kimber * 3. Environmental Studies and Security; Richard H. Schneider * 4. Criminology and Security; Graham Farrell and Ken Pease * 5. Politics, Economics and Security; Adam White * 6. Engineering and Security; David Brooks and Clif Smith * 7. Design and Security; Paul Ekblom * PART II: OFFENCES * 8. Terrorism; Kumar Ramakrishna * 9. Murder at Work; Zech Lee and Bob McCrie * 10. Workplace Violence; Amy L. Stutzenberger and Bonnie Fisher * 11. Piracy and Robbery; Robert Beckman and Monique Page * 12. Organised Crime; Mike Levi * 13. Commerical Burglary; Rob Mawby * 14. Identity Fraud; Henry Pontell and G. Geiss * 15. Cyber Crime; Lennon Chang and Peter Grabosky * 16. Counterfeiting; Virginie de Barnier * PART III: CRIME AND SECURITY IN SECTORS * 17. Crime, Security and the Retail Sector; Adrian Beck * 18. Crime, Security and Tourism; Rob Mawby * 19. Crime and Security and the Food Sector; Hope Johnson and Reece Walters * 20. Crime, Security and the Financial Sector; Mark Button and Martin Tunley * PART IV: RESEARCHING SECURITY * 21. The Influence of Security Research; James Calder * 22. Knowledge Transfer; Paul Ekblom * 23. Working with Offenders; Richard Moule * 24. The Ethnographic Approach and Security: The Case of Airports; Alan Kirschenbaum * 25. Crime Mapping; Shane Johnson and Kate Bowers * 26. Systematic Reviews and Meta-Analysis; Matthew Manning * 27. Evaluations and Randomized Controlled Trials in Security Research; Read Hayes and Kyle Grottini * PART V: SECURITY PROCESSES AND SERVICES * 28. Signs; Nick Tilley * 29. Technologies and Security; Clifton Smith * 30. Alarms and Security; David Brooks * 31. CCTV; Emmeline Taylor and Martin Gill * 32. Security Officers; Mahesh Nalla and Alison Wakefield * 33. Private Military Companies; K. Carmola * PART VI: SECURITY AND ITS MANAGEMENT * 34. The Role of Partnerships in Security Management; Tim Prenzler and Rick Sarre * 35. Management and Risk Management; Joshua Bamfield * 36. Disaster and Crisis Management; Dominic Elliott * 37. Managing Intelligence and Responding to Emerging Threats, Patrick F. Walsh * 38. Regulation and Security; Tim Prenzler and Rick Sarre * PART VII: CRITIQUING SECURITY * 39. Corporate Security; Kevin Walby and Randy K. Lippert * 40. Liberty and Security; John Deukmedjian * 41. Professionalisation and Security; Alison Wakefield * 42. Trading and the Commodification of Security; Julie Ayling July 2014 UK July 2014 US 1088pp 92 b/w illustrations Hardback £165.00 / $260.00 / CN$299.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137323279

9781137323279

RISK MANAGEMENT, SECURITY AND CRIME PREVENTION Contemporary Challenges in Risk Management

A Pragmatic Guide to Real Options

Dealing with Risk, Uncertainty and the Unknown Edited by Torben Juul Andersen, Department of International Economics and Management Center for Global Strategic Responsiveness (CGSR), Copenhagen Business School, Denmark Contemporary Challenges in Risk Management focuses on two central aspects of the risk managing process, namely 1. how managers (can and do) assess developments in the external risk environment and deal with them, and 2. analysing the effects of risk management and different managerial approaches. The articles represent state of the art academic analyses and research contributions. Contents: Introduction – Contemporary Challenges in Risk Management; Torben J. Andersen * 1. Distinguishing Rationality and Bias in Prices – Implications from Judgments of Risk and Expected Return; Hersh Shefrin * 2. Looking Under the Lamppost? A Research Agenda for Increasing Enterprise Risk Management’s Usefulness to Practitioners; Philip Bromiley and Davaki Rau * 3. The Risk-return Outcomes of Strategic Responsiveness; Torben J. Andersen and Richard A. Bettis * 4. Exploring the Effect of Effective Risk Management Capabilities; Anders Ø. Hansen and Torben J. Andersen * 5. The ‘soft’ Side of Strategic Risk Management – How Top Managers’ Leadership Style Affects Volatility in Performance; Simon S. Torp and Stefan Linder * 6. A Management Accounting Perspective on Risk Management; Ulrik Christiansen * 7. Subjective Beliefs and Statistical Forecasts of Financial Risks – The Chief Risk Officer Project; Glenn W. Harrison and Richard D. Phillips * 8. Defaults and Returns in the High-yield Bond and Distressed Debt Markets – Review and Outlook; Edward I. Altman and Brenda J. Kuehne November 2014 UK November 2014 US 280pp 47 figures, 39 b/w tables Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137447609

9781137447609

Global Risk Governance in Health Nathalie Brender, University of Applied Sciences Western Switzerland, Switzerland Epidemics know no borders and are often characterized by a high level of uncertainty, causing major challenges in risk governance. The author shows the emergence of global risk governance processes and the key role that the World Health Organization (WHO) plays within them. Contents: Introduction * 1. Thinking the International Response to a Global Health Risk * 2. Severe Acute Respiratory Syndrome: Analysis of a Successful Containment * 3. Avian Influenza H5n1: International Preparedness against a Future Influenza Pandemic * 4. Cases Comparison, Outlook On H1n1 Influenza Pandemic and Conclusions November 2014 UK November 2014 US 256pp 15 b/w tables, 11 figures, 1 map Hardback £65.00 / $100.00 / CN$115.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137273567

9781137273567

Tom Arnold, University of Richmond, USA ‘Tom Arnold uses unique elements of presentation to build a friendly step-by-step guide to understanding and modeling the basics of real options. He gives many fully-worked examples and much careful advice for corporate decision makers. His book is a pedagogical gem!’ - Timothy Crack, Chaired Professor of Finance, Otago University, New Zealand Aimed at practitioners with no prior expertise in the subject, this book helps readers build basic real options models to aid in decision-making. Providing a pragmatic and informative approach, the authors introduce basic probability theories, before putting these theories into a real-world context. Contents: Table of Contents * 1. How Net Present Value (NPV) is Implemented * 2. Making Decisions Sequential * 3. Option Terminology and an Introduction to Binomial Trees * 4. Binomial Trees, Risk-Neutral Pricing, and American Style Options * 5. Applying Real Option Analysis with NPV-Embedded Binomial Trees * 6. Applying More Real Options Analysis into an NPV-Embedded Binomial Tree * 7. Implementing an NPV-Embedded Binomial Tree from an NPV Analysis * 8. Real Option Analysis and the Black-Scholes Model December 2014 UK December 2014 US 208pp 73 b/w tables Hardback £67.50 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137391483

9781137391483

Corporate Security in the 21st Century Theory and Practice in International Perspective Edited by Kevin Walby, University of Winnipeg, Canada, Randy Lippert, University of Windsor, Canada 'Studies into private (or commercial) security have become a well established field of academic and practitioner interest over the past three centuries. However, this body of knowledge mostly focuses on manned guarding services and, to a lesser extent, detective work. Kevin Walby and Randy Lippert take a leap forward by broadening the scope of research to corporate security, i.e. different forms of regulatory and investigatory units within organizations like airports, harbors, banks and insurance companies. A must read for everybody interested in security work straddling the publicprivate divide.' - Ronald van Steden, VU University Amsterdam, The Netherlands 'This welcome volume revitalizes the domain of security studies by recognizing that corporations across the globe, acting as hugely influential auspices of governance, have been systematically redefining the boundaries of security provision.' - Professor Clifford Shearing, University of Cape Town, South Africa, and Griffith University, Australia This interdisciplinary collection places corporate security in a theoretical and international context. Arguing that corporate security is becoming the primary form of security in the twenty-first century, it explores a range of issues including regulation, accountability, militarization, strategies of securitization and practitioner techniques. Contents: PART I: MAKING SENSE OF CORPORATE SECURITY: HISTORICAL AND THEORETICAL PERSPECTIVES * PART II: EMPIRICAL CASE STUDIES OF CORPORATE SECURITY IN INTERNATIONAL PERSPECTIVE * PART III: CORPORATE SECURITY: CHALLENGES AND DILEMMAS IN THE FIELD

Crime Prevention and Security Management June 2014 UK June 2014 US 304pp 14 b/w illustrations Hardback £65.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137346063

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

9781137346063

RISK MANAGEMENT, SECURITY AND CRIME PREVENTION OR, Defence and Security

Modelling in Public Health Research

Edited by Roger Forder, UK Ministry of Defence OR, Defence and Security brings together articles from the Journal of Operational Research Society. Contents: 1. Operational Research for Defence and Security; Roger Forder * 2. Providing Operational Analysis to a Peace Support Operation: the Kosovo Experience * 3. Validation of the Mission-based Approach to Representing Command and Control in Simulation Models of Conflict * 4. The Hybrid War Model: a Complex Adaptive Model of Complex Urban Conflict * 5. Incorporating Fractal Concepts into Equations of Attrition for Military Conflicts * 6. When Lanchester Met Richardson, the Outcome was Stalemate: a Parable for Mathematical Models of Insurgency * 7. Risk taking by decision makers—using card-based decision gaming to develop models of behaviour * 8. Canadian Forces Global Reach Support Hubs: Facility Location and Aircraft Routing Models * 9. Benefits Analysis - a Robust Assessment Approach * 10. An Australian Approach to Concept Development and Experimentation: Linking Strategy to Capability * 11. Inferring Missing Links in Partially Observed Social Networks * 12. Subsidizing to Disrupt a Terrorism Supply Chain - a Four-Player Game

OR Essentials December 2014 UK December 2014 US 320pp 131 figures, 66 b/w tables Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137454058

9781137454058

How Mathematical Techniques Keep Us Healthy Erika Mansnerus, London School of Economics and Political Science, UK Modelling in Public Health Research analyses the development and use of mathematical models in public health research and policy. By introducing a life cycle metaphor, the author provides a unique perspective on how mathematical modelling techniques have increased our understanding of the governance of infectious risks in society. Contents: 1. Introduction: Life-Cycles Of Models * 2. Models And The Stories They Tell Us * 2.1 Introduction * 2.2 Story Of Disease Transmission * 2.3 Telling Policy-Relevant Stories * 2.4 Conclusion * 3. Kinship Relations Of Models * 3.1 Models And Kinship Ties * 3.2 Kinship: Evolving Relations And Links Between Models * 3.3 Nature Of Model-Based Evidence * 3.4 Conclusion * 4. Working Lives Of Models * 4.1 Introduction * 4.2 Revising Vaccination Policy: From Target Groups To Mass Campaign * 4.3 Insights Into Models At Work * 4.4 Conclusion * 5. Encounters With Risks * 5.1 Introduction * 5.2 Two Types Of Model-Based Predictions * 5.3 Using Models In Risk Assessment: Simulating Pandemic Outbreaks * 5.4 Conclusion * 6. When Evidence Is Silent * 6.1 Introduction: Silent Evidence Of A Pandemic Influenza * 6.2 What Is Meant By Silent Evidence? * 6.3 Identifying Known Unknowns * 6.4 Analysing Unknown Factors * 6.5 Conclusion * 7. Governing By Numbers * 7.1 Introduction * 7.2 Governing By Numbers * 7.3 Using Models As Senior Experts * 7.4 Quantitative Authority Of Modelling Of Foot-And-Mouth Disease (FMD) * 7.5 Conclusion * 8. Lives Of Models In The World Of Policy * 8.1 Understanding Models Through Their Lives * 8.2 Predicting, Preventing And Keeping Us Healthy * 8.3 Benefits And Limitations Of Modelling Techniques * 8.4 Conclusions

The Crisis-Prone Society A Brief Guide to Managing the Beliefs that Drive Risk in Business Ian I. Mitroff, Haas School of Business, University of California, Berkeley, USA, Can M. Alpaslan, Department of Management, California State University, Northridge, USA The Crisis-Prone Society offers preventative measures that can be taken by business professionals and scholars alike to alleviate the growing potential for crises today. These measures are distilled by close analysis of our recent social history of disasters. Contents: 1. Living in a Crisis Prone World * 2. The Risks of Risk Management * 3. Why Technology Always Bites Back * 4. Why People and Organizations Break Down * 5. Economic Crises * 6. Political Crises * 7. National Insecurity * 8. Global Warming * 9. The Future of Crises

July 2014 UK July 2014 US 112pp 1 b/w table Hardback £45.00 / $67.50 / CN$78.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137455611

November 2014 UK November 2014 US 148pp 2 tables, 3 figures Hardback £45.00 / $67.50 / CN$78.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137298812

9781137298812

Crime Prevention & Community Safety An International Journal Rob Mawby, University of Plymouth, UK CPCS aims to facilitate the exchange of expertise and experience, to promote good practice and to help identify successful strategies for addressing issues of crime prevention and community safety. Papers introduce new approaches, re-evaluate traditional theories and methods, and report on the latest research.

9781137455611

ISSN: 14603780 / EISSN: 17434629 For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/cpcs

STRATEGY Risk Management

STRATEGY

A Journal of Risk, Crisis and Disaster Denis Fischbacher-Smith, University of Glasgow Business School, Moira Fischbacher-Smith, University of Glasgow, UK Aims to encourage discussion and debate on issues that arise from conventional and emerging perspectives on risk, crisis management and resilience. Also encourages multi-disciplinary perspectives on the ways in which these approaches are evolving and can be refined, refreshed and reinterpreted in light of contemporary challenges.

ISSN: 14603799 / EISSN: 14603799 For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/rm

Security Journal Bonnie Fisher, University of Cincinnati, USA and Martin Gill, Perpetuity Research and Consultancy International Ltd (PRCI Ltd), UK A dynamic publication that keeps you informed about the latest developments and techniques in security management. Written in an accessible style, it is the world’s premier peer-reviewed journal for today’s security researcher and professional. The journal is affiliated to ASIS International.

ISSN: 9551662 / EISSN:17434645 For more information, please visit: http://www.palgrave-journals.com/sj

Solving the Strategy Delusion Mobilizing People and Realizing Distinctive Strategies Marc Stigter, Independent, Australia, Cary Cooper, Lancaster University, UK "Solving the Strategy Delusion is a comprehensive and insightful remedy for the field of strategic change, and advances the subject in original ways. Everyone working at senior levels of business and policy should read this book. This is a fresh and decisive contribution to the canon of strategy. " - Kevin Roberts, CEO Worldwide of Saatchi & Saatchi "Solving the Strategy Delusion opens new windows for looking at realising strategy. It rewrites ingrained behavioural practices to fit today’s extraordinary strategic challenges." - Fons Trompenaars; Ranked one of the top 50 Most Influential Management Thinkers in 2013 and co-author of Riding the Waves of Culture - Understanding Diversity in Global Business "This remarkable book is a survival guide for business leaders who have found the ground shifting quickly beneath their feet. But more than that it’s a logical path forward showing us how to realise distinctive strategies by unlocking the energy of people within the organisation. It’s clever and timely." - Tony Gillies; Editor in Chief, Australian Associated Press "Don’t even think of embarking on any strategic change effort without reading this book first! It demonstrates not only why conventional planning has become irrelevant but, importantly, how to see, feel, think, and act strategically in today’s fast changing environment. " - James Sutherland; Chief Executive Officer, Cricket Australia "Solving the Strategy Delusion is an outstanding reference for realising strategic change in today’s complex environment. " - Zeger Degraeve; Dean, Melbourne Business School; Dean, Faculty of Business and Economics, The University of Melbourne "How do you unlock deep customer insights and realise distinctive strategies? How do you overcome organisational inertia and unleash productive energies? How do you mobilise people who can, know and want to realise strategic change? This remarkable book reveals answers to these questions and in essence shows how to truly strategise from the outside-in rather than insideout – even for biased insiders." - Christian Overgaard; President Danfoss China "If we’re completely honest, most leaders are consumed by the daily battle to ride out the bumps let alone prove we own a confident strategy that will sustain us long into the future. Authors Stigter and Cooper deconstruct the challenges we face inside and out then provide the keys to overcome organisational inertia and unleash productive energies. It’s a must. " - Mick Crowe; Managing Director, G&S Engineering Services "Solving the Strategy Delusion is a refreshingly new perspective on strategy and strategic change. We are presented with a systematic questioning on how companies tackle strategy and change, create customer value, mobilise people and exercise leadership, through several types of delusions. These topics are then explored in a sensitive and pragmatic fashion. A ‘must read’ in the strategic management literature. " - Rita Cunha; Associate Professor of Global Human Resource Management; Nova School of Business and Economics, Lisbon, Portugal Solving the Strategy Delusion matters to anyone interested in realising strategy in the 21st century. The book challenges conventional and ‘delusional’ approaches to strategy. It offers different ways of seeing, thinking, planning, acting, and mobilising when it comes to making strategy happen in a world of volatility and complexity. Contents: 1. What’s Going On? * 2. Strategic Sensing – Not Just Thinking * 3. Co-Creating a Compelling Story * 4. Co-Creating Distinctive Strategies * 5. Realising Distinctive Strategies * 6. Overcoming Inertia * 7. Sustaining Organisational Energy December 2014 UK December 2014 US 192pp 18 figures Hardback £29.99 / $45.00 / CN$60.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137394675

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

9781137394675

STRATEGY Analytics and Modern Warfare Dominance by the Numbers

Business Essentials for Strategic Communicators (HIGHLIGHT)

Michael Taillard, Bellevue University, USA

Creating Shared Value for the Organization and its Stakeholders

Ragas, Culp, Business Essentials for Strategic Communicators

Analytics and Modern Warfare details very simply and for even the most novice of potential analysts not only how to perform analytics which describe what is happening, predict what is going to happen, and optimize responses, but also places these analytics in the context of proactive strategy development.

Matthew W. Ragas, DePaul University, USA, Ron Culp, DePaul University, USA “Few advisers mean more to a CEO than strategic communicators. The very best bring more than a command of messaging and tactics; they offer genuine insight about the business. This book should be the first thing every aspiring communicator reads. It contains the defining lessons on how to earn trust, credibility, and respect.” -Bill McDermott, Chief Executive Officer, SAP “The days when people in strategic communication could get by without understanding financial numbers is long gone, and this book is the prime tool for teaching them what they need to know.” -Chris Roush, Senior Associate Dean and Walter E. Hussman Sr. Distinguished Scholar, University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, USA

Contents: Acknowledgements * Preface * Introduction * A Critique of Current Methods * Part I: Descriptive Analytics * Chapter 1) Descriptive Statistics * Chapter 2) Modeling * Chapter 3) Comparative Assessments * Chapter 4) Data Diagnostics * Chapter 5) Challenges and Limitations * Chapter 6) Suggestions for Future Research * Part II: Predictive Analytics * Chapter 7) Probability Modeling * Chapter 8) Correlative and Regression Analyses * Chapter 9) Geospatial Intelligence * Chapter 10) Challenges and Limitations * Chapter 11) Suggestions for Future Research * Part III: Operational Analytics * Chapter 12) Quality Assessments * Chapter 13) Efficiency Analyses * Chapter 14) Risk Management * Chapter 15) Asset Management * Chapter 16) Challenges and Limitations * Chapter 17) Suggestions for Future Research * Conclusion * Afterword * Index December 2014 UK December 2014 US 208pp Hardback £68.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137395634

9781137395634

Business Essentials for Strategic Communicators provides communication professionals and students with the essential ‘Business 101’ knowledge they need to navigate the business world with the best of them.

Big Social Mobile How Digital Initiatives Can Reshape the Enterprise and Drive Business Results David F. Giannetto, Professional, USA ‘Big Social Mobile is a valuable guide for learning to think critically and holistically about how marketing, public relations, and social interactions can go well beyond their traditional roles. This is necessary reading for succeeding in today’s ever-more integrated world.’ - Ken Wincko, SVP of Marketing, PR Newswire ‘Big Social Mobile is a must-read for everyone from small business managers to corporate executives— read it and learn how to use big data, social media, and mobile technology to become customer-centric and adopt predictive marketing or you will be left behind.’ - Omer Artun, CEO, AgilOne ‘Big Social Mobile reveals Giannetto’s unique and comprehensive view of how technology influences and enables behaviors. It’s a view seldom contemplated by other authors and practitioners.’ - Scott McNulty, Founder, IOEngine and BIOPTid Big Social Mobile shows that big data, along with social and mobile media, can improve enterprise performance significantly, but only when implemented in a holistic fashion. This book offers an integrative process that has helped a wide range of businesses enhance what has traditionally made them unique, resulting in tranformative results. Contents: Introduction * Part 1: Seeing and Thinking Big Picture * Chapter 1: The Integrated Enterprise * Chapter 2: Bottom Line, Mission-Critical Benefits * Chapter 3: Obstacles to Integration * Chapter 4: Understanding the New Social Consumer * Part 2: Creating a Big Social Mobile Enterprise * Chapter 5: Understanding Digital Relationships * Chapter 6: Defining Customer and Consumer Interactions * Chapter 7: Identifying Ideal Digital Behaviors * Chapter 8: Analyzing Profitable Patterns and Segments * Chapter 9: Aligning Digital Initiatives with the Enterprise * Part 3: Capitalizing on the Connection * Chapter 10: Capitalizing on the Mobile Movement * Chapter 11: Demystifying Big Data * Chapter 12: Technology Trends, Business Implications January 2015 UK December 2014 US 256pp Hardback £19.99 / $30.00 / CN$34.50 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137410399

9781137410399

Contents: Table of Contents * Foreword * Gary Sheffer * Preface * Acknowledgements * List of Tables and Figures * PART I * Introduction to Business Essentials for Communicators * 1. Why Knowledge of ‘Business 101’ Matters * PART II * Foundational Business Knowledge for Communicators * 2. Economics and Economic Indicators * 3. Finance and the Stock Market * 4. Accounting and Financial Statements * 5. The Law and Corporate Disclosure * 6. Intangible Assets and Non-Financial Information * PART III * Focal Areas at the Intersection of Business and Communication * 7. Corporate Governance * 8. Corporate Social Responsibility * 9. Corporate Reputation * PART IV * Demonstrating and Improving the Business Value of Communication * 10. Communication Measurement and Evaluation * References * Glossary * Index * About the Authors December 2014 UK December 2014 US 232pp 13 b/w illustrations, 9 b/w tables Hardback £34.50 / $55.00 / CN$62.99 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137387738

9781137387738

Do Less Better The Power of Strategic Sacrifice in a Complex World John R. Bell, Professional, USA “In Do Less Better, Bell delivers a simple, yet nuanced answer to the always-relevant question of how we manage today’s business complexity.’ - Nilofer Merchant, Harvard Business Review Columnist, Stanford Lecturer, and best-selling author “Do Less Better reminds you that small and focused trumps size for size’s sake all day long.” - John Cassaday, President and CEO, Corus Entertainment Do Less Better teaches leaders how to recognize the complexity and inefficiencies within their businesses and reveals how they can simplify and streamline through specialization and sacrifice. According to Bell, a company’s willingness to focus on a particular vision or identity ensures viability and strengthens its competitive edge. Contents: Introduction * 1. Accept the Short-term Pain * 2. Your Leadership Reality Check * 3. The Steel and Steal of Strategic Sacrifice * 4. Urgency for Action * 5. Think like an Entrepreneur * 6. KISS is not a Rock Band * and more.... December 2014 UK December 2014 US 240pp Hardback £21.99 / $32.00 / CN$37.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137452771

9781137452771

STRATEGY Money, Banking, and the Business Cycle Volume II: Remedies and Alternative Theories Brian P. Simpson, National University, USA “This two-volume work updates and extends the business cycle analysis inaugurated by Mises and Hayek. Particularly noteworthy are its incorporation of an aggregate economic accounting framework beyond GDP, its critique of so-called real business cycle theory, and its support of a 100-percentreserve gold standard, which, it argues, would end the business cycle and, in the absence of government intervention, would come into being simply on the basis of free competition, without being required by law.” -George Reisman, author of Capitalism: A Treatise on Economics and Pepperdine University Professor Emeritus of Economics “Brian Simpson’s two volumes titled Money, Banking, and the Business Cycle are thorough yet plain language discussions of the causes and consequences of business cycles in modern economies. He weaves basic economic theory with historical analysis of various episodes, and demonstrates that the cyclical fluctuations that are identified with macroeconomic volatility are a consequence not of the inherent instability of capitalism, but the manipulation of money and credit by the government. These volumes are highly recommended to anyone who is trying to think through the question of macroeconomic volatility, and the recent economic history of the Great Recession in particular.” -Peter Boettke, University Professor of Economics & Philosophy, George Mason University Money, Banking, and the Business Cycle provides a comprehensive framework for analyzing these mechanisms, and offers a robust prescription for reducing financial instability over the long-term. Contents: Introduction * PART I: REFUTATION OF ALTERNATIVE EXPLANATIONS OF THE BUSINESS CYCLE * 1. Underconsumption and Overproduction Theories of the Business Cycle * 2. Keynesian Business Cycle Theory, Part Deux: Inflexible Prices and Wages * 3. Real Business Cycle Theory * PART II: TO CURE THE BUSINESS CYCLE * 4. Government Interference, Fiat Money, and Fractional-Reserve Banking * 5. The Characteristics and Effects of a Free Market in Money and Banking * 6. The Significance of Some of the Historically Freer Banking Periods * 7. Gold and 100-Percent Reserves * 8. How to Transition to a Free Market in Money and Banking * Epilogue July 2014 UK July 2014 US 320pp Hardback £70.00 / $110.00 / CN$127.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137340771

9781137340771

Redesigning Manufacturing Reimagining the Business of Making in the UK Michael Beverland, School of Management, University of Bath, UK, Beverley Nielsen, Birmingham City University, UK, Vicky Pryce, Centre for Economics and Business Research, UK Manufacturing in the UK has an image problem. Although this image problem is more fiction than fact, it nonetheless has an impact on the sector’s ability to attract staff, capital, and policy interest. This book redresses this situation by focusing on the real successes of the sector and the strategies used by makers to achieve sustainable results. Contents: 1. Introduction * 2. Why Manufacturing Needs an Image Makeover * 3. The Future of Manufacturing Debate * 4. How UK Manufacturers Create Value * 5. Branded Businesses * 6. Innovation Pathways * 7. Manufacturing’s Business Model * 8. Ecosystems supporting manufacturing success * 9. Conclusion and Implications May 2015 UK May 2015 US 208pp 16 figures, 6 b/w tables Hardback £70.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137465214

Strategic Thinking for Turbulent Times M S S el Namaki, Victoria University, The School of Management, Switzerland Strategic Thinking for Turbulent Times is a conceptual and operational guide to the process of business strategy formulation within a turbulence driven economic and business environment. This book features pioneering work on the process of strategic thinking after the dramatic shift in the fundamental premises of strategic management. Contents: Part I: The Fall of the Gurus: Are Yesterday’s Strategic Thinking Concepts Valid Today? * Part II: The Driving Forces of Strategic Thinking Today * Part II.1: Fundamental Shifts in the Foundations of Strategic Behaviour * Part II.2: Capital Markets * Part II.3: The Corporation * Part.II.4: The China Factor * Part III: How Will Companies Strategize Tomorrow? * Part IV: The New Landscape November 2014 UK November 2014 US 208pp 21 figures, 5 b/w tables Hardback £67.00 / $105.00 / CN$121.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137413987

9781137413987

The Trend Management Toolkit A Practical Guide to the Future Anne Lise Kjaer, Kjaer Global, Denmark “Our success relies on adapting to the future faster than our competitors. This book’s toolkit is an invaluable resource to think deeply about that future.” - Sir Ian Cheshire, Group CEO, Kingfisher Plc “Just as Alvin Toffler’s Third Wave helped frame the coming decades for me in 1980, Anne Lise Kjaer has put words to the uncertainties and opportunities facing our global village in coming years. The need to think in terms of circular economies and understand the critical relevance of social inclusion has never been greater. She equips the reader with both the mind set and the tools to help adapt, and even thrive, in the face of radical change.” - Gary Baker, Executive Director, Climate Change & Sustainability Services, EY (Ernst & Young AB) “Trends – every company depends on understanding them yet few do. In Anne Lise Kjaer’s new book, The Trend Management Toolkit, she takes a brave step into the future by introducing a new way of predicting and managing trends. She has cracked it!” - Martin Lindstrom, New York Times best-selling author of Brandwashed and Buyology In a fast moving world, businesses need to keep up with data analysis and pattern spotting to identify future opportunities. Anne Lise Kjaer presents a unique methodology for global trend spotting along with practical tools and approaches to help companies and organizations analyse market changes and determine the way ahead. Contents: 1. From Facts to Feelings * 2. Sense Making in a Fast Forward Society * 3. Trend Mapping: Past, Present and Future * 4. Your Essential Trend Toolkit * 5. Major Trends 2030 * 6. Practical Trend Mapping: Focusing on People * 7. Practical Trend Mapping: Organizations October 2014 UK November 2014 US 260pp 8 b/w tables, 1 b/w illustration, 31 figures Hardback £22.99 / $36.00 / CN$40.00 9781137370082 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137370082

9781137465214

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

STRATEGY Models of Scenario Building and Planning Facing Uncertainty and Complexity Antonio Martelli, Università Bocconi, Italy

Applied Financial Macroeconomics and Investment Strategy A Practitioner’s Guide to Tactical Asset Allocation

Models of Scenario Building and Planning offers a unique and innovative exploration of the scenario approach. The book focuses on the analysis of the competitors’ behavior; the analysis of risk and uncertainty; and the link between scenarios and strategies.

Robert T. McGee, U.S.Trust, Bank of America Private Wealth Management, USA The absolute and relative performance of various asset classes is systematically related to macroeconomic trends. In this new book, Robert McGee provides a thorough guide to each stage of the business cycle and analyzes the investment implications using real-world examples linking economic dynamics to investment results.

Contents: 1. Why Scenario Planning? * 2. The Missions of Scenarios * 3. The Fundamentals of Environmental Analysis * 4. Information, Intelligence and Competitive Intelligence * 5. The Principles of Scenario Building * 6. From Scenario Building to Scenario Planning: a) Intuitive Logic and Trend Impact Analysis * 7. From Scenario Building to Scenario Planning: b) Cross Impact Analysis and Morphological Analysis * 8. Scenario Planning, Strategies and Mental Models * 9. Scenarios in Decision Making * 10. Scenarios and the Organisation

Bocconi on Management October 2014 UK October 2014 US 320pp 38 figures, 9 b/w tables Hardback £70.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137293497

Global Financial Markets 9781137293497

Digitizing Government Understanding and Implementing New Digital Business Models Alan Brown, University of Leeds, Jerry Fishenden, HM Government, UK, Mark Thompson, Cambridge Judge Business School, UK “A compelling guide that shows how public services can use new technology to create entirely new organizations, structures, systems, processes, and business models that deliver services in better, easier, cheaper, and faster ways.” - Steve Denning, former CTO, World Bank, author of The Leader’s Guide to Radical Management ‘This book gives practical insight and encouragement for everyone leading, building, operating, and assuring the new digital future for UK government. But it is also an essential read for those who need to understand what digital means and how much more than just new technology it is going to take to make digital public services a reality.” - Sally Howes, Digital Director, National Audit Office, UK ‘Government has a choice – to embrace digital change or risk entrenching costly, inefficient services that will increasingly frustrate citizens. As key influencers of the UK government’s digital strategy, the authors understand the huge benefits and potential pitfalls that the digital revolution offers – their insights provide vital guidance for policymakers and practitioners alike on how technology can transform public services.’ - Bryan Glick, Editor in Chief, Computer Weekly For businesses large and small, investment in digital technologies is now a priority essential for success. Digitizing Government provides practical advice for understanding and implementing digital transformation to increase business value and improve client engagement, and features case studies from the private and public sectors. Contents: Introduction * Part One – Summary of The Past Twenty Years * Part Two - The Next Twenty Years * Part Three - Making it Happen

Business in the Digital Economy November 2014 UK December 2014 US 290pp 37 figures, 14 b/w tables Hardback £29.99 / $47.00 / CN$54.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137443625

Contents: 1. Cycles and Trends * 2. Business Cycles and Trends * 3. Monetary Policy Cycles and Trends * 4. Credit Cycles and Trends * 5. Equity Market Cycles and Trends * 6. Commodity Market Cycles and Trends * 7. Other Major Trend Drivers: Technological Change and Globalization * 8. Case Study: The 2007-2008 Financial Crisis

9781137443625

May 2015 UK April 2015 US 272pp 74 Illustrations Hardback £49.99 / $80.00 / CN$92.00 Canadian Rights www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137428394

9781137428394

From Capitalistic to Humanistic Business Edited by Michael Pirson, Graduate School of Business, Fordham University, New York, USA, Ulrich Steinvorth, University of Hamburg, Germany, Carlos LargachaMartinez, Universidad EAN, Columbia, Claus Dierksmeier, Weltethos Institut, Germany From Capitalistic to Humanistic Business addresses the challenges to shareholder capitalism. It explores: fair play in the market place;challenges on systemic, organizational and individual levels; the need to refocus our economic system around community and cooperation; the current challenges and transform capitalism. Contents: PART I: RESTITUTING FAIR PLAY * 1. Roger L. Martin, The Gaming of Games and the Principle of Principles * 2. Hans Kueng, The Global Economic Crisis Requires a Global Ethic * PART II: FOR QUALITATIVE GROWTH * 3. Capra and Henderson¸ Qualitative Growth * 4. Sandra Waddock, The Changing Social Role of Business in a World of Collapsing Boundaries * PART III: FOR COOPERATION AND COMMUNITY * 5. Alperovitz and Dubb, The Possibility of a Pluralist Commonwealth and a Community-Sustaining Economy * 6. Riane Eisler, Roadmap to a New Economics: Beyond Capitalism and Socialism * 7. Noreena Hertz, Co-op Capitalism * PART IV: CHANGE BY SPECIFIC REFORMS: BASIC INCOME, PROPERTY RIGHTS, MONEY, EDUCATION * 8. Ulrich Steinvorth, Marx’s Critique of Capitalism and Basic Income * 9. Shann Turnbull, What Defines Capitalism? What is Wrong With It and How to Fix it? * 10. Fuders and Max-Neef, Local Money as Solution to Capitalist Global Financial Crises * 11. Scharmer and Kaeuffer, Transforming from Ego to Eco Capitalism * Conclusions

Humanism in Business Series December 2014 UK December 2014 US 240pp 7 figures, 1 b/w table Hardback £75.00 / $115.00 / CN$133.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137468185

9781137468185

TOURISM The Family Business Map

TOURISM

Assets and Roadblocks in Long Term Planning Morten Bennedsen, INSEAD, France, Joseph P.H. Fan, The Chinese University of Hong Kong, Hong Kong ‘For the first time, I see a book that provides a structured approach to the unique contributions families deliver to their firms and to the design of corporate and family governance, to reduce the challenges ahead’. - Willem M. van Eeghen, President, The Henokiens, International Association of Bi-Centenary Family Companies ‘This book contains the essence of the most valuable insights gained through large scale and long-term research that has been published in leading academic journals about family-controlled businesses. The tools proposed have been tested on all continents and they work! A must-read.’ - André Hoffmann, Chairman, Massellaz SA; Vice President, WWF International “The combined knowledge of two professors from very different universes, with case studies from all over the world, this book provides family businesses with a powerful tool to make the most of their assets.” - Priscilla de Moustier, Director of Wendel, Wendel-Participations, and FBN International; Vice President of the French chapter of FBN Combining the expertise of two consultants and academics from East and West, this book provides an international guide for family businesses, showing how to identify and implement the best governance strategies. Packed with case studies and interviews, this is the ultimate guide for family businesses wanting to achieve long-term success. Contents: 1. Building Blocks * 2. Family Assets * 3. Roadblocks * 4. The Family Business Map * 5. Ownership Design * 6. Succession * 7. EXIT * 8. Beyond the Family Business Map

INSEAD Business Press September 2014 UK October 2014 US 266pp 32 figures, 5 b/w tables, 2 b/w illustrations Hardback £29.99 / $45.00 / CN$52.00 9781137382351 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137382351

Rural Cooperation in Europe In Search of the ‘Relational Rurals’ Edited by Edward Kasabov, University of Exeter, UK This collection analyses various European rural locations through a relational lens, attending to key aspects and dimensions of the ‘relational rurals’ such as cooperation, contestation, solidarity and consensus. By observing rural settings in such terms, contributors are able to rethink European rurality from a distinctly relational perspective. Contents: Introduction: Exploring the Rural through a Relational Lens; Edward Kasabov * 1. The Character of Rural Business Relations; Robert Newbery and Gary Bosworth * 2. Institutional Cooperation and Service Delivery in Rural Ireland; Mary O’Shaughnessy and Patrick Enright * 3. Cross-Community Cooperation in Post-Socialist Hungarian Rural Space; Eva Fekete * 4. Class Conflict and Social Change in the British Countryside, 1990-2013: Urban Values Rural Issues; Sue Bestwick * 5. Performing the Rural through Game-Angling; Tom Mordue * 6. Reviewing and Renewing Class: The Prospects for a 21st Century Rural Class Analysis; Jesse Heley * 7. Governing Sustainable Tourism: European Networked Rural Villages; Frank Go, Maria Della Lucia, Mariapina Trunfio and Umberto Martini * 8. Rural Development Policy in the Framework of the Knowledge-Based Economy: Selective Impacts and Solutions in the Case of the Czech Republic; Martin Pelucha, Eva Cudlinova and Miloslav Lapka * 9. Processes of Cooperation in Rural Areas: Obstacles, Driving Forces and Options for Encouragement; Kim Pollerman * 10. Toward a Post-Structuralist and Cultural Turn in Researching Rurality in Poland: A Geographical Perspective; Konrad Czapiewski and Marcin Wójcik * 11. Re-Thinking Rural Conflict and Cooperation Difficulties; Alex Warlow and Edward Kasabov * Conclusion; Edward Kasabov October 2014 UK October 2014 US 320pp 9 b/w tables, 12 figures Hardback £65.00 / $100.00 / CN$115.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137348883

9781137348883

Disruptive Tourism and its Untidy Guests Follow us on

Follow Palgrave Macmillan on Facebook®. ‘Like’ our Facebook® page to get the latest news, reviews and event invites.

for the latest news, events and competitions

www.facebook.com/PalgraveMacmillan

www.twitter.com/PalgraveBiz

@PalgraveBiz

Alternative Ontologies for Future Hospitalities Soile Veijola, University of Lapland, Finland, Jennie Germann Molz, College of the Holy Cross, USA, Olli Pyyhtinen, University of Tampere, Finland, Emily Höckert, University of Helsinki, Finland, Alexander Grit, Stenden University, the Netherlands Disruptive Tourism and its Untidy Guests invokes the radical potentialities of ‘untidiness’ to envision alternative arrangements of social life and hospitality. Instead of trying to manage sustainability or tidy up tourist situations, the authors embrace the messiness of human relations and argue for more creative, embodied and ethical ontologies of tourism and mobility. Contents: 1. Introduction: Alternative Tourism Ontologies * 2. Camping In Clearing; Jennie Germann Molz * 3. Paradise With/Out Parasites ; Olli Pyyhtinen * 4. Towards Silent Communities; Soile Veijola * 5. Unlearning Through Hospitality; Emily Höckert * 6. Messing Around With Serendipities; Alexander Grit * 7. Conclusion: Prepositions and Other Stories

Leisure Studies in a Global Era October 2014 UK October 2014 US 176pp Hardback £60.00 / $95.00 / CN$110.00 Canadian Rights ebooks available www.palgrave.com/page/detail/?k=9781137399496

Click on the product links to buy or learn more.

9781137399496

LEFT HEADER

RIGHT HEADER

Palgrave Macmillan now offers authors and their funders the option to publish open access research across all publication formats. Palgrave Macmillan journal articles, monographs and Palgrave Pivot publications can now be made open access immediately upon publication via Palgrave Open. Open access ensures the free, unrestricted and rapid communication of the results of scholarly research online. Palgrave Open publishes all open access content under the terms of the Creative Commons Attribution (CC BY) to support maximum dissemination and use.

Benefits for authors: • Compliance with a range of international open access policies • A professional and rigorous peer-review process • Wide dissemination: open access publishing means that titles are available online, immediately and without restriction

Open Access Funding Support Service For information about research funders and institutions that provide funding for open access, visit our sister company Nature Publishing Group’s funding information page: nature.com/authors/open_access/funding.html Palgrave Macmillan and Nature Publishing Group offers an APC support service to make it easier for our authors to discover and apply for open access funding. Email openaccess@nature.com for advice on what funding is available to you and help in approaching funders and institutions.

www.palgrave.com/open

HUMANITIES | SOCIAL SCIENCES | BUSINESS

Articles now available

INTRODUCING THE FIRST MULTIDISCIPLINARY AND INTERDISCIPLINARY OPEN ACCESS JOURNAL FROM PALGRAVE MACMILLAN Palgrave Communications is a high-quality peer-reviewed open access journal for research in all areas of the humanities, the social sciences (HSS) and business.

SUBMIT YOUR RESEARCH AND BENEFIT FROM: • Quality and reputation • High standards of peer review • High visibility • Impact • Speed • Article level metrics

VISIT THE WEBSITE TO VIEW ALL PUBLISHED ARTICLES SIGN UP FOR E-ALERTS

www.palgrave-journals.com/palcomms

DEVELOP YOUR SKILLS AS AN ACADEMIC WITH THE

PALGRAVE RESEARCH SKILLS 9780230369559

9780230392106

9780230246218

9781137395764

9781137024190

9780230308138

Also available in the series: Authoring a PhD: How to Plan, Draft, Write and Finish a Doctoral Thesis or Dissertation 1st Edition | 9781403905840 The Postgraduate Research Handbook: Succeed in your MA, MPhil, EdD and PhD 2nd Edition | 9780230521308

9781137385192

HIGH QUALITY RESOURCES FOR GRADUATE STUDENTS, RESEARCHERS AND ACADEMICS

SALES, RIGHTS AND ORDERING UK & EUROPE

LATIN AMERICA & CARIBBEAN

ASIA

UNITED KINGDOM

Palgrave Macmillan Limited Tel: +44 (0) 207 418 5886 Email: Judith.Taboy@palgrave.com

HONG KONG, PHILIPPINES, THAILAND, VIETNAM & INDONESIA

Luke Payne Tel: +44 (0)207 418 5923 Email: luke.payne@palgrave.com

UK DIRECT ORDERS

Tel: +44 (0)207 418 5802 Email: orders@palgrave.com

UK LECTURER ORDERS

Tel: +44(0)1256 302794 Fax: +44(0)1256 330688 Email: lecturerservices@palgrave.com

UK TRADE ORDERS

Tel: +44(0)0256 302692 Fax: +44(0)1256 812558 Email: orders@macmillan.co.uk

UK PRESS ENQUIRIES

Email: reviews@palgrave.com

EUROPE (EXCEPT AREAS LISTED) Luke Payne Tel: +44 (0)207 418 5923 Email: luke.payne@palgrave.com

CENTRAL & EASTERN EUROPE Jacek Lewinson Tel./fax: +48 22 6283956 Mobile: +48 (0)502603290 Email: jacek@jaceklewinson.com

GREECE & CYPRUS

Zitsa Seraphimidi Tel: +210 5245 798 Fax: +210 9816816 Mobile: + 0030 6944 441184 Email: zitsaser@otenet.gr

AUSTRIA, GERMANY, SWIZERLAND, ITALY & FRANCE David Pickering Mare-Nostrum Tel: +39 348 3183884 UK Mobile: +44 798 6559391

DENMARK, NETHERLANDS, BELGIUM & LUXEMBOURG Alan Moon Mobile: +44 (0)7734 739 941 Email: a.moon@Palgrave.com

SPAIN

Trinidad Lopez Tel/Fax: +34 91 3528349 Email: trini@arrakis.es

NORWAY, SWEDEN, FINLAND & ICELAND

COLOMBIA

GRUPO K-T-DRA Ltda Tel: +2570895/2187629 Fax: +2187629 Email: aramirez@k-t-dra.com

NORTH AMERICA U.S. & CANADA

Palgrave Macmillan Limited Tel: +44 (0) 207 418 5886 Email: Judith.Taboy@palgrave.com

Address for orders in the U.S. & Canada Attn.: Palgrave Orders MPS 16365 James Madison Highway (US Route 15) Gordonsville, VA 22942 Email: customerservice@mpsvirginia.com To place an order by phone: 888-330-8477 To place an order by fax: 800-672-2054 MPS accepts orders on PUBNET. PUBNET.SAN number 6315011.

KOREA

Macmillan Korea Publishers Limited Tel: +82 2 723 8422 Fax: +82 2 723 8424 Email: Korea.info@macmillan.com

TAIWAN

Macmillan Taiwan Limited Tel: +886 2 2388 3208 Fax: +886 2 2375 6882 Email: taipei@macmillan.com

SINGAPORE

Pansing Distribution Pte Ltd Tel +65 6319 9939 Fax +65 6459 4930 Email: infobooks@pansing.com

MALAYSIA

UBSD DISTRIBUTION SDN. BHD. Tel: +603 80763042 Fax: +603 80763142 Email: enquiry@ubsd-dist.com

CHINA

AUSTRALIA & NEW ZEALAND

Macmillan Ltd Tel: +86 (10) 8881 1358 Email: china@macmillan.com

AUSTRALIA & NEW ZEALAND

JAPAN

Palgrave Macmillan Tel: +61(0)3 9825 1111 Fax: +61(0)3 9825 1010 Email: palgrave@macmillan.com.au Web: www.palgravemacmillan.com.au

AFRICA SOUTHERN AFRICA

Including Botswana, Lesotho, Swaziland, Zimbabwe and Namibia Cory Voigt Tel: +27 11 731 3300 Fax: +27 11 731 3569 Email: palgrave@macmillan.co.za

ALL AREAS NOT LISTED

Palgrave Macmillan Limited Tel: +44 (0) 207 418 5886 Email: Judith.Taboy@palgrave.com

Luke Payne Tel: +44 (0)207 418 5923 Email: luke.payne@palgrave.com

Macmillan Education Asia Tel: +852 2811 7176 Fax: + 852 2811 0743 Email: macasia@macmillan.com.hk

Palgrave Macmillan Limited Tel: +44 (0) 207 418 5886 Email: Judith.Taboy@palgrave.com

INDIA

Jagat Bahadur Manager-Customer Services Palgrave Macmillan (a division of MPIL) 2nd Floor, 2/10 Ansari Road, Daryaganj, New Delhi 110002 P: 0091 11 2325 4020 E: jagat.bahadur@macmillan.co.in M: 0091 88268 95838

PAKISTAN

M. Anwer Iqbal Book Bird, 36-B, Abdalian Tel: +92 42 35956200 Mobile: +92 313 8464747 Email: anwer.bookbird@gmail.com

MIDDLE EAST ALL AREAS NOT LISTED

Palgrave Macmillan Limited Tel: +44 (0) 207 418 5886 Email: Judith.Taboy@palgrave.com

Click on the regional link to view more product information or to buy.

ISBN: 9780230396104